Professional Documents
Culture Documents
DNV GL Rules For Trawlers
DNV GL Rules For Trawlers
Seagoing Ships
Fishing Vessels
Edition 2007
Table of Contents
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Chapter 8
Page 3
Table of Contents
Section 1
General
A.
Application .................................................................................................................................
1- 1
B.
1- 1
C.
1- 2
D.
Definitions ..................................................................................................................................
1- 2
E.
1- 4
Section 2
A.
General .......................................................................................................................................
2- 1
B.
2- 2
C.
2- 7
D.
2- 7
E.
2- 7
F.
2- 13
G.
2- 15
H.
2- 15
Section 3
A.
General .......................................................................................................................................
3- 1
B.
3- 1
C.
3- 6
D.
3- 8
E.
3- 8
F.
3- 8
G.
3- 9
Section 4
Hull Outfit
A.
4- 1
B.
4- 1
C.
Ventilators ..................................................................................................................................
4- 2
D.
4- 2
E.
4- 3
F.
4- 4
G.
4- 5
Table of Contents
Chapter 8
Page 4
Section 5
I - Part 1
GL 2007
A.
General ........................................................................................................................................
5- 1
B.
5- 1
C.
Anchors .......................................................................................................................................
5- 2
D.
5- 3
E.
5- 4
F.
Chain Locker
..............................................................................................................................
5- 5
G.
Windlasses ..................................................................................................................................
5- 5
H.
5- 6
Section 6
A.
General ........................................................................................................................................
6- 1
B.
6- 2
C.
Dimensioning ..............................................................................................................................
6- 3
D.
Construction ................................................................................................................................
6- 4
E.
6- 6
F.
6- 6
Section 7
A.
General ........................................................................................................................................
7- 1
B.
Requirements for Fire Protection for Fishing Vessels with 12 m L < 45 m .............................
7- 1
C.
7- 2
Section 8
A.
General ........................................................................................................................................
8- 1
B.
8- 2
C.
8- 3
D.
8- 3
E.
8- 4
F.
8- 5
G.
8- 5
H.
8- 6
Section 9a
A.
General ........................................................................................................................................
9a- 1
B.
9a- 1
C.
9a- 1
D.
9a- 1
E.
9a- 3
F.
9a- 4
G.
9a- 5
H.
9a- 5
Table of Contents
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9b
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
Section 9c
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Section 9d
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
Q.
Section 9e
A.
B.
C.
Chapter 8
Page 5
9b- 1
9b- 2
9b- 4
9b- 4
9b- 6
9b- 11
9b- 14
9b- 16
9b- 18
9b- 19
9b- 19
9b- 19
9b- 19
Propulsion System
Main Shafting .............................................................................................................................
Gears, Couplings ........................................................................................................................
Propellers and Special Propulsion Devices ................................................................................
Steering Gear ..............................................................................................................................
Machinery for Fishing Vessels with Ice Classes ........................................................................
Torsional Vibrations ..................................................................................................................
9c- 1
9c- 6
9c- 9
9c- 15
9c- 18
9c- 18
9d- 1
9d- 1
9d- 6
9d- 8
9d- 13
9d- 15
9d- 17
9d- 18
9d- 19
9d- 20
9d- 20
9d- 22
9d- 23
9d- 25
9d- 26
9d- 27
9d- 27
9e- 1
9e- 2
9e- 2
Table of Contents
Chapter 8
Page 6
Section 10
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
Q.
Section 11a
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
Section 11b
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Section 11c
A.
B.
C.
D.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Refrigeration Installations
General ........................................................................................................................................
Installation, Design and Rating ...................................................................................................
Refrigerants .................................................................................................................................
Refrigerating Machinery Spaces .................................................................................................
Refrigerant Compressors ............................................................................................................
Pressure Vessels and Apparatus ..................................................................................................
Pipes, Valves and Fittings ...........................................................................................................
Fans and Pumps ..........................................................................................................................
Cooling Water Supply ................................................................................................................
Safety and Monitoring Equipment ..............................................................................................
Pressure and Tightness Tests ......................................................................................................
Insulation of Pressure Vessels, Apparatus, Pipes, Valves and Fittings .......................................
Equipment and Insulation of Refrigerated Spaces ......................................................................
Temperature Monitoring Equipment for Refrigerated Spaces ....................................................
Quick Freezing Installations .......................................................................................................
Spare Parts and Protective Equipment ........................................................................................
Shipboard Testing .......................................................................................................................
10- 1
10- 2
10- 4
10- 5
10- 6
10- 7
10- 8
10- 9
10- 9
10- 9
10- 10
10- 10
10- 11
10- 12
10- 13
10- 13
10- 13
11a11a11a11a11a11a11a11a11a11a11a11a-
1
1
3
3
4
5
5
6
6
6
8
8
11b11b11b11b11b11b-
1
1
1
3
4
4
11c11c11c11c-
1
1
2
3
Table of Contents
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 11d
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
Section 11e
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Section 11f
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Section 11g
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
Section 11h
A.
B.
C.
D.
Chapter 8
Page 7
11d11d11d11d11d11d11d11d11d-
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
11e11e11e11e11e11e11e-
1
1
2
2
3
4
5
11f11f11f11f11f11f11f-
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
11g11g11g11g11g11g11g11g-
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
11h11h11h11h-
1
1
2
3
Switchgear Assemblies
General .......................................................................................................................................
Construction ...............................................................................................................................
Selection of Switchgear ..............................................................................................................
Choice of Electrical Protection Equipment ................................................................................
Conductors, Bus Bars, Wiring ....................................................................................................
Measuring Instrument's Characteristics ......................................................................................
Testing of Switchboards and Switchgear ...................................................................................
Power Electronics
General .......................................................................................................................................
Construction ...............................................................................................................................
Rating and Design ......................................................................................................................
Cooling .......................................................................................................................................
Control and Monitoring ..............................................................................................................
Protection Equipment .................................................................................................................
Tests ...........................................................................................................................................
Power Equipment
Steering Gear ..............................................................................................................................
Lateral Thrust Propellers ............................................................................................................
Variable Pitch Propeller Systems for Main Propulsion System ................................................
Auxiliary Machinery and Systems ..............................................................................................
Deck Machinery, Winches .........................................................................................................
Electrical Heating Equipment and Heaters .................................................................................
Plug and Socket Connections for Movable Power Consumers ...................................................
Refrigeration Installations for Preservation of the Catch ...........................................................
Table of Contents
Chapter 8
Page 8
Section 11i
I - Part 1
GL 2007
A.
B.
C.
Section 11j
Cable Network
A.
B.
C.
D.
Section 11k
Electrical Equipment
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
Section 11l
Tests
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Section 12
A.
General ........................................................................................................................................
12- 1
B.
12- 1
C.
12- 1
D.
12- 2
E.
12- 3
F.
12- 4
G.
12- 4
H.
Miscellaneous .............................................................................................................................
12- 4
I.
12- 4
Section 13
Spare Parts
A.
General ........................................................................................................................................
13- 1
B.
13- 1
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Index
Chapter 8
Page 9
Index
A
Accessibility ................................................................................................................................................ 9a-4, 9b-1
Accessories ............................................................................................................................................................ 6-1
Accident prevention ............................................................................................................................................... 6-6
Air coolers ........................................................................................................................................................... 10-7
Air pipes .......................................................................................................................................................... 2-5, 4-1
Air, overflow and sounding pipes ...................................................................................................................... 9d-23
Alarm systems .............................................................................................................................. 8-1, 8-3, 10-3, 12-2
Alarms .......................................................................................................................................... 9b-19, 11g-2, 11h-3
Allowable working pressures ............................................................................................................................... 10-4
Aluminium ........................................................................................................................................................... 9d-3
Ambient conditions ....................................................................................................................................... 1-2, 9a-1
Ammonia .............................................................................................................................................................. 10-4
Anchor equipment .................................................................................................................................................. 5-1
Anchors .................................................................................................................................................................. 5-2
Anti-heeling devices .............................................................................................................................................. 2-1
Automation .......................................................................................................................................................... 12-1
Availability ............................................................................................................................................... 9a-2, 11c-2
B
Balancing ............................................................................................................................................................. 9c-8
Bathing ................................................................................................................................................................ 11i-2
Batteries .................................................................................................................................................. 11b-1, 11c-2
Bearings ............................................................................................................................................................. 11k-1
Bilge lines .......................................................................................................................................................... 9d-20
Bilge suctions ..................................................................................................................................................... 9d-20
Bilge wells ............................................................................................................................................................. 4-3
Blade geometry .................................................................................................................................................. 9c-13
Blade thickness .................................................................................................................................................. 9c-11
Boilers .................................................................................................................................................. 8-2, 9e-1, 12-4
Bollards .................................................................................................................................................................. 5-7
Bottom ceiling ........................................................................................................................................................ 4-1
Bow height ........................................................................................................................................................... 2-11
Bridge ................................................................................................................................ 9b-19, 9c-17, 11h-2, 12-3
Brine tanks ........................................................................................................................................................... 10-7
Brines ..................................................................................................................................................................... 3-8
Chapter 8
Page 10
Index
I - Part 1
GL 2007
C
Cables ............................................................................................................................................ 11j-1, 11k-7, 11l-2
Call systems ......................................................................................................................................................... 12-3
Calorifiers .......................................................................................................................................................... 11k-9
Carbon dioxide .................................................................................................................................................... 10-4
Cargo fish tween decks .......................................................................................................................................... 4-2
Cargo spaces ................................................................................................................................................... 7-9, 8-6
Catch handling gear ............................................................................................................................................... 6-3
Ceiling at tank bulkheads ....................................................................................................................................... 4-1
Certification ........................................................................................................................................................... 6-1
Chain cables .......................................................................................................................................................... 5-3
Chain locker .......................................................................................................................................................... 5-5
Chargers ............................................................................................................................................................. 11k-6
Chlorodifluormethane .......................................................................................................................................... 10-4
Circuit breakers .................................................................................................................................................. 11e-2
Circuits ............................................................................................................................................................... 11j-2
Clamp-type couplings ........................................................................................................................................... 9c-9
Class Notations ......................................................................................................................... 1-1, 10-1, 11h-2, 12-1
Classification ......................................................................................................................................................... 1-2
Cleats ..................................................................................................................................................................... 5-7
Closure conditions ................................................................................................................................................. 2-1
Closures ................................................................................................................................................................. 2-2
Collision bulkhead ............................................................................................................................................... 2-13
Combustible materials .................................................................................................................................... 7-1, 7-7
Communication ........................................................................................................................................ 9a-5, 11h-2
Compass zone ..................................................................................................................................................... 11j-4
Compensators .................................................................................................................................................... 9d-27
Compressed air lines .......................................................................................................................................... 9d-19
Compressors ...................................................................................................................................................... 9b-19
Computers ......................................................................................................................................................... 11h-1
Conductors ............................................................................................................................................... 11e-3, 11j-1
Control .................................................................................................................... 11f-2, 11g-1, 11h-1, 11h-2, 11l-3
Control station .......................................................................................................................................... 9b-2, 9b-18
Coolers .............................................................................................................................................................. 9d-18
Cooling .................................................................................................................................................... 11f-2, 11k-1
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Index
Chapter 8
Page 11
D
Damage control plan ............................................................................................................................................ 2-16
Damage stability .................................................................................................................................................. 2-13
Dead ship condition ................................................................................................................................ 11a-3, 11c-1
Deck machinery ................................................................................................................................................. 11g-3
Deck openings ........................................................................................................................................................ 4-3
Deck sheathing ....................................................................................................................................................... 4-1
Deep-fat cooking equipment .................................................................................................................................. 8-6
Definition of fishing vessels ................................................................................................................................... 1-1
Definitions ................................................................................................................................................ 10-1, 11a-1
Defrosting .......................................................................................................................................................... 10-11
Diesel engines ...................................................................................................................................................... 9b-1
Dock trials ........................................................................................................................................................... 11l-2
Documents .......................................... 1-4, 2-1, 6-2, 7-1, 8-1, 9a-1, 9b-2, 9c-1, 9d-1, 9e-1, 10-1, 11a-3, 11l-1, 12-1
Door sills ................................................................................................................................................................ 2-2
Double bottom ..................................................................................................................................................... 2-13
Draught marking .................................................................................................................................................... 2-7
Drinking water systems ...................................................................................................................................... 9d-26
E
Earthing ......................................................................................................................................... 9b-11, 11a-5, 11j-4
Electrical equipment .................................................................................................................... 11b-1, 11f-1, 11k-1
Electrical installations ........................................................................................................................................ 11a-1
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) ............................................................................................................... 11a-8
Electronic equipment ......................................................................................................... 11b-4, 11d-2, 11f-2, 11l-3
Emergency fire-extinguisher set ......................................................................................................................... 9b-18
Emergency generating set ....................................................................................................................... 9b-17, 11c-3
Emergency shut down ........................................................................................................................................ 11d-4
Emergency switchboards ............................................................................................................. 11b-4, 11d-2, 11e-2
Engine alignment/seating ................................................................................................................................... 9b-19
Environmental conditions ........................................................................................................................... 1-2, 11a-4
Equipment numeral ................................................................................................................................................ 5-1
Chapter 8
Page 12
Index
I - Part 1
GL 2007
F
Fairleads ................................................................................................................................................................ 6-5
Fans
10-9
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Index
Chapter 8
Page 13
G
Galley ..................................................................................................................................................................... 8-6
Gas bottles ......................................................................................................................................................... 9d-29
Gears .................................................................................................................................................................... 9c-6
Generators .............................................................................................................. 11b-1, 11c-2, 11d-1, 11e-1, 11l-2
Governors .......................................................................................................................................................... 9b-12
Guard rails ............................................................................................................................................................. 4-3
Guidelines .............................................................................................................................................................. 1-1
H
Hawses ................................................................................................................................................................... 5-7
Heating .................................................................................................................................................... 11g-3, 11k-9
Heavy fuel oils ................................................................................................................................................... 9d-15
High holding power anchors .................................................................................................................................. 5-2
Hose assemblies ................................................................................................................................................. 9d-27
Hull structures ........................................................................................................................................................ 3-1
Hydraulic oil tanks ............................................................................................................................................. 9d-28
Hydraulic systems ................................................................................................................................................ 12-1
I
Ice accretion ......................................................................................................................................................... 2-13
Ice class .............................................................................................................................................................. 9c-18
Inclinations ............................................................................................................................................................. 1-2
Inlets ...................................................................................................................................................................... 2-5
Installation protection ........................................................................................................................................ 11d-1
Insulation .................................................................................................................................................... 8-2, 10-10
Insulation resistance ..................................................................................................................... 11e-3, 11f-3, 11k-3
Intact buoyancy ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-7
Intact stability ........................................................................................................................................................ 2-7
Internal combustion engines ................................................................................................................................ 9b-1
J
Jumper stays ........................................................................................................................................................... 6-5
Chapter 8
Page 14
Index
I - Part 1
GL 2007
L
Lateral thrust units .................................................................................................................................. 9c-15, 11g-2
Life-saving appliances ........................................................................................................................................... 4-5
Lifting appliances ........................................................................................................................................... 6-1, 6-4
Lighting ........................................................................................................................................ 11d-3, 11i-1, 11k-8
Loads ..................................................................................................................................................................... 6-1
Lubricating oil systems ........................................................................................................................... 9b-15, 9d-15
Lubricating oil tanks .......................................................................................................................................... 9d-24
M
Main shafting ........................................................................................................................................................ 9c-1
Mains quality ...................................................................................................................................................... 11a-5
Manual operation ........................................................................................................................................ 9a-2, 12-1
Masts ..................................................................................................................................................................... 4-4
Materials .............................................................................................. 5-1, 7-2, 9b-4, 9c-1, 9c-6, 9c-10, 9d-1, 11a-6
Measuring instruments ........................................................................................................................................ 11e-2
Mechanical joints ................................................................................................................................................. 9d-9
Membrane type tanks for brines ............................................................................................................................ 3-8
Mobility .............................................................................................................................................................. 11j-1
Monitoring ......................................................................................................................... 11e-3, 11f-2, 11h-1, 11k-7
Mooring at sea ....................................................................................................................................................... 3-1
Mooring equipment ............................................................................................................................................... 5-6
Mooring winches ................................................................................................................................................... 5-7
Motor protection ................................................................................................................................................. 11e-3
Motors ............................................................................................................................................................... 11g-1
Mounting ................................................................................................................................................. 9c-14, 11i-1
Movements ............................................................................................................................................................ 1-2
N
Navigation in ice ................................................................................................................................................. 9c-18
Noise ..................................................................................................................................................................... 9a-4
O
Oil burners ............................................................................................................................................................ 9e-2
Oil firing equipment ............................................................................................................................................. 9e-2
Oil fuel systems ................................................................................................................................................. 9d-13
Oil residues ............................................................................................................................................. 9d-22, 9d-27
Oily water separating equipment ....................................................................................................................... 9d-22
Openings ................................................................................................................................................................ 2-2
Operating and maintenance instructions ............................................................................................................... 9a-3
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Index
Chapter 8
Page 15
P
Paint store .............................................................................................................................................................. 8-6
Pelagic trawl .......................................................................................................................................................... 6-3
Penetrations ......................................................................................................................................................... 11j-4
Permeability .................................................................................................................................................. 2-1, 2-14
Pipe classes .......................................................................................................................................................... 9d-1
Pipe connections .................................................................................................................................................. 9d-8
Piping systems ..................................................................................................................................................... 9d-1
Plan approval ......................................................................................................................................................... 6-2
Plastic pipes ......................................................................................................................................................... 9d-2
Plug
Q
Quick freezing installations ................................................................................................................................ 10-13
R
Radar masts ............................................................................................................................................................ 4-4
Recording points .................................................................................................................................................. 12-4
Refrigerated seawater tanks (RSW) ..................................................................................................................... 10-7
Refrigerating machinery spaces ........................................................................................................................... 10-5
Refrigerating units ................................................................................................................................................ 10-2
Refrigeration installations .................................................................................................................................... 10-1
Chapter 8
Page 16
Index
I - Part 1
GL 2007
S
Safety equipment ........................................................................................................................................ 9a-4, 10-9
Safety systems .............................................................................................. 9b-10, 11d-4, 11h-1, 11h-3, 11l-3, 12-2
Saunas .................................................................................................................................................................... 7-9
Scavenge trunks ..................................................................................................................................................... 8-6
Sea chests .......................................................................................................................................................... 9d-17
Sea trials ............................................................................................................................................................. 11l-3
Sealing .................................................................................................................................................................. 9c-2
Seawater cooling systems .................................................................................................................................. 9d-17
Sewage systems ................................................................................................................................................. 9d-26
Shaft alignment ..................................................................................................................................................... 9c-6
Shaft bearings ....................................................................................................................................................... 9c-4
Shaft diameter ....................................................................................................................................................... 9c-1
Shaft liners ............................................................................................................................................................ 9c-3
Shielding ............................................................................................................................................................ 9b-14
Shore connection ............................................................................................................................................... 11d-2
Short-circuit ............................................................................................................................................ 11e-2, 11g-1
Shower ................................................................................................................................................................ 11i-2
Side doors .............................................................................................................................................................. 3-9
Side gallows ........................................................................................................................................................... 6-5
Side trawlers .......................................................................................................................................................... 3-1
Sidescuttles ............................................................................................................................................................ 2-6
Signal masts ........................................................................................................................................................... 4-4
Skylights ................................................................................................................................................................ 2-6
Sliding doors .......................................................................................................................................................... 2-2
Small vessels ......................................................................................................................................................... 1-1
Smoke spread ........................................................................................................................................................ 7-7
Socket ........................................................................................................................................... 11g-3, 11i-1, 11k-8
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Index
Chapter 8
Page 17
T
Temperature monitoring .................................................................................................................................... 10-12
Tests ............................ 6-7, 9a-2, 9b-4, 9c-6, 9c-15, 9d-5, 9e-2, 10-2, 10-9, 11e-5, 11f-2, 11g-2, 11k-1, 11l-1, 12-4
Tetrafluorethane ................................................................................................................................................... 10-4
Thermal oil heaters .............................................................................................................................................. 9e-1
Thermal oil plants ................................................................................................................................................ 12-4
Thermometers .................................................................................................................................................... 10-10
Tooth couplings ................................................................................................................................................... 9c-9
Torremolinos Convention ........................................................................................................................... 1-1, 11a-1
Torsional vibrations ........................................................................................................................................... 9c-18
Transformers ..................................................................................................................... 11b-3, 11d-2, 11k-5, 11l-1
Trawl booms .......................................................................................................................................................... 6-5
Trawling gear ......................................................................................................................................................... 6-3
Type tests ......................................................................................................................................... 9b-6, 9b-7, 11l-3
V
Valves ......................................................................................................................................................... 9d-8, 10-8
Ventilation ...................................................................................................................... 7-2, 7-6, 9a-4, 11b-2, 11k-1
Ventilation ducts ................................................................................................................................................ 11b-2
Chapter 8
Page 18
Index
I - Part 1
GL 2007
W
Wall thickness ..................................................................................................................................................... 9d-6
Wall thickness groups ............................................................................................................................... 9d-6, 9d-25
Warm water generators ......................................................................................................................................... 9e-1
Water on deck ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-11
Watertight doors .................................................................................................................................................... 2-2
Weather deck ......................................................................................................................................................... 3-6
Weathertight doors ................................................................................................................................................ 2-2
Winches ................................................................................................................................................................. 6-5
Windings ........................................................................................................................................................... 11k-1
Windlasses .................................................................................................................................................. 5-5, 11g-3
Windows ................................................................................................................................................................ 2-6
Wires ....................................................................................................................................................... 11j-1, 11k-7
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 1
General
Chapter 8
Page 11
Section 1
General
A.
Application
1.
Voluntary Guidelines for the Design, Construction and Equipment of Small Fishing Vessels,
FAO/ILO/IMO 2005
Approach
3.1
3.2
National regulations
4.
Equivalence
B.
Class Notations
1.
Type of Vessel
SIDE TRAWLER
STERN TRAWLER
2.
Special equipment
3.3
for vessels under German flag, e.g. "Unfallverhtungsvorschriften fr Unternehmen der Seefahrt (UVV See)", as amended for fishing vessels with L < 24 m
International regulations
Range of service
Chapter 8
Page 12
Section 1
General
I - Part 1
GL 2007
W (Sheltered Water Service) will be fixed to the Character of Classification and the special requirements for
these ranges of service will be applied.
4.
Further details
1.
The design environmental conditions for fishing vessels are contained in Table 1.2.
Design environmental conditions
Environmental
area
Type of
movement
Static
condition
Dynamic
Movement
Standard
requirements for
design conditions
Parameters
Standard
requirements for
design conditions
Outside the
vessel/air
Temperature
25 C to +45 C 1
at atmospheric pressure
1000 mbar
at relative humidity of
60 %
Outside the
vessel/seawater
Temperature
Ambient Conditions
2.
Environmental conditions
Table 1.2
C.
3.
up to +32 C 2
1,025 t/m3
Outside the
See Section 2,
vessel/icing of
E.3.7
surface
Outside the
Ice class E, E1, E2, E3, see Section 3,
vessel/navigation E4
see Section 9c, E.
in ice
0 C to +45 C 1
Inside the vessel/ Air temperature
all spaces
at atmospheric pressure
1000 mbar
at relative humidity of up to 100% (+45 C)
Inside the vessel/
specially protected control rooms
Inside the vessel/
in electrical devices with higher
degree of heat
dissipation
Air temperature
Maximum relative
humidity
100%
Structural
members/ unrestricted service
Air temperature
+5 C
Seawater temperature
up to +45 C
80%
0 C to +55 C
0 C
15
22,5
45
5
10
D.
Definitions
1.
Administration
30
30
7,5
10
2.
Co-ordinate system
For the use of these Rules the fixed, right-handed coordinate system 0, x, y, z as defined in Fig. 1.1 is introduced. The origin of the system is situated at the aft end
of the length L, at centreline and on the moulded baseline at the vessel's keel. The x-axis points in longitudinal direction of the vessel positive forward, the y-axis
positive to port and the z- axis positive upwards. Angular motions are considered positive in a clockwise direction about the three axes.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 1
General
Chapter 8
Page 13
z
FP
L/2
Q
y
j
L/2
Angles of motion:
j = roll angle
Q = pitch angle
Y = yaw angle
Fig. 1.1
3.
Principal dimensions
3.1
Length L
Forward perpendicular FP
Draught T
The draught T [m] is the vertical distance, at the middle of the length L, from base line to a waterline
which results from stability calculations according to
Section 2.
4.
Frame spacing a
3.3
5.
Breadth B
Depth H
Displacement
Block coefficient CB
CB =
Chapter 8
Page 14
Section 1
7.
Vessel speeds
7.1
Speed v0
General
Speed vTow
Definition of decks
8.1
Bulkhead deck
Freeboard deck
Strength deck
Weather deck
Lower decks
Starting from the first deck below the uppermost continuous deck, the decks are defined as 2nd, 3rd, deck,
etc.
8.6
Superstructure decks
E.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
global strength
longitudinal strength
detailed strength
For such calculations the computer model, the boundary condition and load cases are to be agreed upon
with GL.
The calculation documents are to be submitted including input and output. During the examination it may
prove necessary that GL perform independent comparative calculations.
4.
The detailed requirements for the documentation are defined in the different Sections. Reference is
also made to the GL software for documents to be
submitted (SCOL).
5.
GL reserve the right to demand additional
documentation if that submitted is insufficient for an
assessment of the ship or essential parts thereof. This
may especially be the case for plants and equipment
related to new developments and/or which are not
tested on board to a sufficient extent.
1.
The documents to obtain Class defined in the
following have to be submitted to GL in German or
English language.
2.
The survey of the vessel's construction will
be carried out on the basis of approved documents.
The drawings must contain all data necessary for assessment and approval. Where deemed necessary,
calculations and descriptions of the vessel's elements
are to be submitted. Any non-standard symbols used
6.
The drawings are to be submitted in triplicate,
all calculations and supporting documentation in one
copy for examination at a sufficiently early date to
ensure that they are approved and available to the
Surveyor at the beginning of the manufacture or installation of the ship or of important components.
7.
Once the documents submitted have been
approved by GL they are binding on the execution of
the work. Subsequent modifications and extensions
require the approval of GL before becoming effective.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 2
Chapter 8
Page 21
Section 2
Closure Conditions, Buoyancy and Stability
A.
General
6.
Definitions
1.
Classification
6.1
Watertight
Fishing vessels with a length L 12 m will be assigned Class only after it has been demonstrated that
the closure conditions, buoyancy, subdivision and
their stability are adequate for the service intended.
2.
Basic regulations
Closure conditions
Stability
4.1
Adequate intact stability means compliance
with standards laid down by the relevant Administration. GL reserve the right to deviate therefrom, if required for special reasons, taking into account the
fishing vessel's size and type.
4.2
Evidence of approval by the competent Administration of the flag state concerned may be accepted for the purpose of Classification.
4.3
Fishing vessels with proven damage stability
will be assigned the symbol , see GL Rules Part 0
Classification and Surveys, Section 2, C.2.4.
4.4
The compliance with the requirements of this
Section is to be checked by calculation and tests according to G. with the prototype, if any, or with the
actual fishing vessel itself in the fully loaded, ready
for use condition. Trials are to be carried out under the
supervision of a GL Surveyor.
Details regarding the execution of the trials are laid
down by GL Head Office, see also G.
5.
Weathertight
Angle of heel
Angle of flooding
Permeability
7.
Anti-heeling devices
7.1
If tanks are used as heeling devices, effects of
maximum possible tank moments on intact stability
are to be checked. A respective proof has to be carried
out for several draughts and taking maximum allowable centres of gravity resulting from the stability limit
curve as a basis.
7.2
If a fishing vessel is equipped with antiheeling arrangements which may produce heeling
angles of more than 10, the GL Rules Chapter 2
Machinery Installations, Section 11, P.1.4 have to be
observed.
7.3
All devices have to comply with GL Rules
Chapter 3 Electrical Installations, Section 7, G.
Chapter 8
Page 22
Section 2
B.
1.
General
1.1
Coaming heights for openings leading below
the working deck, to enclosed superstructures or to
spaces considered buoyant in the stability calculation
are in general to be in accordance with the requirements of this Section as far as reasonable and practicable.
1.2
Where applicable, sill or coaming heights
should comply with National Administration requirements.
1.3
Doors, hatches and ventilation ducts including their covers, lock tumblers and securing arrangements must be adequately dimensioned. Details are to
be submitted for approval.
1.4
All doors and escape hatches must be operable from both sides.
1.5
For ships other than fishing vessels, e.g. vessels processing their catch, with L 24 m the requirements of the International Convention on Load
Lines (ICLL) have to be observed.
2.
Doors
2.1
Watertight doors
2.1.1
The number of openings in watertight bulkheads, as required by F.1., shall be reduced to the
minimum compatible with the general requirements
and operational needs of the fishing vessel. The openings shall be fitted with watertight closing appliances
to the satisfaction of the Administration, see Table 2.1.
Watertight doors shall be of equivalent strength to the
adjacent unpierced structure.
2.1.2
Doors may be of the hinged type, which shall be capable of being operated locally from each side of the
door and shall normally be kept close at sea. A notice
shall be attached to the door on each side to state that
the door shall be kept closed at sea.
2.1.3
2.1.4
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Sliding doors
2.1.4.1 Sliding doors shall be capable of being operated when the fishing vessel is listed up to 15 either
way.
2.1.4.2 Sliding doors, whether manually operated or
otherwise, shall be capable of being operated locally
from each side of the door. In fishing vessels with L
45 m these doors shall also be capable of being operated by remote control from an accessible position
above the working deck, except when the doors are
fitted in crew accommodation spaces.
2.1.4.3 Means shall be provided at remote operating
positions to indicate when a sliding door is open or
closed.
2.2
Weathertight doors
2.2.1
All access openings in bulkheads of enclosed
superstructures and other outer structures through
which water could enter and endanger the fishing
vessel, shall be fitted with doors permanently attached
to the bulkhead, framed and stiffened so that the
whole structure is of equivalent strength to the unpierced structure, and weathertight when closed, see
Table 2.1.
2.2.2
The means of securing the doors weathertight
shall consist of gaskets and clamping devices or other
equivalent means and shall be permanently attached to
the bulkhead or to the doors themselves, and shall be
so arranged that they can be operated from each side
of the bulkhead. The Administration may, without
prejudice to the safety of the crew, permit the doors to
be opened from one side only for freezer rooms, provided that a suitable alarm device is fitted to prevent
persons being trapped in those rooms.
2.2.3
2.2.3.1 The height above deck of sills in those doorways, in companionways, erections and machinery
casings which give direct access to parts of the deck
exposed to the weather and sea shall be at least according to Table 2.2, first column.
The heights of sills on superstructure decks shall be at
least according to Table 2.2, second column.
2.2.3.2 Where operating experience has shown justification and on approval of the Administration, the
heights on the working deck, except in the doorways
giving direct access to machinery spaces, may be
reduced according to Table 2.2, third column.
Where operating experience has shown justification
and on approval of the Administration, the height of
sills on superstructure decks may be reduced to values
not less than defined in Table 2.2, forth column.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 2
Table 2.1
Chapter 8
Page 23
Closure requirements
Closure components
Working deck
Superstructure
deck
Working deck
for special
conditions
Superstructure
deck for special
conditions
watertight
weathertight
Hatchways
weathertight
weathertight
watertight 1
Ventilator coamings
weathertight
open 1
Air pipes
weathertight
weathertight
watertight
Windows
watertight
Table 2.2
Working deck
Superstructure
deck
Working deck
for special
conditions
Superstructure
deck for special
conditions
Door sills
L = 12 m
L 24 m
12 m < L < 24 m
150
300
300
150
150 1
600
300
380 1
linear interpolation linear interpolation linear interpolation linear interpolation
Hatchways
L = 12 m
L 24 m
12 m < L < 24 m
300
reduced 2
300
reduced 2
2
600
reduced
reduced 2
300
linear interpolation linear interpolation linear interpolation linear interpolation
acc. to hatchways
flush possible 3
Ventilator coamings
12 m L < 24 m
24 m L < 45 m
L 45 m
760
760
900
450
450
760
2500 4
3400 4
4500 4
1000 4
1700 4
2300 4
Air pipes
760
450
reduced 5
reduced 5
Sidescuttles,
windows
500
above deepest waterline
< 1000
fixed type sidescuttles
for doorways not giving access to machinery spaces, if operation experience justifies and with approval by the Administration
for covers other than wood, if operation experience has shown justification and with approval by the Administration
where essential for fishing operations, manhole cover, etc. may be fitted
reduction may be accepted by the Administration to avoid interference with fishing operations
Chapter 8
Page 24
3.
Section 2
3.1
Deck openings which may be open during
fishing operations shall normally be arranged near the
vessels centreline. However, the Administration may
approve different arrangements if satisfied that the
safety of the vessel will not be impaired.
3.2
Fish flaps on stern trawlers shall be power
operated and capable of being controlled from any
position which provides an unobstructed view of the
operation of the flaps.
3.3
Where it is essential for fishing operations,
flush deck scuttles of the screw, bayonet or equivalent type and manholes may be fitted, provided these
are capable of being closed watertight and such devices shall be permanently attached to the adjacent
structure. Having regard to the size and disposition of
the openings and the design of the closing devices,
metal-to-metal closures may be fitted if the Administration is satisfied that they are effectively watertight.
3.4
Openings other than hatchways, like manholes and flush scuttles in the working or superstructure deck shall be protected by enclosed structures
fitted with weathertight doors or their equivalent.
Companionways shall be situated as close as practicable to the centreline of the vessel.
4.
4.1
General
4.1.1
All hatchways shall be provided with covers.
For vessels with 12 m L < 24 m hatchways which
may be opened during fishing operation shall normally be arranged near the vessel's centreline.
4.1.2
The height above deck of the hatchway
coamings shall be as defined in 2.2.3.1.
4.2
4.2.1
The use of wooden hatchway covers is generally not recommended in view of the difficulty of
rapidly securing their weathertightness. However,
where fitted they shall be capable of being secured
weathertight.
4.2.2
The finished thickness of wood hatchway
covers shall include an allowance for abrasion due to
rough handling. In any case, the finished thickness of
these covers shall be at least 4 mm for each 100 mm
of unsupported span subject to a minimum of 40 mm
and the width of their bearing surface shall be at least
65 mm.
4.2.3
Arrangements for securing wood hatchway
covers weathertight shall be provided to the satisfaction of the Administration.
4.3
I - Part 1
GL 2007
4.3.1
Where operating experience has shown
justification, and on the approval by the Administration, the height of coamings according to 2.2.3.1 may
be reduced, or the coamings omitted entirely, provided that the safety of vessels is not thereby impaired. In this case, the hatchway openings shall be
kept as small as practicable and covers be permanently attached by hinges or equivalent means and be
capable of being rapidly closed and battened down,
or by equally effective arrangements to the satisfaction of the Administration.
4.3.2
For the purpose of strength calculations, it
shall be assumed that hatchway covers are subjected
to the weight of cargo intended to be carried on them
or to the following static loads, whichever is the
greater:
5.1
Machinery space openings shall be framed
and enclosed by casings of a strength equivalent to
the adjacent superstructure. External access openings
therein shall be fitted with doors complying with the
requirements of Table 2.2 or with hatch covers other
than wood complying with the provisions of 4.3.
5.2
Openings other than access openings shall
be fitted with covers of equivalent strength to the
unpierced structure, permanently attached thereto and
capable of being closed weathertight.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 2
6.
Ventilators
6.1
General
6.2.1
Ventilators shall be arranged as close to the
vessels centreline as possible and, where practicable,
shall extend through the top of a deck erection or
companion way.
6.2.2
On the working deck the height above deck
of coamings of ventilators other than machinery space
ventilators shall not be less than 760 mm and on superstructure decks not less than 450 mm. When the
height of such ventilators may interfere with the working of the vessel their coaming heights may be reduced to the satisfaction of the competent Authority,
see Table 2.2.
6.2.3
The height above deck of machinery space
ventilator openings shall be to the satisfaction of the
competent Authority.
6.2.4
Closing appliances need not be fitted to ventilators the coamings of which extend more than 2,5 m
above the working deck or more than 1,0 m above a
deckhouse top or superstructure deck.
6.3
6.3.1
The height above deck of ventilator coamings, other than machinery space ventilator coamings,
shall be at least 760 mm on the working deck and at
least 450 mm on superstructure decks, see Table 2.2.
6.3.2
Closing appliances need not be fitted to ventilators the coamings of which extend to more than 3,4
m above the working deck or more than 1,7 m above
the superstructure deck.
6.4
6.4.1
The height above deck of ventilator coamings, other than machinery space ventilator coamings,
shall be at least 900 mm on the working deck and at
least 760 mm on the superstructure deck, see Table
2.2.
6.4.2
Closing appliances need not be fitted to ventilators the coamings of which extend to more than
4,5 m above the working deck or more than 2,3 m
above the superstructure deck.
6.5
Chapter 8
Page 25
Air pipes
7.1
The height of air pipes above deck to the
point where the water may have access below shall be
at least 760 mm on the working deck and at least 450
mm on the superstructure deck. The Administration
may accept reduction of the height of an air pipe to
avoid interference with the fishing operations, see
Table 2.2.
7.2
Where air pipes to tanks and void spaces
below deck extend above the working or the superstructure decks, the exposed parts of the pipes shall be
of strength equivalent to the adjacent structures and
fitted with appropriate protection. Openings of air
pipes shall be provided with means of closing, permanently attached to the pipe or the adjacent structure.
8.
8.1
8.2
Where sounding pipes are fitted, their upper
ends shall be extended to a readily accessible position
and, where practicable, above the working deck. Their
openings shall be provided with permanently attached
means of closing. Sounding pipes which are not extended above the working deck shall be fitted with
automatic self-closing devices.
9.
9.1
Discharges led through the shell either from
spaces below the working deck or from enclosed superstructures or deckhouses on the working deck fitted
with doors complying with the requirements of 2.2
shall be fitted with efficient and accessible means for
preventing water from passing inboard. Normally each
separate discharge shall have an automatic non-return
valve with a positive means of closing from a readily
accessible position. Such a valve is not required if the
Administration considers that the entry of water into
the vessel through the opening is not likely to lead to
dangerous flooding and that the thickness of the piping is sufficient. The means for operating the positive
action valve shall be provided with an indicator showing whether the valve is open or closed.
For fishing vessels with 12 m L < 24 m the open
inboard end of any discharge system shall be above
the deepest operating waterline at an angle of heel
satisfactory to the Administration.
Chapter 8
Page 26
Section 2
9.2
In (manned) machinery spaces main and
auxiliary sea inlets and discharges essential for the
operation of machinery may be controlled locally. The
controls shall be accessible and shall be provided with
indicators showing whether the valves are open or
closed.
For fishing vessels with 12 m L < 24 m suitable
warning devices shall be incorporated to indicate leakage of water into the space.
9.3
Fittings attached to the shell and the valves
required by these Rules shall be of steel, bronze or
other approved ductile material. All pipes between the
shell and the valves shall be of steel, except that in
vessels constructed of material other than steel, other
suitable materials may be approved by the Administration.
11.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Freeing ports
11.1
Where bulwarks on weather parts of the
working deck form wells, the minimum freeing port
area A on each side of the vessel for each well on the
working deck shall be determined in relation to the
length and the bulwark height in the well as follows:
A = Kl
l
[m2]
9.4
Scuppers sufficient in number and size to
provide effective drainage of water are to be fitted in
the weather deck and in the working deck within
weathertight closed superstructures and deckhouses.
Decks within closed superstructures are to be drained
to the bilge. Scuppers from superstructures and deckhouses which are not closed weathertight are to be led
outside.
10.
11.2
The freeing port area calculated according to
11.1 shall be increased where the Administration considers that the vessel's sheer is not sufficient to ensure
that the deck is rapidly and effectively freed of water.
10.1
In general all windows have to be built in
accordance with ISO standards 1751 (side scuttles)
and/or 3903 (rectangular windows) respectively and
are to be tested accordingly in the presence of a GL
Surveyor.
10.2
For all fishing vessels sidescuttles to spaces
below the working deck and to spaces within the enclosed structure on that deck shall be fitted with
hinged deadlights capable of being closed watertight.
10.2.1 For fishing vessels with L < 24 m deadlights
or a suitable number of storm shutters shall be provided where there is no method of preventing water
from entering the hull through a broken window or
sidescuttle.
10.3
No sidescuttles shall be fitted in such a position that its sill is less than 500 mm above the deepest
operating waterline.
10.4
For fishing vessels with L 24 m sidescuttles
fitted less than 1000 mm above the deepest operating
waterline shall be of the fixed type.
10.5
Sidescuttles, together with their glasses and
deadlights shall be of an approved construction (to the
satisfaction of the Administration for fishing vessels
with L < 24 m). Those prone to be damaged by fishing
gear shall be suitably protected.
10.6
Toughened safety glass or its equivalent shall
be used for the wheelhouse windows.
11.3
Subject to the approval of the Administration
the minimum freeing port area for each well on the
superstructure deck shall not be less than one half the
area A given in 11.1.
On vessels with L < 24 m, where the superstructure
deck forms a working deck for fishing operations the
minimum area on each side shall not be less than 75
per cent of the area A.
11.4
Freeing ports shall be so arranged along the
length of bulwarks as to ensure that the deck is freed
from water most rapidly and effectively. Lower edges
of freeing ports shall be as near the deck as practicable.
11.5
Poundboards and means for stowage of the
fishing gear shall be arranged so that the effectiveness
of freeing ports will not be impaired. Poundboards
shall be constructed that they can be locked in position
when in use and shall not hamper the discharge of
shipped water.
11.6
Freeing ports over 300 mm in depth shall be
fitted with bars spaced not more than 230 mm and not
less than 150 mm apart or provided with other suitable
protective arrangements. Freeing port covers, if fitted,
shall be of approved construction. If devices are considered necessary for locking freeing port covers during fishing operations they shall be to the satisfaction
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 2
C.
3.
Where entry of water into structures above
the boundary as defined in 1., third item, would significantly influence the stability and buoyancy of the
vessel, such structure shall be:
of adequate strength to maintain the weathertight integrity and be fitted with weathertight
closing appliances; or
4.
The means for closing openings in the
boundaries of weathertight structures shall be such as
to maintain weathertight integrity in all operational
conditions.
E.
Intact Stability
1.
General
Draught Marking
1.
A maximum permissible operating draught
shall be approved by GL and shall be such that, in the
associated operating condition, the stability criteria
according to E. and F. are satisfied.
2.
Datum draught marks shall be provided at the
bow and stern, port and starboard and be adequate in
number for assessing the condition and trim of the
vessel. The marks shall be permanent and easily to be
read.
The draught to which marks relate shall be indicated
above the mark on the hull.
D.
Chapter 8
Page 27
Intact Buoyancy
1.
All fishing vessels shall have a sufficient
reserve of buoyancy at the design waterline to meet
the intact stability requirements of this Section. This
reserve of buoyancy shall be calculated by including
only those compartments which are:
watertight
2.
Arrangements shall be provided for checking
the watertight integrity of those compartments taken
into account in 1.
Stability Criteria
2.1
Chapter 8
Page 28
Section 2
the initial metacentric height GM0 may be reduced for vessels with complete superstructures
and with L 70 m, but shall in no case be less
than 0,15 m
2.2
If any of these criteria are not complied with,
the corresponding condition may be accepted by GL if
proof of equivalent safety is provided.
2.3
3.
f
f
GM min = 0,53 + 2 Bwl 0, 075 0,37
+ 0,82
Bwl
Bwl
0, 014
Bwl
l
0, 032 s
L wl
H
Bwl
Lwl
ls
2.3.2
The above formula is applicable for vessels
with the following parameters:
Operating conditions
3.1.1
The number and type of operating conditions
to be considered shall be to the satisfaction of GL and
shall include the following as appropriate:
2.3.1
For decked fishing vessels with a length L <
30 m, the following approximate formula for the
minimum metacentric height GMmin can be used as a
criterion for all operating conditions, but it is not a
replacement of the criteria according to 2.1.:
catch on deck, if anticipated, in operating conditions for departure of the fishing grounds with
full catch and arrival at home port with 10 %
stores, etc.
water ballast if carried in tanks which are especially provided for this purpose or in other tanks
also equipped for carrying water ballast
3.2
GL reserve the right to deviate from the a.m.
regulations when particular circumstances warrant
this. This will especially be the case for a change in
the vessels mode or area of operation which effect the
stability considerations of this Section.
3.3
3.3.1
Tanks
For vessels with parameters outside of the above limits the formula should be applied with special care.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
freshwater
1,000 t/m3
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 2
bilge water
1,005 t/m3
3.5
waste water
1,050 t/m
fuel
0,830 t/m3
3.5.1
lubricants
0,900 t/m3
3.5.1.1 Scope
3.3.2
Lever
Chapter 8
Page 29
Fishing vessels shall be able to withstand, to the satisfaction of GL, the effect of severe wind and rolling in
associated sea conditions taking account of the seasonal weather conditions, the sea states in which the
vessel will operate, type of vessel and its mode of
operation.
The criterion supplements the stability criteria given in
2. The more stringent criteria of 2. and the weather
criterion shall govern the minimum requirements for
fishing vessels of L 45 m having large windage area.
3.5.1.2 Weather criterion
3.5.1.2.1 The ability of the vessel to withstand the
combined effects of beam wind and rolling shall be
demonstrated for each standard condition of loading
with reference to Fig. 2.1 as follows:
Note
The angle of heel under action of steady wind 0
should be limited to a certain angle to the satisfaction
of GL. As a guide 16 or 80 % of the angle of deck
edge immersion, whichever is less, is suggested.
GZ
lw2
lw1
Q2
Angle of heel
Q0
Q1
Fig. 2.1
Qc
Chapter 8
Page 210
Section 2
I - Part 1
GL 2007
= factor as follows:
= 1,0 for a round-bilged vessel having no bilge
or bar keels
= 0,7 for a vessel having sharp bilges
= as shown in Table 2.5 for a vessel having
bilge keels, a bar keel or both
X1
X2
= 0, 73
l w1 = p w A
Z
1000 g
[m]
= 9,81 m/s2
1 = 109 k X1 X 2 r s
Table 2.4
X1
2,4
1,00
2,5
0,98
2,6
0,96
2,7
0,95
2,8
0,93
2,9
0,91
3,0
0,90
3,1
0,88
3,2
0,86
3,3
0,84
3,4
0,82
3,5
0,80
CB
[]
OG
Td
X2
0,45
0,75
0,50
0,82
0,55
0,89
0,60
0,95
0,65
0,97
0,70
1,00
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 2
Table 2.5
3.5.2
(Ak 100) / (L B)
1,00
1,0
0,98
1,5
0,95
Table 2.7
2,0
0,88
h [m] 1
2,5
0,79
3,0
0,74
3,5
0,72
4,0
0,70
Table 2.6
6 and over
504
Water on deck
0,100
0,098
0,093
3.6.2
12
0,065
14
0,053
3.6.2.1 The bow height HB is defined as the minimum vertical distance from the deepest waterline to
the top of the highest exposed deck measured at FP.
16
0,044
18
0,038
20
0,035
Bow height
2CB
GM
0, 043 L wl
0, 023 B
Tm
100
= 0,373 +
Lwl
Tm
Ak
L
H B = k1 L 1 +
k
Table 2.8
3.6.1
Fishing vessels shall be able to withstand, to
the satisfaction of GL, the effect of water on deck. The
seasonal weather conditions and the sea states in
which the vessel will operate, the type of vessel and
the mode of operation have to be taken into account.
Wind pressure
3.6
Chapter 8
Page 211
[m]
Area of operation
k1
k2
24 m L < 110 m
0,09
- 270
L 110 m
4,959 / L
600
24 m L < 110 m
0,117
- 220
L 110 m
5,990 / L
1484
Chapter 8
Page 212
Section 2
I - Part 1
GL 2007
If the length of the forecastle exceeds 0,15 L due consideration should be given to the fitting of a bulkhead
with adequate closing appliances. If no such bulkhead
is fitted adequate arrangements should be provided for
removing water from the open forecastle.
3.6.3.2 For the calculation of the static heeling moment due to water on deck Mw the following assumptions should be made:
during heeling, trim and displacement are constant and equal to the values for the vessel without water on deck
Note
3.6.3
Mwod = K Mw
K
Cwod = Aa / Ab 1
Ab
15, or
for angle of bulwark top immersion B <
20 - 25
= area between heeling lever curve due to water on deck and righting lever GZ curve, see
Fig. 2.2
= area below righting lever GZ curve and between heeling lever curve due to water on
deck and an angle of inclination = 40 or
the angle of flooding f ,whichever is less
Lever
Aa
= coefficient for dynamic effects taking in account for rolling period, dynamic effects of
water flow, disposition and configuration of
deck wells and deckhouses, area of operation, etc.
GZwod =
3.6.3.4 Other methods for the calculation of the effect of water on deck using the dynamic approach
have to be approved by GL.
Mwod
D
Aa
GZ =
M
D
Ab
QB
Fig. 2.2
Qf or 40
Angle of inclination
I - Part 1
GL 2007
3.7
Section 2
Ice accretion
3.7.1
Fishing vessels intended for operation in
areas where ice accretion is known to occur shall be:
3.7.2
Standard assumptions
Chapter 8
Page 213
F.
1.
Bulkheads
1.1
At least the following watertight bulkheads
are to be fitted in all fishing vessels:
1.2
Collision bulkhead
1.2.1
The collision bulkhead is a watertight bulkhead up to the working deck in the forepart of the
vessel located at the following distance x [m] aft from
FP:
in any case:
2,0 m x
Where any part of the underwater body extends forward of FP, e.g. a bulbous bow, the distance x defined
above shall be measured from a point at mid-length of
the extension forward of FP or from a point 0,015 L
forward of FP, whichever is less.
1.2.2
The bulkhead may have steps or recesses
provided they are within the limits defined in 1.2.1.
1.2.3
Where a long forward superstructure is fitted,
the collision bulkhead shall be extended weathertight
to the deck next above the working deck. The extension need not be fitted directly above the bulkhead
below provided it is located at a distance x defined in
1.2.1 and the part of the deck which forms the step is
made effectively weathertight.
all sea areas north of the North American continent, west of the areas defined above and in
3.7.3.1
south of latitude 60 S
1.2.4
Pipes piercing the collision bulkhead shall be
fitted with suitable valves operable from above the
working deck and the valve chest shall be secured at
the collision bulkhead inside the forepiek. No door,
manhole, ventilation duct or any other opening shall
be fitted in the collision bulkhead below the working
deck.
The number of openings in the collision bulkhead
above the working deck shall be reduced to the minimum compatible with the design and normal operation
of the vessel. Such openings shall be capable of being
closed weathertight.
2.
Double Bottom
2.1
At least for fishing vessels with a length L
75 m a double bottom shall be fitted extending from
the collision bulkhead to the afterpeak bulkhead.
Chapter 8
Page 214
Section 2
2.2
The double bottom has to protect the vessel's
bottom up to the turn of the bilge. For this purpose, the
intersecting line of the outer edge of the margin plate
with the shell plating is not to be lower at any part
than a horizontal plane, passing through the point of
intersection with the frame line amidships of a transverse diagonal line inclined 25 degrees to the base line
and cutting the base line at B/2 from the centreline of
the vessel, see Fig. 2.3.
2.3
The double bottom need not be fitted in way
of deep tanks, provided that the efficiency of the watertight subdivision is not impaired by such an arrangement.
2.4
The bottoms of drain sumps are to be situated
at a distance of at least 460 mm from the base line.
Only above the horizontal plane determined from 2.2,
the bottoms of drain wells may be led to the shell
plating. Exemptions for the depth of drain wells may
also be granted in shaft tunnels and pipe tunnels.
CL
the vertical extent of damage in all cases is assumed to be from the base line upwards without
limits
B/2
well
inner bottom
S
baseline 25
3.
Damage stability
3.1
General
Assumptions
3.2.1
Damage extensions
I - Part 1
GL 2007
3.2.2
Permeability
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 2
Table 2.9
Values of permeability
G.
Definition of spaces
Permeability [%]
95
85
60
0 or 95 1
Void spaces
Conditions of equilibrium
the line of openings at which progressive flooding to spaces below would occur or according to
requirements defined by GL
1.
Every vessel shall undergo an inclining test
upon its completion and the actual displacement and
position of the centre of gravity shall be determined
for the light ship condition.
2.
Where alterations are made to the vessel
affecting its light ship condition and the position of the
centre of gravity, the vessel shall, if GL considers this
necessary, be re-inclined and the stability information
revised.
3.
GL may allow the inclining test of an individual vessel to be dispensed with provided basic
stability data are available from the inclining test of a
sister vessel and it is shown to the satisfaction of GL
that reliable stability information of the exempted
vessel can be obtained from such basic data.
4.
A report of each inclination test carried out in
accordance with this Section or of each calculation of
the lightship condition particulars shall be submitted
to GL for approval. The approved report shall be
placed on board of the vessel in the custody of the
skipper and should incorporate such additions and
amendments as GL may require in any particular case.
H.
Stability Information
1.
General
Stability criteria
The fishing vessel is considered to survive the conditions of damage specified in 3.2.1 provided the vessel
remains afloat in a condition of stable equilibrium
according to 3.3 and satisfies the following criteria for
residual stability:
the angle of heel in the final condition of flooding shall not exceed 20
Inclining Test
95
3.3
Chapter 8
Page 215
1.1
Suitable stability information shall be supplied to enable the skipper to assess with ease and
certainty the stability of the vessel under various operating conditions. Such information shall include specific instructions to the skipper warning him of those
operating conditions which could adversely affect
either the stability or the trim of the vessel. A copy of
the stability information shall be submitted to GL for
approval.
1.2
The approved stability information shall be
kept on board, readily accessible at all times and inspected at the periodical surveys of the vessel to ensure that it has been approved for the actual operating
conditions.
1.3
Where alterations are made to a vessel affecting its stability, revised stability calculations shall be
prepared and submitted to GL for approval. If GL
decides that the stability information has to be revised,
the new information shall be supplied to the skipper
and the superseded information removed.
2.
Chapter 8
Page 216
2.1
Section 2
Basic information
3.
2.2
2.2.1
information for determination of weights, positions of centres of gravity, free surface effects of
tanks, fish holds and pounds
displacement and disposition of centres of gravity of light ship condition with regard to permanent ballast
2.2.2
information giving required minimum metacentric height GM0 for the practical range of
draughts
General
3.2
3.2.1
There shall be permanently exhibited or readily available on the navigating bridge, for the guidance
of the skipper and the officers in charge of the fishing
vessel, a plan showing clearly:
I - Part 1
GL 2007
2.2.3
In form of simplified information supplementary or alternative information which permits safe
operation without recourse to calculations or rolling
tests.
3.2.2
General precautions shall consist of a listing
of equipment, conditions and operational procedures,
considered to be necessary to maintain watertight integrity under normal vessel operations.
2.3
3.2.3
Specific precautions shall consist of a listing
of elements (i.e. closures, securing of equipment/
loads, sounding of alarm, etc.) considered to be vital
to the survival of the vessel and its crew.
Operational requirements
instructions for filling and emptying tanks with
free liquid surfaces
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 3
Chapter 8
Page 31
Section 3
Special Requirements for Hull Structures
A.
General
1.
Application
Basic Rules
2.1
For metal hulls of decked fishing vessels the
design and construction shall be based on the GL
Rules Chapter 1 Hull Structures. But these Rules
shall only be valid, where they are not superseded by
the special requirements defined in this Section.
2.2
For glass fibre reinforced plastic hulls the
design and construction shall be based on the GL
Rules Part 3 Special Craft, Chapter 2 Yachts
24 m and Chapter 3 Yachts and Boats up to 24 m.
The factors defined there for fishing vessels/workboats have to be considered and the adequate increase
of the scantlings to be agreed with GL. These Rules
have to be completed by the reinforcements defined in
this Section.
2.3
For hulls made of solid wood the design shall
be based on the GL Rules Chapter 13 Vorschriften
fr Klassifikation und Bau von hlzernen Seeschiffen 1. An adequate increase of the scantlings has to be
agreed with GL. For cold moulded wood see 2.2.
2.4
The design and construction of other types of
hull structures shall be agreed case by case with GL.
3.
Definitions
B.
1.
1.1
The thickness of the sheerstrake is to be increased by at least 3 mm in way of the trawl gallows.
It is recommended to also increase the thickness of the
sheerstrake between the forward and aft gallows
throughout by 2 mm.
1.2
In way of the path of the bobbins at the aft
gallows during hauling operations, the side plating
above the middle of the bilge turn is to be 50 per cent
greater in thickness than required.
1.3
At the forward gallows, the side plating
above the upper turn of the bilge is to be strengthened
correspondingly.
1.4
The seams at the lower edge of the sheerstrake and the upper turn of the bilge are to be protected by half round bars running from the fore to the
aft gallows, and by further half round bars arranged
between them or diagonally in such a way that the
welds cannot be worn by the trawl wire ropes.
1.5
In way of the strengthened shell plating under
the aft gallows, intermediate frames are to be arranged,
which are to be connected to the deck and the plate
floors, or to be supported by a stringer at the lower edge
of the strengthened plates. The section modulus of
intermediate frames is not to be less than 75 per cent of
that of the frames they are fitted between.
1.6
The bulwarks at the operating side are to be 2
mm thicker, and under the gallows 3 mm thicker than
required by the GL Rules Chapter 1 Hull Structures,
Section 6, K. In way of the slip hook, the thickness of
bulwarks is not to be less than 10 mm.
2.
2.1
Basic assumptions
The requirements for vessels of a fishing fleet mooring together at sea provide for a damping protection of
the hull for which purpose pneumatic fenders or other
equivalent damping arrangements may be used. These
requirements are based on assumptions that the vessels
will be moored at a sea state not above 6 2.
2.2
"Rules for Classification and Construction of Wooden Seagoing Ships" (not available in English)
Sea states relating to wind and sea conditions according to international agreement ranging from sea state 0 (best) to 9 (worst).
Chapter 8
Page 32
Section 3
> 0,36 L
weather
deck
> 0,36 L
C
B
Ballast waterline
0,5 B
Regions for strengthening at the shell side for vessels mooring at sea
Depth dimension
region A locating between the line drawn lower
than the ballast waterline by the value of h and
the line drawn higher than the summer loadline
by the value of h
h = 0,8 m for sea state 4
= 1,2 m for sea state 5
= 2,0 m for sea state 6
2.2.2
Summer loadline
0,1 B
0,1 B
Fig. 3.1
2.2.1
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Length dimension
Design pressure
= factor for ship displacement and sea conditions according to Table 3.1
2.2.3
Exceptions
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 3
2.4.2
Ship
displacement
[t]
2000
1,00
1,15
1,60
> 2000
0,82
1,00
1,16
Framing
k
[cm3 ]
m
= material factor
= in any case z 0
Table 3.1
Chapter 8
Page 33
Table 3.2
Region of strengthening
Fishing vessel
Region A
1,00
Region A
within fender area
Region B 1
1
0, 22 z + 0, 6
Region C 1
1
0,12 z + 1, 28
ReH = minimum
[N/mm2]
m
nominal
= 6,8 k1 k 2 k 3
upper
yield
stress
A2
A 0, 75
1 Note:
2.4
Scantlings
2.4.1
Plating
90
p
0, 242 + t K [mm]
1,1 R eH
hf
tK
= 4,0 mm for region A in case trawling is effected from the side of the fishing vessel
W = 0,11 p a A2 k [cm3]
Chapter 8
Page 34
Table 3.3
Section 3
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Definition of factors k1 to k3
Number of load distributing side stringers
Factor
2 and more
hv = 0,75:
k1
1,0
hv = 0,75:
1,0 + 0,017 A
a
1,1 + 0,017 A
a
hv = 1,0:
hv = 1,0:
1,0 + 0,034 A
1,1 + 0,034 A
k2
k3
1,0
1, 0 + 6,8
hf
A
1,12
h
h
f + 0, 28 12,5 f
A
A
1,15
1, 0 + 7, 0
hf
h
8, 0
A
A
hv =
hf =
distance [m] between a section at the lower support of frame and a tangent to the frame contour in way of the section at the upper
support, as measured normal to the tangent, see Fig. 3.2
2.5
Arrangement of strengthening
2.5.1
In strengthened regions transverse framing is
to be adopted to the vessel's sides. In single deck
ships, the deck and bottom in these regions are also to
be framed transversely. In multi-deck ships, transverse
framing is to be adopted for the deck located on the
fender level. Longitudinal framing of sides is permissible in the upper tween deck space only. In this case,
the spacing of web frames is not to exceed three frame
spacings or 2,4 m, whichever is less.
2.5.2
In the region A, intermediate frames are recommended through the region length in fishing vessels
and within fender areas in special purpose ships.
2.5.3
In any case, it is recommended that symmetrical sections be used and the minimum possible web
depth be ensured for the particular section modulus.
2.5.4
Between the ships side and vertical stiffener
nearest to it, transverse bulkheads are to have horizontal stiffeners with a section height not less than 75 %
of the vertical stiffener height. In ships with L 80 m,
horizontal stiffeners are to be spaced not more than
600 mm apart and with L 150 m, not more than 800
mm apart. For ships with intermediate lengths, linear
interpolation may be used to determine this distance.
The ends of horizontal stiffeners are to be welded to
vertical stiffeners and sniped at the ship's sides.
2.5.5
Bilge keels of ships with L 80 m are to be,
as far as practicable, so arranged that a tangent drawn
to the frame and passing through the outer free edge of
the bilge keel would form an angle of not less than 15
with the vertical axis. For ships with L 150 m, this angle may be zero. For ships of intermediate lengths, the
above angle is to be obtained by linear interpolation.
2.5.6
In tween decks the frame lower ends are to be
welded to the deck plating. The upper ends of frames
are to be carried to the deck plating and welded
thereto. Beams are to be carried to the inner edges of
frames with a minimal gap. Beam knees are to have a
face plate or flange.
The ends of intermediate frames are to be attached to
longitudinal intercostals, decks or platforms.
2.5.7
Side longitudinals are to be attached to transverse bulkheads with knees. Height and width of the
knees are to comply with the basic Rules.
2.5.8
The bulwark is to be inclined towards the
centre line of the ship - or be fitted inboard of the
ship's side - at not less than 0,1 of its height.
Bulwark stays welded to sheerstrake are to be so constructed as to prevent deck plating damage in case of
bumping.
3.
3.1
In stern trawlers the thickness of the bottom
plating in way of the "overhanging" part of the stern
shall not be less than:
t = 2, 6 a L k f 2 + t [mm]
k
f2
1,1
1 a
2 b
f2max = 1,0
a
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 3
tmin = 0,5 mm
4.2
The plate thickness of the aft ramp of stern
trawlers is not to be less than:
tmax = 2,0 mm
The stern ramp is to be so constructed as to avoid flat
of bottom in way of stern counter.
3.2
In stern trawlers the shell strake in way of the
construction waterline from stern to the aft perpendicular is recommended to have a thickness as required for the stern ramp in 4. for protection against
local damage. Where the longitudinal framing system
is adopted, the side girders are to be fitted not more
than two longitudinal frame spacings apart.
4.
Chapter 8
Page 35
inner planning
of ramp
= (8 + 0,1 L) k
tmin = 12 k
[mm]
[mm]
4.3
The thickness of inner plating of the ramp
forming the ramp sides is not to be less than.
tmin = (5,5 + 0, 02 L) k + 2 [mm]
In the lower part adjacent to the ramp, a strengthened
strake is to be provided having a thickness of not less
than the thickness required under 5.2. See Fig.3.3.
4.4
Protection from excessive wear, especially by
wire ropes when dragging the catch, should be provided by the following measures:
ramp
Section A - A
~ 1000
bobbin
of trawl
greater as diameter
of bobbin of trawl,
but not less than
700 mm
strengthened
strake
Fig. 3.3
Chapter 8
Page 36
5.
Section 3
C.
Fish Holds
1.
General
1.1
Basic requirements
2.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Fish flaps
3.
3.1
General
3.1.1
Task of the portable fish hold divisions is to
properly secure the catch against shifting which could
cause dangerous trim or heel of the vessel.
3.1.2
Every portable fish hold division is to extend
from the bottom of the hold to the deck.
3.1.3
One longitudinal division is to be fitted where
the greatest internal cargo hold breadth is 6 m. If the
breadth exceeds 6 m, at least 2 longitudinal divisions
are to be fitted so that the distance between longitudinal divisions or between these and the vessels side
does not extend 3 m. Longitudinal divisions are to be
positioned symmetrically to the vessels centre line.
3.1.4
It is assumed that in vessels having one longitudinal division, the level of cargo is at any time during loading approximately the same on both sides of
the division.
3.1.5
The requirements of 3.1.2 to 3.1.4 are based
on the assumption that the portable fish hold divisions
consist of vertical uprights with horizontal wooden
boards, see Fig. 3.4.
3.1.6
The longitudinal distance l between uprights
or between permanent transverse bulkheads and uprights should normally not exceed 2,0 m.
3.1.7
Arrangements and details of the fish hold
divisions are to be submitted for approval.
1.2
No sharp corners or projections shall be allowed in fish holds or fish tanks, compare D., to facilitate cleaning and reduce inherent dangers to workers
in these holds or tanks.
1.3
Pipes and chains or conduits passing through
the fish hold shall, if practicable, be installed flush
with ceilings or boxed in and adequately insulated in a
manner facilitating access for inspection and maintenance.
1.4
In fish holds, and also fish processing spaces,
in which non-packed salted catch or salt is stored or
which are exposed to the detrimental effect of catch
wastes and seawater, the plating thickness is to be
increased by 1 mm as compared to that required by the
relevant Sections of the basic Rules. Where the structure is so influenced from both sides, relevant thickness is to be increased by 2 mm.
h
h
b
b
I - Part 1
GL 2007
3.2
Section 3
Uprights
3.2.2
The uprights are to be secured at top and
bottom as to allow transmission of reaction forces in
adjacent structures.
3.2.3
If openings are cut in the uprights for fitting
of the upper boards, the boards in the opening are to
be locked in position to prevent their slipping out of
the guide.
3.3
Portable boards
Chapter 8
Page 37
= distance of load centre from the vertical longitudinal central plane of tank [m]
aV
3.3.2
In order to prevent galvanic corrosion, insulation is to be fitted at connections or contact surfaces
between steel and aluminium.
Corrugated boards are to be made of seawater resistant
aluminium.
The minimum thickness of wooden boards should be
65 mm.
4.
4.1
Removable steel or aluminium bulkheads
which are used in connection with hatches are to be
double plated with the stiffeners placed horizontally.
Internal surfaces of steel bulkheads are to be covered
by a corrosion-resistant coating.
4.2
= c s h + 0,5 [mm]
tmin = 6 mm
c
4.3
The section modulus of horizontal stiffeners
is not to be less than:
W = c A2 s h [cm3]
A'
[kN/m2]
or
b'
h1
= h + 0,5 m [m]
b'
For aluminium materials with a guaranteed 0,1% tensile proof stress Rp0,1 which exceeds 125 N/mm2, the
value of W can be reduced in direct proportion. If
however, the materials guaranteed Rp0,2 value is
greater than 70 % of the guaranteed ultimate tensile
strength Rm, the lower value is to be used as a basis
for scantlings.
4.4
The moment of inertia of stiffeners is not to
be less than:
I
= c 3 W 4 [cm4]
Chapter 8
Page 38
Section 3
4.6
Removable aluminium bulkheads are to be
constructed of a seawater-resistant alloy.
In order to prevent galvanic corrosion, insulation is to
be fitted at connections or contact surfaces between
steel and aluminium.
D.
Fish Tanks
1.
Scantlings
I - Part 1
GL 2007
3.
Foundations
4.
E.
F.
1.
General
1.
General
2.
2.
1.2
The load bearing tank structure is to comply
with the relevant requirements for decks, shell, inner
bottom, etc., but must at least have scantlings complying with the requirements stipulated in B.
Bulkheads
1.3
Prefabricated membrane tanks are to be dimensioned such that they are capable of being transported without undue overstressing the membrane
walls.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 3
1.4
Details of the membrane and the insulation
material (preferably, polyurethane foam) are to be
submitted for approval.
2.
2.2
Hollow spaces between the membrane and
the hull are to be tested for tightness as stipulated
under 2.1.
2.3
Prior to installation of the membrane, shell,
decks, bulkheads, etc. are to be hose tested for tightness.
3.
3.1
The foam material shall have sufficient compressive strength to transmit the liquid pressures from
the membrane to the hull.
3.2
The foam application is to be carried out
according to manufacturer's instructions.
3.3
It is to be assured that all hollow spaces between hull and membrane are completely filled with
foam.
G.
Side Doors
1.
General
1.1
In general, doors shall not extend below the
load waterline.
1.2
At the corners of the doors strengthened
plates are to be provided which are to extend over a
length of at least 1,5 frame spacings each beyond the
doors.
1.3
Doors shall be designed to preferably open
outwards.
1.4
Door openings in the shell are to have well
rounded corners and adequate compensation is to be
Chapter 8
Page 39
2.
Scantlings
2.1
In general the strength of side doors is to be
equivalent to the strength of the surrounding structure.
2.2
Doors are to be adequately stiffened. Where
necessary, stiffeners are to be supported by girders.
Means are to be provided to prevent movement of the
doors when closed. Adequate strength is to be provided in the connections of the lifting/manoeuvring
arms and hinges to the door structure and to the ship
structure.
2.3
Where doors also serve as vehicle ramps, the
design of the hinges should take into account the vessels angle of trim which may result in uneven loading
on the hinges.
2.4
Where doors also serve as vehicle ramps,
plate thickness and stiffeners will be specially considered.
2.5
Thickness of the door plating, section
modulus and shear area of stiffeners and girders are to
be determined according to the GL Rules Chapter 1
Hull Structures, Section 6.
2.6
The girder system is to have sufficient stiffness to ensure integrity of the boundary support of the
door. Edge stiffeners/girders should be adequately
stiffened against rotation.
For edge girders supporting main door girders between securing devices, the moment of inertia is to be
increased in relation to the additional force.
3.
3.2
The closing and/or supporting devices are to
be fitted not more than 2,5 m apart and as close to
corner as possible. However, a large number of small
devices should be avoided. The total vertical and horizontal force may normally be considered as equally
distributed
between
the
devices.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 4
Hull Outfit
Chapter 8
Page 41
Section 4
Hull Outfit
A.
1.
Deck sheathings
1.1
Generally the different deck sheathings of a
fishing vessel on the weatherdeck, on superstructures
and deckhouses have to meet the following requirements:
3.
Where tanks are intended to carry liquids at temperatures exceeding 40 C, their boundaries facing holds
for transport or storage shall be fitted with a ceiling.
At vertical walls, sparred ceilings may be sufficient.
The ceiling may be dispensed only with consent of the
Flag State Administration.
1.2
The surface of all decks shall be so designed
or treated as to minimize the slip hazard for personnel.
In particular, decks of working areas, such as machinery spaces, in galleys, at winches and where fish is
handled as well as at the foot and head of ladders and
in front of doors, shall be provided with anti-skid
surfaces.
1.3
Before applying the deck sheathing the surface preparation of the relevant deck area has to be
prepared according to the specification of the sheathing supplier.
1.4
The compliance with the requirements defined in 1.1 and 1.2 has to be shown by the supplier by
tests with a reasonable number of specimens according to recognized standards and approved by GL. The
samples have to be brought up on the relevant structural deck material utilized for the fishing vessel
(steel, aluminium, GRP, etc.).
2.
Bottom ceiling
2.1
If a vessel contains holds for the transport of
materials or fish products a tight bottom ceiling is to
be fitted on the bottom of such a hold. It is recommended, that the thickness of a wooden ceiling is not
less than 60 mm. If no ceiling is provided, GL will
decide whether the thickness of the load bearing bottom areas has to be increased case by case. If operation of fork lift trucks is planned, only steel decks
without wooden ceiling have to be provided.
2.2
On single bottoms, ceilings are to be removable for inspection of bottom plating at any time.
2.3
Ceilings on double bottoms are to be laid on
battens not less than 12,5 mm thick providing a clear
B.
1.
Each tank is to be fitted with air pipes, overflow pipes and sounding pipes. The air pipes are in
general to be led to above the exposed deck. For the
arrangement and scantlings of pipes see Section 9d.
For the height from the deck to the point where the
water may have access see Section 2, Table 2.2.
2.
Suitable closing appliances are to be provided
for air pipes, overflow pipes and sounding pipes.
Where fishing gear or materials, etc. are carried on
deck, the closing appliances are to be readily accessible at all times. In vessels for which flooding calculations are to be made, the ends of the air pipes are to be
above the damage waterline in the flooded condition.
Where they immerse at intermediate stages of flooding, these conditions are to be examined separately.
3.
Closely under the inner bottom or the tank
top, holes are to be cut into floor plates and side girders as well as into beams, girders, etc., to give the air
free access to the air pipes. Besides, all floor plates
and side girders are to be provided with limbers to
permit the water or oil to reach the pump suctions.
4.
Sounding pipes are to be extended to directly
above the tank bottom. The shell plating is to be
strengthened by thicker plates or doubling plates under
the sounding pipes.
Chapter 8
Page 42
C.
Section 4
Hull Outfit
Ventilators
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Table 4.1
1.
The height of ventilator coamings and the
relevant closing appliances on the exposed deck, quarter deck and on exposed superstructure decks are defined in Section 2, B.6. For the case of fire, draughttight fire dampers are to be fitted.
2.
Ventilators of holds are not to have any connection with other spaces.
3.
The thickness of the coaming plates is to be
1,0 mm larger than the thickness of the surrounding
deck.
4.
The thickness of ventilator posts should be at
least equal to the thickness of coamings as per 3. The
wall thickness of ventilator posts of a clear sectional
area exceeding 1600 cm2 is to be increased according
to the expected loads.
5.
Generally, the coamings and posts shall pass
through the deck and shall be welded to the deck plating from above and below. Where coamings or posts
are welded on the deck plating, fillet welds of a = 0,5
t (t = thickness of the thinner plate) should be adopted for welding inside and outside, where applicable.
6.
Coamings and posts particularly exposed to
wash of the sea are to be efficiently connected with
the vessel's structure. Coamings of a height exceeding
900 mm are to be specially strengthened.
7.
Where beams are pierced by ventilator coamings, carlings of adequate scantlings are to be fitted
between the beams in order to maintain the strength of
the deck.
D.
1.
1.1
There is to be a good drainage of water, oil or
brine from the cargo. Trunks and gutters are to be
located such that they will provide at all times good
drainage from all layers of cargo, throughout the hold.
1.2
In each bin there is to be drainage to a bilge
well through vertical drainage trunks of perforated
plates, grating, etc. The minimum acceptable perforated circumference per trunk is 0,3 m. The number of
trunks and the total length of perforated circumference
are defined in Table 4.1. The perforations are to consist of holes with a diameter of 4 to 8 mm or equivalent.
Area A of bin
below deck
[m2]
Minimum
number of
drainage trunks
per bin
Total length of
perforated trunk
circumference
per bin [m]
A < 10
0,8
10 A < 15
1,0
15 A < 20
1,2
20 A < 25
1,4
25 A < 30
1,6
30 A < 35
1,8
1.3
Each cargo hold shall have a bilge well at its
after end. If the length of the watertight compartment
exceeds 9 m, there shall also be a bilge well at the
forward end.
1.4
Bilge wells of not less than 0,2 m3 capacity
are to be arranged in fish holds. They are to be
equipped with an arrangement for rinsing the bilge
sections, which is to be secured against unintentional
operation.
1.5
From each bilge well, a separate branch suction line shall be led to the machinery space. The internal diameter of this line is to be as required for
main bilge lines. Minimum diameter is 50 mm.
1.6
The bilge distribution chest valves are to be
of screw-down non-return type. The valve chest collecting branch suction lines from the cargo fish holds
are to have no connections from dry compartments.
The valve chest is to be directly connected to the largest bilge pump. In addition, a connection is to be provided to another bilge pump. All valves are to be fitted
in readily accessible positions.
1.7
Means for back-flushing bilge suctions shall
be provided. The connecting of water supply may be
done by portable means, e.g. hoses.
2.
2.1
If fish shall be carried loose in tween deck
satisfactory arrangement of drainage has to be provided. The drainage may be led to the bilge well in the
hold below or arranged as described in 1.
2.2
For tween deck compartments having no
openings where sea may penetrate and where the fish
processing requires no supply of water, drainage to
bilge well in the machinery space may be accepted.
The drainage pipes shall have a self-closing valve at
the machinery space side.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
3.
Section 4
Hull Outfit
3.1
It has to be ensured that all kinds of refuse
and water accumulating in the course of processing of
the catch may be discharged or carried outboards
without endangering the vessel. The bilge pumps are
to have sufficient power.
3.2
Where the fish processing holds are located
below the weather deck, the refuse and water accumulating in the course of processing are to be discharged
outboards through suitable pumps or conveyor worms.
The respective outlets at the shell shall be located as
near as possible to the weather deck and are to be
closable by means of sluice valves. Where the discharge line is raised up above the weather deck, a
swing check valve may be fitted instead of a sluice
valve.
Where the pumps are sucking from outboard, a blocking device is required to prevent water from being
pumped into the tween deck space.
3.3
Stone shoots in fish processing decks are to
be fitted as high as practicable. The lowest point of the
inner openings shall not come to water at inclinations
of less than 15, vessel fully loaded. In addition to the
watertight covers of the stone shoots swell shutters are
to be fitted at the shell.
3.4
Bilge wells
Fish tanks
Fish pounds
Fixed and removable parts of the fish pounds for holding the catch on and below deck shall be of adequate
size. Fish pounds on deck shall be constructed in such
a way that water can drain out of them without hindrance.
E.
Protective Measures
1.
General measures
1.1
A lifeline system shall be designed to be
effective for all needs, and the necessary wires, ropes,
shackles, eye bolts and cleats shall be provided.
1.2
Deck openings provided with coamings or
sills of less than 600 mm in height shall be provided
with guards, such as hinged or portable railings or
nettings. The Administration may exempt small openings such as fish scuttles from compliance with these
requirements.
Chapter 8
Page 43
1.3
Skylights or other similar openings shall be
fitted with protective bars not more than 350 mm
apart, compare Section 2, B.11.6. The Administration
may exempt small openings from compliance with this
requirement.
2.
Deck openings
2.1
Hinged covers of hatchways, manholes and
other openings shall be protected against accidental
closing. In particular, heavy covers on escape hatches
shall be equipped with counterweights and so constructed as to be capable of being opened from each
side of the cover.
2.2
Dimension of access hatches shall be not less
than 600 mm by 600 mm or 600 mm diameter.
2.3
Where practicable, hand-holds shall be provided above the level of the deck over escape openings.
2.4
Hatch covers are to be dimensioned and arranged according to the GL Rules Chapter 1 Hull
Structures, Section 17, B.
3.
3.1
Efficient bulwarks or guard rails shall be
fitted on all exposed parts of the working deck and on
superstructure decks if they are working platforms.
The height of bulwarks or guard rails above deck shall
be at least 1m. Where this height would interfere with
the normal operation of the vessel, a lesser height may
be approved by the Flag State Administration.
3.2
The minimum vertical distance from the
deepest operation waterline to the lowest point of the
top of the bulwark, or to the edge of working deck if
guard rails are fitted, shall ensure adequate protection
of the crew from water shipped on deck, taking into
account the sea states and the weather conditions in
which the vessel may operate, the areas of operation,
type of vessel and its method of fishing and shall be to
the satisfaction of the Administration.
3.3
Guard-rails are to be constructed in accordance with DIN 81702 or equivalent standards.
Equivalent constructions of sufficient strength and
safety can be accepted. Clearance below the lowest
course of guard rails to the foot bar shall not exceed
230 mm, other courses shall not be more than 380 mm
apart. Rails shall be free from sharp points, edges and
corners and shall be of adequate strength.
In a vessel with rounded gunwales guard rail supports
shall be placed on the flat part of the deck. Guard rail
stanchions are not to be welded to the shell plating and
the distance between stanchions shall not be more than
1,5 m.
Chapter 8
Page 44
Section 4
Hull Outfit
3.4
Means such as guard rails, lifelines, gangways or under deck passages to protect the crew in
moving between accommodation, machinery and
other working spaces shall be provided to the satisfaction of GL. Storm rails shall be fitted as necessary to
the outside of all deckhouses and casings to secure
safety of passage or work for the crew.
3.5
Stern trawlers shall be provided with suitable
protection such as doors, gates or nets at the top of the
stern ramp at the same height as the adjacent bulwark
or guard rails. When such protection is not in position
a chain or other means of protection shall be provided
across the ramp.
4.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
F.
1.
General
1.1
Drawings of masts, mast substructures and
hull connections are to be submitted for approval.
1.2
Loose and accessory parts are to comply with
the GL Rules VI Additional Rules and Guidelines,
Part 2 Life-Saving Appliances, Lifting Appliances,
Accesses, Chapter 2 Guidelines for the Construction
and Survey of Lifting Appliances. All parts which
shall be supervised and certified by GL are to be individually tested.
h [m]
10
12
14
16
Rope diameter
[mm]
14
16
18
20
22
24
Nominal size of
shackle, rigging
screw, rope socket
1,6
2,0
2,5
3,0
4,0
4,0
2.1.6
Where steel wire ropes according to Table 4.2
are used, the following conditions apply:
b
0,3 h
0,15 h a b
1.3
Other masts than covered by 2. and 3. as well
as special construction forms, shall as regards dimensions and design, in each case be individually agreed
with GL.
2.
Signal masts
Stayed masts
2.1.1
Stayed masts may be constructed as simply
supported masts (rocker masts) or may be supported
by one or more decks (constraint masts).
2.1.2
The diameter of stayed steel masts at the uppermost support is to be at least 20 mm for each 1 m
height of mast h from the uppermost support to the
2.2
Unstayed masts
2.2.1
Unstayed masts may be completely constrained in the uppermost deck or be supported by two
or more decks. In general, the fastenings of masts to
the hull of a vessel should extend over at least one
deck height.
2.2.2
The scantlings for unstayed steel masts are
given in the Table 4.3.
2.2.3
The diameter of masts may be gradually
tapered to D/2 at the height of 0,75 lm.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 4
Table 4.3
Length
of mast
lm [m]
Dt
[mm]
160 4
10
Hull Outfit
12
Chapter 8
Page 45
14
3.
Radar masts
4.4
In case of tubular constructions all welded
fastenings and connections have to be of full penetration weld type.
Structural details
4.1
Steel masts closed all-round shall have a wall
thickness of at least 4 mm.
For masts not closed all-round the minimum wall
thickness is 6 mm.
For masts used as funnels a corrosion addition of at
least 1 mm is required.
4.2
The foundations of the mast integrated in the
deck structure are to be dimensioned in accordance
with the acting forces.
4.3
Doubling plates at mast feet are permissible
only for the transmission of compressive forces.
4.5
If necessary, slim tubular structures are to be
additionally stayed or supported in order to avoid
vibrations.
4.6
The dimensioning normally does not require
a calculation of vibrations. However, in case of undue
vibrations occurring during the vessels trial a respective calculation will be required.
4.7
For determining scantlings of masts made
from aluminium or austenitic steel see Section 3.
4.8
At masts solid steel ladders have to be fixed
at least up to 1,50 m below top, if they have to be
climbed for operational or maintenance purposes.
Above the ladders, suitable handgrips are necessary.
4.9
If possible from the construction point of
view, ladders have to be at least 0,30 m wide. The
distance between the rungs shall be 0,30 m. The horizontal distance of the rung centre from fixed structural
components shall not be less than 0,15 m. The rungs
shall be aligned and be made of square steel bars
20/20 set up on edge.
4.10
Platforms on masts which have to be used for
operational reasons, shall have a rail of at least 0,90 m
in height with one intermediate bar. Safe access from
the mast ladders to the platform is to be provided.
4.11
If necessary on masts a safety installation
consisting of foot, back, and hand rings enabling safe
work in places of operating and maintenance has to be
provided.
G.
Life-Saving Appliances
1.
It is assumed that for the arrangement and
operation of lifeboats and other life-saving appliances
the regulations defined by the Administration are
complied with. For regulations and guidelines see
Section 1, A.3.
2.
The designing and testing of life saving appliances are not part of Classification. However, approval of the hull structure in way of the launching
appliances, taking into account the reaction forces
from the relevant appliances, is part of Classification.
Note
In all cases where GL is requested to approve the lifesaving appliances, the GL Rules VI Additional Rules
and Guidelines, Part 2 Life Saving Appliances, Lifting Appliances, Accesses, Chapter 1 Guidelines for
Life-Saving
Launching
Appliances
apply.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 5
Chapter 8
Page 51
Section 5
Anchoring and Mooring Equipment
A.
General
1.
Scope
Anchor equipment designed for quick and safe operation shall be provided which consists of anchoring
equipment, anchor chains and wire ropes, stoppers and
a windlass or other arrangements for dropping and
hoisting the anchor and for holding the vessel at anchor in all foreseeable service conditions.
= effective height from the summer load waterline to the top of the uppermost house
= a + hi
hi
Materials
B.
Equipment Numeral
1.
Equipment numeral ZF
= area [m2], in profile view of the hull, superstructures and houses, having a breadth
greater than B/4, above the summer load waterline within the length L and up to the
height h
1,5 m
1,5 m
Bulwark
L/2
Fig. 5.1
DWL
L/2
Chapter 8
Page 52
2.
Section 5
Equipment numeral ZK
ZK
1
= L (B + H ) +
Ah
2
Application
C.
Anchors
1.
Arrangement
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Anchor design
2.1
Anchors have to be of approved design. The
mass of the heads of patent (ordinary stockless) anchors, including pins and fittings, is not to be less than
60 per cent of the total mass of the anchor.
2.2
For stock anchors, the total mass of the anchor, including stock, shall comply with the values in
Tables 5.1 or 5.2. The mass of the stock shall be 20
percent of this total mass.
2.3
The mass of each individual bower anchor
may vary by up to 7 per cent above or below the required individual mass provided that the total mass of
all bower anchors is not less than the sum of the required individual masses.
3.
3.1
Where special anchors are approved by GL as
"High Holding Power Anchors" (HHP), the anchor
mass may be 75 per cent of anchor mass as per Table
5.1 or 5.2.
"High Holding Power Anchors" are anchors which are
suitable for the vessel's use at any time and which do
not require prior adjustment or special placement on
sea bed.
3.2
For approval as a "High Holding Power Anchor", satisfactory tests are to be made on various
types of bottom and the anchor is to have a holding
power at least twice that of a patent anchor ("Admiralty Standard Stockless") of the same mass. These
tests have to be approved by GL.
3.3
Dimensioning of chain cable and of windlass
is to be based on the undiminished anchor mass according to Table 5.1 or 5.2.
4.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 5
Table 5.1
No. for
register
Equipment
numeral
ZF
101 F
30
Chapter 8
Page 53
2 bower
Stud link chain cables 1 for bower anchors Recommended mooring ropes
anchors
Weight
Diameter
Total
Breaking
per
Number Length
length
load
d1
d2
d3
anchor
[kg]
[m]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[m]
[kN]
3
70
10
137,5
11
11
11
40
25
102 F
30 - 40
80
165
11
11
11
50
30
103 F
40 - 50
100
192,5
11
11
11
60
30
104 F
50 - 60
120
192,5
12,5
12,5
12,5
60
30
105 F
60 - 70
140
192,5
12,5
12,5
12,5
80
30
106 F
70 - 80
160
220
14
12,5
12,5
100
35
107 F
80 - 90
180
220
14
12,5
12,5
100
35
108 F
90 -100
210
220
16
14
14
110
35
109 F
100 -110
240
220
16
14
14
110
40
110 F
110 -120
270
247,5
17,5
16
16
110
40
111 F
120 -130
300
247,5
17,5
16
16
110
45
112 F
130 -140
340
275
19
17,5
17,5
120
45
113 F
140 -150
390
275
19
17,5
17,5
120
50
114 F
150 -175
480
275
22
19
19
120
55
115 F
175 -205
570
302,5
24
20,5
20,5
120
60
116 F
205 -240
660
302,5
26
22
20,5
120
65
117 F
240 -280
780
330
28
24
22
120
70
118 F
280 -320
900
357,5
30
26
24
140
80
119 F
320 -360
1020
357,5
32
28
24
140
85
120 F
360 -400
1140
385
34
30
26
140
95
121 F
400 -450
1290
385
36
32
28
140
100
122 F
450 -500
1440
412,5
38
34
30
140
110
123 F
500 -550
1590
412,5
40
34
30
160
120
124 F
550 -600
1740
440
42
36
32
160
130
125 F
600 -660
1920
440
44
38
34
160
145
126 F
660 -720
2100
440
46
40
36
160
160
Remarks:
1
studless chain cables in accordance with DIN 766 of at least same proof load may be taken in lieu of stud link chain cables up to 16 mm
diameter
d1 = chain diameter Grade K 1 (ordinary quality)
d2 = chain diameter Grade K 2 (special quality)
d3 = chain diameter Grade K 3 (extra special quality)
D.
Chain Cables
1.
Chain cable diameters given in Tables 5.1
and 5.2 apply to chain cables made of chain cable
materials specified in the requirements of the GL
Rules II Materials and Welding, Part 1 Metallic
Materials, Chapter 4 Equipment for following
grades:
Grade K 1 material used for chain cables in conjunction with "High Holding Power Anchors" shall have a
tensile strength Rm of not less than 400 N/mm2.
Chapter 8
Page 54
Table 5.2
No.
for
register
Section 5
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Bower anchors
ZK
Number
Weight
per
anchor
[kg]
Total
length
d1
[m]
[mm]
Recommended mooring
ropes
Diameter
d2
Total
length
d4
d5
[mm]
[m]
[mm]
[mm]
10
11
105 FC
12 - 14
60
95,0
11,0
11,0
80
20
106 FC
14 - 17
80
110,0
11,0
11,0
100
10
20
107 FC
17 - 20
95
110,0
12,5
12,5
120
10
20
108 FC
270
110
137,5
12,5
12,5
150
10
22
109 FC
270-300
140
165,0
14,0
12,5
180
10
22
110 FC
300-330
180
165,0
14,0
12,5
200
10
22
111 FC
330-360
210
220,0
16,0
14,0
225
10
24
112 FC
360-400
250
220,0
16,0
14,0
225
10
24
113 FC
400-450
300
247,5
17,5
16,0
225
10
24
114 FC
450-500
370
247,5
19,0
17,0
250
12
26
115 FC
>500
440
275,0
22,0
19,0
250
12
26
20 - 45
Remarks:
1
studless chain cables in accordance with DIN 766 (or equivalent) of at least same proof load may be taken in lieu of stud link chain cables
5.
The attachment of inboard ends of chain
cables to the vessel's structure is to be provided with a
mean suitable to permit, in case of emergency, an easy
slipping of chain cables to sea, operable from an accessible position outside the chain locker.
The inboard ends of chain cables are to be secured to
the structures by a fastening able to withstand a force
not less than 15 % nor more than 30 % of the rated
breaking load of the chain cable.
E.
1.
1.1
The chain cable of one or two anchors may
be replaced by a steel wire rope.
1.2
Where steel wire ropes are fitted in lieu of
chain cables, the following is to be observed:
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 5
1.2.1
The length of the rope is to be equal to 1,5
times the corresponding tabular chain cable length.
The breaking load of the rope is not to be less than the
breaking load of the tabular chain cable of Grade K 1.
1.2.2
A short length of chain cable is to be fitted
between anchor and wire rope having a length of 12,5
m or equal to the distance between anchor in stowed
position and winch, whichever is less.
F.
2.
Anchors of 60 kg or less
Chain Locker
1.
The chain locker is to be of capacity and
depth adequate to provide an easy direct lead of the
cables through the chain pipes and self-stowing of the
cables.
The minimum required stowage capacity without mud
box for the two bow anchor chains is as follows:
1.2.3
Wire rope winches are to be fitted which
comply with the requirements defined in Section 6.
1.2.4
Wire ropes of trawl winches may be used as
anchor chain cables. Lead blocks and guide rollers
shall be suitably fitted and arranged to prevent the
ropes from chafing at deckhouses, superstructures,
deck plating and equipment on deck. Where the rope
diameter is 18 mm and greater the guide rollers are to
be permanently fitted. The trawl winch is to comply
with the requirements of Section 6.
Chapter 8
Page 55
S = 1,1 d 2
A
100 000
[m3 ]
G.
Windlasses
1.
Basic Rules
Chapter 8
Page 56
Section 5
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Installations, Section 14, D. unless they are superseded by the special requirements defined in this Section.
2.4
If the trawl winch is fitted with messenger
wheels, etc. and meets the requirements set out in 2.1
to 2.3 such a winch may be used as a windlass.
2.
2.5
Fishing vessels which have been authorized
to use trawl warp as anchor wire may use their trawl
winch as a windlass provided the trawl warp can be
wound on a drum with a braking device that is independent of the actual trawl warps in use for fishing.
Lead blocks and guide rollers shall be suitably fitted
and arranged to prevent the warps from chafing at the
deckhouses, superstructures, deck plating and equipment on deck.
Design principles
2.1
Fishing vessels provided with anchors of or
above 150 kg shall be fitted with a windlass. The
windlass shall be fitted with a messenger wheel and/or
drum for each anchor and means for release of each
messenger wheel or drum. If for anchors with a weight
of less than 150 kg no windlass is provided, other
arrangements for dropping and hoisting the anchor are
to be considered.
2.2
It shall not be possible to carry the chains
forward to the hawsepipe, skid or similar arrangement
without the chain passing the messenger wheels.
When anchor wire is used it shall pass a roller adjacent to the hawsepipe to avoid chafing.
2.3
The windlass, its support and its brakes shall
be capable of absorbing a static tension of at least 45
% of the breaking strength of the anchor chain or
anchor wire without the occurrence of any permanent
deformations and without the brake losing its hold.
Furthermore, a chain stopper or wire nipper should be
fitted between the windlass and the hawsepipe or
similar for each anchor chain or anchor wire capable
of holding the vessel while at anchor.
If chain stoppers or wire nippers are not fitted, the
windlass, its support and its brake shall be capable of
absorbing a static tension of at least 80 % of the breaking strength of the anchor chain or anchor wire.
The chain stopper or wire nipper and their supports
shall be capable of absorbing a static tension of at
least 80 % of the breaking strength of the anchor
chain/wire without the occurrence of any permanent
deformations and without the chain stopper or wire
nipper losing its hold.
Table 5.3
H.
Mooring Equipment
Note
For estimating approximate mooring forces, a GL
computer program system is available.
1.
Ropes
1.1
The mooring ropes specified in Tables 5.1
and 5.2 and the content of 1.2 and 1.3 are recommendations only, a compliance with which is not a condition of Class.
1.2
Breaking load
Equivalent diameters of synthetic wire and fibre ropes related to steel wire ropes
Fibre Ropes
Polyamide
Diameter [mm]
32
36
40
44
48
48
52
60
Polyester
Diameter [mm]
32
36
40
44
48
48
52
60
Polypropylene
Diameter [mm]
32
36
40
44
48
52
56
64
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 5
1.4
Length
Chapter 8
Page 57
2.1
Mooring winches are to be designed according to the basic Rules defined in G.1. taking into account the actual mooring lines and 80 % of their
nominal breaking loads. Substructures are to be dimensioned according to Section 3.
2.2
Hawses, bollards and cleats shall be so designed as to protect the ropes against excessive wear.
They are to be of proved construction and shall comply with relevant standards.
Note
Attention is drawn to relevant National Standards.
2.3
Hawses, bollards, cleates and their substructures are to be strengthened, if they are intended to be
belayed by multiple lines. In this case 80 % of the
nominal breaking load of the individual lines has to be
used
as
pulling
forces.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 6
Chapter 8
Page 61
Section 6
Fishing Gear and Lifting Appliances
A.
General
1.
Scope of application
1.1
Equipment which is used for fishing, catch
handling, loading and/or discharging is subject to
these Rules.
1.2
Equipment according to 1.1 is not part of a
fishing vessel's Classification even in case the Class
Notation CFG (Certified Fishing Gear) has been assigned to the vessel.
1.3
In a fishing vessel's Classification all foundations and their substructures for cranes, masts, gantries, gallows, winches, fairleads, etc. are included.
2.3.2
Chains, rings, hooks, shackles, swivels,
blocks, etc. are defined as accessories.
2.3.3
Ropes and accessories are usually part of a
fishing gear or lifting appliance. They may, however,
be fixed or used individually on the deck of a fishing
vessel as well.
2.4
Loads
2.4.1
1.4
If the Class Notation CFG shall be assigned
to a vessel, the requirements according to F.2. and F.3.
are to be met.
1.5
In these Rules the requirements for fishing
gear and lifting appliances as well as ropes and accessories will be defined.
2.
Definitions
2.1
Fishing gear
2.1.1
Masts, gantries, gallows, outriggers, jumper
stays/tackles and other gear used for fishing and/or
catch handling at sea are defined as fishing gear.
2.1.2
Deck equipment like winches, fairleads, rollers, pad eyes, etc. used for fishing is also part of the
fishing gear.
2.2
Lifting appliances
2.2.1
All cranes, derricks, hoists, tackles and other
gear used for loading and/or discharging of, e.g. processed catch, fish meal, supplies, equipment, etc. in a
harbour (for exceptions see C.3.2), are defined as
lifting appliances.
2.2.2
Some gear/appliance or parts of it may be
regarded as fishing gear and lifting appliance alike.
2.3
2.3.1
Running and standing wire ropes used for
fishing, catch handling, loading and/or discharging are
defined as ropes.
2.4.2
Operation load
2.5
Certification
Class Notation
On the basis of "Certification" and in case GL is entrusted to conduct annual/5-yearly surveys and the
supervision of load testing every five years the vessel
will get the "Class Notation" CFG (Certified Fishing
Gear). For documentation see F.4.2.
Chapter 8
Page 62
3.
Section 6
2.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
3.2
2.1
3.1
International regulations
3.3.2
Chapters 1 4 and GL Rules II Materials
and Welding, for hull structures, machinery and electrical installations must be applied accordingly.
3.4
3.3.1
GL Rules VI Additional Rules and Guidelines, Part 2 Life-Saving Appliances, Lifting Appliances, Accesses, Chapter 2 Guidelines for the Construction and Survey of Lifting Appliances, in short
"Lifting Appliance Guidelines". These Guidelines are
dealing in detail with design and dimensioning requirements, plan approval, supervision during construction, Certification of components, examination
and testing, accident prevention and with the Certification system for lifting appliances, ropes and accessories.
Standards
2.2
Plan Approval
1.
General
Classification
1.3
Class Notation
For assigning a Class Notation to a vessel no additional plan approval and/or verification in excess of
those addressed in 1.1 and 1.2 is required.
information about the machinery such as hoisting, slewing and luffing mechanisms plus general drawings of the winches including their design data, and detail drawings of base plate and
drums
Certification
For the Certification of fishing gear and lifting appliances the documents as described in 2.2 shall undergo
approval and/or verification.
B.
2.2.2
I - Part 1
GL 2007
2.2.3
Section 6
2.2.2
For dimensioning of jumper stays it has to be
assumed that the minimum breaking load of the
jumper stays is not to be less than the product of the
maximum rope tension (due to SWL and pretensioning) and a factor of utilization K equal to 4.
The slag span f of the unloaded rope shall be limited
by:
l/f
C.
Dimensioning
1.
General
1.1
While fishing gear is to be dimensioned for a
defined design load DLn, lifting appliances must be
assessed for a defined safe working load SWL. These
loads shall be specified in the drawings and calculations submitted. Allowance is to be made for possible
oblique loading and simultaneous loading of a supporting structure by more than one fishing gear and/or
lifting appliance.
1.2
Shipyard, design office, manufacturers and/or
owners, as the case may be, have to decide on the
operating conditions and to specify the angles of trawl
warp attack and there possible combinations, the design loads DLn of fishing gear and the SWL of lifting
appliances to provide the basis for dimensioning and
approval.
2.
Fishing gear
2.1
General
Chapter 8
Page 63
2.2.3
In case there are several tackles suspended
from a jumper stay it will be assumed that only one at
a time is in operation if not otherwise described in the
approval documentation.
2.3
Trawling gear
Pelagic trawl
L2 = DL2 fo
2.1.1
For dimensioning it has to be considered that
the forces acting on fishing gear cannot be determined
exactly. This is especially valid for loads acting on
e.g. net tails, jumper stay tackles or trawling gear.
2.3.2
2.1.2
Consequently the operating factor fo = 1,5 as
applied in the following makes up for these uncertain
loads.
DL3
2.1.3
Fish pumps and power blocks for hauling of
nets will be dealt with individually, if necessary.
2.2
2.2.1
The dimensioning of catch handling gear is to
be based on the following:
L1 = DL1 fo
Ground trawl
Chapter 8
Page 64
Section 6
2.3.3
The angles of trawl warp of egression as
specified consider dynamic vessel inclinations as
prescribed in the Lifting Appliance Guidelines.
2.3.4
If higher strength materials are used their ReH
or Rp0,2 shall be reduced in accordance with the Lifting
Appliance Guidelines. ReH respectively Rp0,2 is to be
taken from the applicable material standards.
2.3.5
In the North and Baltic Sea, or in other shallow waters with similar conditions, it is recommended
that trawl booms and their forward stays should be
dimensioned with an additional safety margin of 10 %.
3.
Lifting appliances
3.1
The dimensioning of lifting appliances is to
be based on SWL, load radius, dynamic influences,
etc. for a Type A lifting appliance as described in the
Lifting Appliance Guidelines for load handling in
sheltered waters, i.e. in harbours. This system is based
on allowed stresses, proof against ReH or Rp0,2 and
fatigue, as may be necessary.
For dimensioning a minimum static vessel inclination
is prescribed in the Lifting Appliance Guidelines.
Depending on the actual stability of a given vessel a
bigger inclination may have to be taken into consideration.
3.2
A dimensioning of lifting appliances for load
handling at sea may be considered individually on the
basis of the Lifting Appliance Guidelines, if this may
be necessary. In such cases a larger vessel inclination
and additional dynamic influences are to be taken into
consideration.
4.
4.1
Ropes
Accessories
4.2.1
In case of accessories for catch handling gear
and lifting appliances their nominal sizes shall be
equal to the static forces acting on them, e.g. DL1 or
I - Part 1
GL 2007
D.
Construction
1.
General
Fishing gear
2.1
Stern gantries
2.1.1
Stern gantries shall be dimensioned for angles
of rope attack in accordance with C.2.3.1 as need may
be. All locations where rope blocks are fixed shall be
sufficiently strengthened, e.g. by inside frames and
outside brackets.
2.1.2
End operating/rest positions of hinged gantries shall be able to be sufficiently locked or secured
by mechanical or hydraulic means.
2.1.3
The movement of hinged gantries shall be
controlled from a local control stand inaccessible to
unauthorized persons or from a central control stand,
e.g. at the rear of the bridge. As soon as the controls,
such as push-buttons, levers and similar are released,
movement of the gantry shall stop immediately.
If central control is realized, emergency stop buttons
have to be provided in the rear working deck area. The
gantry has to be fully visible from the control station.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 6
2.1.4
Fixed stern gantries shall have safe access to
their top and to platforms, if any. Top and platforms
shall have sufficient handrails and foot bars, compare
Section 4, E.3.
2.2
Side gallows
2.2.1
Side gallows (fish davits) typically arranged
on starboard side need to have sufficient additional
strength because they may get heavy blows when the
trawl boards are hauled in at bad seaway conditions.
2.2.2
Means are to be provided in front of side
gallows for a secure stowage of trawl boards and trawl
doors, if any.
2.3
Jumper stays
2.3.1
Sheaves rolling onto the jumper stay shall
have at least a minimum diameter of 14 times the rope
diameter.
2.3.2
To reduce the effect of corrosion, jumper stay
ropes shall be galvanized and shall have wire cores.
2.3.3
Wire rope clips and other detachable clamps
are not permitted for rope end attachments. For
shackle connections only type C shackles as shown in
the Lifting Appliance Guidelines shall be employed.
2.4
Trawl booms
Deck equipment
3.1
Winches
3.1.1
Winches shall be designed in accordance with
the Chapter 2 Machinery Installations and be of
reversible type. Also the rope paying out shall be
motor controlled.
3.1.2
Winches for ground trawling shall be dimensioned to withstand the design load DL3, i.e. the
breaking of a trawl warp. Winches for pelagic trawling
shall be designed to withstand the nominal winch pull
DL2 multiplied by the operating factor fo. (see A.2.4
and C.2.1.2).
3.1.3
Satisfactory spooling of ropes onto the drums
shall be ensured. Winch drums of trawl warps shall
have a diameter ratio (d : D) between ropes and drums
of 1:14. The direction in which the rope reels onto the
drum shall be clearly indicated on the winch.
3.1.4
The way in which the first layer of rope is
wound onto the drum shall be chosen depending on
the lay of the rope so that the rope does not unlay.
Chapter 8
Page 65
3.1.5
Trawl winches and their leading rollers shall
be arranged such that the rope fleet angles to either
side of the drum centre are symmetrical.
3.1.6
The number of safety turns of rope left on a
drum shall be such that the maximum rope tension,
which is in case of winches for ground trawling the
minimum rope breaking load, can be taken jointly by
the remaining turns and the end fastenings.
3.1.7
Rope end fastenings shall be designed such
that they
3.2
3.2.1
Centre fairleads on side trawlers shall be
provided with a protective guard extending at the sides
at least 0,30 m beyond the outer periphery of the fairleads.
3.2.2
The groove of rollers passed over by shackles, swivels, chain links, etc. shall be specially designed to prevent undue stressing of these parts.
3.2.3
Rope sheaves are to be fitted with a protective device which prevents the ropes from jumping out
of the sheave.
3.2.4
The sheave for the trawl warp messenger
rope shall be fixed in the bulwark. Fixing on top of the
bulwark is not allowed.
3.2.5
The fleet angle of wire ropes running over
metallic rope sheaves shall not exceed 4.
3.2.6
Rope sheaves made of plastic may only be
employed with the consent of GL and owners.
3.2.7
The groove diameter of rope sheaves shall be
at least 14 times the rope diameter in case of running
ropes under load.
4.
4.1
Ropes, especially trawl warps, which are
spooled in several layers, shall have a steel wire core.
4.2
Portable guide rollers shall not be used unless
fitted with an efficient and adequately designed rope
restraining device.
4.3
Shackles, swivels, chain links, etc. which are
to pass over rollers shall be specially designed in order
to prevent overstressing.
4.4
Bows and pad eyes for attaching of moveable
blocks shall be aligned in such a way that they may
not be undue stressed rectangular to their main load
plane.
Chapter 8
Page 66
Section 6
4.5
The material properties and dimensions of
pad eyes for high tensile shackles, e.g. green pin
shackles, may be obtained from GL Head Office upon
request.
3.
4.6
Chains used for fishing or load handling shall
meet the requirements in the relevant GL Rules, see
A.3.3.2.
4.
E.
Accident Prevention
1.
Deck areas
1.1
After the net has been hauled in or out, the
stern ramp shall be properly secured by suitable
equipment.
1.2
Provision shall be made for the stowage of
bulky netting to allow drainage and to prevent shifting. The stowage area shall be of adequate dimensions
to hold down the centre of gravity of the stowed net as
far as possible and to allow for the crew to work not
endangered when handling the nets.
1.3
In the range of fishing winches and net
drums, a passageway at least 0,60 m wide shall be
maintained.
1.4
Fixed and removable fish pounds for holding
the catch on and below deck shall be of adequate size.
Fish pounds on deck shall be constructed in such a
way that water can drain without hindrance.
1.5
4, E.
2.
Fishing gear
2.1
Fishing gear shall be designed to avoid working accidents and damage to the gear if the operating
instructions to be provided are consequently followed.
Possible danger scenarios during operations have to be
clearly addressed in these instructions.
2.2
Where practicable, provision shall be made to
stop trawl boards from swinging inboard, such as the
fitting of a portable prevention bar at the gallows aperture, or other equally effective means.
2.3
If no fishing activities are under way, the
complete fishing gear has to be stowed in a safe way.
Adequate devices for lashing have to be provided.
2.4
Where manually operated gear is installed it
should be capable of being disengaged when the
warps are paying out. The operating wheels shall be
without spokes or protrusions which could cause injury to the operator.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Lifting appliances
4.1
The controls and monitoring instruments of
winches shall be clearly arranged on the control platform. They shall be placed to give the winch driver
ample room for unimpeded operation and an unobstructed view of the working area.
4.2
Controls and monitoring instruments have to
be permanently, clearly and intelligible marked with
the direction or the function of the movement they
control. The arrangement and direction of movement
of controls and monitoring instruments must match the
direction of the movement which they control. In the
case of pushbutton controls there shall be a separate
button for each direction of movement.
4.3
Where a fishing winch is controlled from the
bridge, the arrangements shall be such that the operator has a clear view of the winch and the adjacent area.
In addition to an emergency button at the winch, an
emergency button on the bridge shall be provided.
4.4
Where necessary, emergency buttons for
winches shall be provided remote from the winch to
protect fishermen working in places which are dangerous for operating trawl warps and boards.
F.
1.
General
1.1
The following statements outline the test,
survey and Certification system applied by GL in case
this is required by Flag State Regulations or agreed
upon with owners. The Class Notation system will be
applied in case the vessel shall get the Class Notation
CFG.
1.2
Lifting appliances with a SWL below one
tonne will be treated in the same way as those with
one tonne and more, except national regulations stipulate otherwise.
2.
Certification
I - Part 1
GL 2007
2.1
Section 6
Supervision of construction
3.1
Chapter 8
Page 67
2.1.1
Supervision of construction at the premises of
subcontractors is not prescribed. Subcontractors shall
deliver fishing gear and lifting appliances with their
works Certificates for being presented to a GL Surveyor by the shipyard.
3.1.1
Once a year in conjunction with Annual Class
Surveys fishing gear and lifting appliances will be
surveyed by the acting GL Surveyor. Following this,
the GL Surveyor will confirm the surveys conducted
by him in the Register Book (Form LA1).
2.1.2
In case of components being constructed at
the shipyard, i.e. hinged stern gantries, etc., a GL
Surveyor shall conduct supervision and certify the
construction. Fixed stern gantries are subject to Classification of the vessel and generally undergo supervision of construction.
3.1.2
Every five years, in conjunction with the Class
Renewal Survey of the vessel, a new function/load
testing of fishing gear/lifting appliances, as far as possible, supervised by a GL Surveyor is required.
2.2
2.2.1
Works Certificates for wire ropes and accessories will be accepted, if tensile testing to destruction
in case of ropes, respectively static load testing in case
of accessories as prescribed in the Lifting Appliance
Guidelines is confirmed in the Certificates.
2.2.2
The Certificates for wire ropes and accessories are to be ordered by the manufacturers of fishing
gear and lifting appliances at subcontractors and shall
be delivered to the shipyard together with the fabricated gear/appliances for being handed over to a GL
Surveyor by the shipyard.
2.3
2.3.1
Before being taken into operation, fishing
gear shall be presented to a GL Surveyor and function
tested in his presence as far as possible by the shipyard. Following this the GL Surveyor will examine the
gear.
2.3.2
Before being taken into operation lifting
appliances shall be load and function tested on the
vessel, usually by the shipyard, supervised by a GL
Surveyor who will examine the appliances after the
test.
2.3.3
Following supervision of load and/or function
testing and after examination, the acting GL Surveyor
will issue a GL load test Certificate, Form LA2, for
the lifting appliances, confirm the examinations conducted by him for both fishing gear and lifting appliances into a GL Register Book, Form LA1, and release the complete documentation as described under 4.
3.
Class Notation
For the Class Notation CFG, in addition to Certification, annual and 5-yearly examinations of fishing gear
and lifting appliances are to be conducted by a GL
Surveyor who will also supervise the 5 yearly load
testing of lifting appliances.
The Class Notation will automatically become invalid
and will be withdrawn by GL Head Office if fishing
gear and lifting appliances are no more presented for
surveys and/or load testing within the time windows
according to 3.1.4. The following tests and examinations are to be performed:
3.1.3
Following function/load testing in according
with 3.1.2 the acting GL Surveyor will examine all
gear/appliances, issue a new load test Certificate for
the lifting appliances, confirm all examinations conducted by him in the Register Book and add the load
test Certificate to it.
3.1.4
All time windows for tests and surveys are
the same as for the Class Surveys of the vessel.
3.2
3.2.1
After repair of load bearing parts of fishing
gear an examination is required.
3.2.2
After repair of load bearing parts of lifting
appliances a new load testing/examination and a new
load test Certificate is required.
3.2.3
Replacement of axles, shafts, rope sheaves,
ropes, accessories, etc. due to wear and tear does not
necessitate load testing and subsequent examination.
3.2.4
Newly issued Certificates have to be included
into the Register Book and the examinations have to
be confirmed in this book.
4.
Documentation
4.1
Certification
4.1.1
Following successful tests and examinations
as described in the foregoing, the acting GL Surveyor
will issue a GL Register Book for all fishing gear and
lifting appliances on the vessel which shall remain on
board for at least 5 years after the last 5 yearly survey/
load testing.
4.1.2
In the Register Book all Certificates for load
testing of lifting appliances as well as for testing of
ropes and attachments will be collected as evidence towards all parties concerned. In addition the GL Surveyor will add rope reeving plans for lifting appliances and
fishing gear to the Register Book, as far as available.
4.2
Class Notation
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 7
Chapter 8
Page 71
Section 7
Structural Fire Protection
A.
General
1.
Application
Documents to be submitted
door plan
3.
GL approval
3.1
The term "approved" relates to a material or
construction, for which GL has issued an Approval
Certificate. A type approval can be issued on the basis
of a successful standard fire test, which has been carried out by neutral and recognized fire test institutes.
3.2
The type "A", "B" and "C" class partitions,
fire dampers, duct penetrations as well as the insulation materials, linings, ceilings, surface materials and
not readily ignitable deck coverings shall be of approved type.
4.
Equivalence
5.
References
For the rules for fire protection and fire fighting see
Section 8, for electrical installations for fire detection
see Section 11h, D.4.
B.
1.
Material
1.1
The hull, decks, structural bulkheads, superstructures and deckhouses are to be of steel except
where in special cases the use of other suitable material may be approved, having in mind the risk of fire.
1.2
Bulkheads and decks enclosing machinery
spaces, cargo spaces, emergency generator rooms,
galleys, pantries containing cooking appliances, store
rooms containing flammable liquids and workshops
other than those forming part of the machinery spaces
are to be of steel or equivalent material.
1.3
All stairways shall be of steel frame construction or equivalent material.
2.
Exemptions
3.1
Paints, varnishes and other finishes used on
exposed interior surfaces shall not offer an undue fire
hazard and shall not be capable of producing excessive quantities of smoke.
3.2
Primary deck coverings, if applied, in accommodation and service spaces and control stations,
which are located above machinery spaces, shall be of
an approved material which will not readily ignite.
Chapter 8
Page 72
4.
Section 7
Ventilation systems
4.1
The main inlet and outlets of all ventilation
systems shall be capable of being closed from outside
the respective spaces in the event of a fire.
4.2
Where they pass through accommodation
spaces or spaces containing combustible materials, the
exhaust ducts from galley ranges shall be appropriately isolated.
5.
Means of escape
5.1
Stairways and ladders shall be so arranged as
to provide, from all accommodation spaces and from
spaces in which the crew is normally employed, other
than machinery spaces, ready means of escape to the
open deck and from there to the lifeboats and liferafts.
5.2
At all levels of accommodation there shall be
provided at least two widely separated means of escape from each restricted space or group of spaces.
5.3
Dispense may be given with one of the means
of escape, due regard being paid to the nature and
location of spaces and to the numbers of persons who
normally might be quartered or employed there.
5.4
No dead-end corridors having a length of
more than 7 m shall be accepted. A dead-end corridor
is a corridor or part of a corridor from which there is
only one escape route.
5.5
Two means of escape shall be provided from
the machinery space by two sets of steel ladders as
widely separated as possible leading to doors in the
upper part of the space similarly separated and from
which access is provided to the open deck.
5.6
For a vessel of a gross tonnage less than
1000, dispense may be given with one of the means of
escape due regard being paid to the dimension and
disposition of the upper part of the space.
C.
1.
Materials
1.1
The hull, decks, structural bulkheads, superstructures and deckhouses are to be of steel except
where in special cases the use of other suitable material may be approved, having in mind the risk of fire.
1.2
Components made from aluminium alloys
require special treatment, with regard to the mechanical properties of the material in case of temperature
increase. In principle, the following is to be observed:
1.2.1
The insulation of "A" or "B" class divisions
shall be such that the temperature of the structural core
I - Part 1
GL 2007
1.2.3
Crowns and casings of machinery spaces of
category A shall be of steel construction and be insulated as required by Table 7.1 as appropriate. Openings therein, if any, shall be suitably arranged and
protected to prevent the spread of fire.
2.
2.1
One of the following methods of protection
shall be adopted in accommodation and service areas:
2.1.1
Method IC
Method IIC
Method IIIC
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 7
Table 7.1
Spaces
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
A-05
A-0
A-60
A-0
A-15
A-60
A-15
A-60
A-60
B-0
B-0
A-03
B-0
A-60
A-0
A-0
A-0
C1, 2
B-0
A-03
B-0
A-60
A-0
A-0
A-0
B-0
A-03
B-0
A-03
A-60
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-60
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-60
A-04
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-04
Control stations
[1]
Corridors
[2]
Accommodation spaces
[3]
Stairways
[4]
[5]
Chapter 8
Page 73
[7]
Cargo spaces
[8]
[9]
Open decks
[10]
Notes
1
No special requirements are imposed upon bulkheads in methods IIC and IIIC fire protection.
In case of method IIC "B" class bulkheads of "B-0" rating shall be provided between spaces or groups of spaces of 50 m2 and over in area.
Where spaces are of the same numerical category and superscript 4 appears, a bulkhead or deck of the rating shown in the Tables is only
required when the adjacent spaces are for a different purpose, e.g. in category 9. A galley next to a galley does not require a bulkhead but
a galley next to a paint room requires an "A-0" bulkhead.
Bulkheads separating the wheelhouse, chartroom and radio room from each other may be "B-0" rating.
Fire insulation need not be fitted if the machinery space in category 7, has little or no fire risk.
Where a 7 appears in the Tables, the division is required to be of steel or other equivalent material but is not required to be of "A" class
standard.
3.
3.1
All bulkheads required to be "B" class divisions shall extend from deck to deck and to the shell
or other boundaries, unless continuous "B" class ceilings or linings are fitted on both sides of the bulkhead
in which case the bulkhead may terminate at the continuous ceiling or lining.
3.2
Method IC
All bulkheads not required by this or other requirements of this Section to be "A" or "B" class divisions,
shall be of at least "C" class construction.
3.3
Method IIC
Method IIIC
4.1
In addition to complying with the specific
provisions for fire integrity of bulkheads and decks
mentioned elsewhere in this Section, the minimum fire
integrity of bulkheads and decks shall be as prescribed
in Tables 7.1 and 7.2.
Chapter 8
Page 74
Table 7.2
Section 7
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Spaces
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
Control stations
[1]
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-60
A-0
A-0
A-0
Corridors
[2]
A-0
A-0
A-60
A-0
A-0
A-0
Accommodation spaces
[3]
A-60
A-0
A-0
A-60
A-0
A-0
A-0
Stairways
[4]
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-60
A-8
A-8
A-8
[5]
A-15
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-60
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-60
A-60
A-60
A-60
A-60
A-606 A-30
A-60
[7]
A-15
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
Cargo spaces
[8]
A-60
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
[9]
A-60
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-60
A-0
A-0
A-04
Open decks
[10]
4.2
Continuous "B" class ceilings or linings, in
association with the relevant decks or bulkheads, may
be accepted as contributing, wholly or in part, to the
required insulation and integrity of a division.
4.3
External boundaries which are required in 1.1
to be of steel or other equivalent material may be
pierced for the fitting of windows and sidescuttles
provided that there is no requirement for such boundaries to have "A" class integrity elsewhere in these
requirements. Similarly, in such boundaries which are
not required to have "A" class integrity, doors may be
of materials to meet the requirements of their application.
4.4
The following requirements shall govern
application of the Tables:
bulkheads of such smaller rooms shall be as prescribed in Tables 7.1 and 7.2.
The title of each category is intended to be typical
rather than restrictive. The number in parentheses
preceding each category refers to the applicable column or row number in the Tables.
[1]
Corridors
Corridors and lobbies.
[3]
4.5
For determining the appropriate fire integrity
standards to be applied to divisions between adjacent
spaces, such spaces are classified according to their
fire risk as shown in the following categories 1 to 10.
Where the contents and use of a space are such that
there is a doubt as to its classification for the purpose
of this regulation, or where it is possible to assign two
or more classifications to a space, it shall be treated as
a space within the relevant category having the most
stringent boundary requirements. Smaller, enclosed
rooms within a space that have less than 30 % communicating openings to that space are to be considered
as separate spaces. The fire integrity of the boundary
Control stations
Accommodation spaces
Spaces used for public spaces, lavatories, cabins, offices, hospitals, hobby rooms, pantries
containing no cooking appliances and similar
spaces.
[4]
Stairways
Interior stairways, totally enclosed emergency
escape trunks and enclosures thereto.
In this connection, a stairway which is enclosed
only at one level shall be regarded as part of the
space from which it is not separated by a fire
door.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
[5]
Section 7
[6]
[7]
[8]
Cargo spaces
All spaces used for cargo and trunkways and
hatchways to such spaces.
[9]
5.1
Stairways which penetrate only a single deck
shall be protected at least at one level by at least "B-0"
class divisions and self-closing doors. Stairways
which penetrate more than a single deck shall be surrounded by at least "A-0" class divisions and be protected by self-closing doors at all levels.
5.2
On vessels having accommodation for 12
persons or less, where stairways penetrate more than a
single deck and where there are at least two escape
routes direct to the open deck at every accommodation
Chapter 8
Page 75
6.1
Where "A" or "B" class divisions are penetrated for the passage of electric cables, pipes, trunks,
ducts, etc. or for girders, beams or other structural
members, arrangements shall be made to ensure that
the fire resistance is not impaired.
6.2
Except for hatches between cargo, special
category, store, and baggage spaces, and between such
spaces and the weather decks, all openings shall be
provided with permanently attached means of closing
which shall be at least as effective for resisting fires as
the divisions in which they are fitted. 1
6.3
The fire resistance of doors shall be equivalent to that of the division in which they are fitted.
Doors and door frames in "A" class divisions shall be
constructed of steel. Doors in "B" class divisions shall
be non-combustible. Doors fitted in boundary bulkheads of machinery spaces of category A shall be
reasonably gastight and self-closing. In vessels constructed according to method IC the use of combustible materials in doors separating cabins from individual interior sanitary accommodation such as showers
may be permitted.
6.4
Doors required to be self-closing shall not be
fitted with hold-back hooks. However, hold-back
arrangements fitted with remote release devices of the
fail-safe type may be utilized.
6.5
In corridor bulkheads ventilation openings
may be permitted only in and under class B-doors of
cabins and public spaces. Ventilation openings are
also permitted in B-doors leading to lavatories, offices, pantries, lockers and store rooms. Except as
permitted below, the openings shall be provided only
in the lower half of a door. Where such opening is in
or under a door the total net area of any such opening
or openings shall not exceed 0,05 m2. Alternatively, a
non-combustible air balance duct routed between the
cabin and the corridor, and located below the sanitary
unit is permitted where the cross-sectional area of the
duct does not exceed 0,05 m2. Ventilation openings,
except those under the door, shall be fitted with a
grille made of non-combustible material.
6.6
Chapter 8
Page 76
7.
Section 7
Ventilation systems
I - Part 1
GL 2007
7.1
Ventilation ducts shall be of non-combustible
material. Short ducts, however, not generally exceeding 2 m in length and with a cross-section not exceeding 0,02 m2 need not be non-combustible, subject to
the following conditions:
7.1.1
these ducts shall be of a material having low
flame spread characteristics which is type approved; 2
7.3
The main inlets and outlets of all ventilation
systems shall be capable of being closed from outside
the respective spaces in the event of a fire.
7.1.2
they may only be used at the end of the ventilation device;
7.1.3
they shall not be situated less than 600 mm,
measured along the duct, from an opening in an "A" or
"B" class division including continuous "B" class
ceilings.
7.2
Where a thin plated duct with a free crosssectional area equal to, or less than, 0,02 m2 passes
through "A" class bulkheads or decks, the opening
shall be lined with a steel sheet sleeve having a thickness of at least 3 mm and a length of at least 200 mm,
divided preferably into 100 mm on each side of the
bulkhead or, in the case of the deck, wholly laid on the
lower side of the decks pierced. Where ventilation
ducts with a free cross-sectional area exceeding 0,02
m2 pass through "A" class bulkheads or decks, the
opening shall be lined with a steel sheet sleeve. However, where such ducts are of steel construction and
pass through a deck or bulkhead, the ducts and sleeves
shall comply with the following:
7.2.1
The sleeves shall have a thickness of at least
3 mm and a length of at least 900 mm. When passing
through bulkheads, this length shall be divided preferably into 450 mm on each side of the bulkhead.
These ducts, or sleeves lining such ducts, shall be
provided with fire insulation. The insulation shall have
at least the same fire integrity as the bulkhead or deck
through which the duct passes.
7.2.2
Ducts with a free cross-sectional area exceeding 0,075 m2 shall be fitted with fire dampers in addition to the requirements of 7.2.1. The fire damper shall
also be capable of being closed manually from both
sides of the bulkhead or deck. The damper shall be
provided with an indicator which shows whether the
damper is open or closed. Fire dampers are not required, however, where ducts pass through spaces
surrounded by "A" class divisions, without serving
those spaces, provided those ducts have the same fire
integrity as the divisions which they pierce.
7.2.3
The following arrangement shall be of an
approved type. 3
2
3
7.4
Where they pass through accommodation
spaces or spaces containing combustible materials, the
exhaust ducts from galley ranges shall be constructed
of insulated "A" class divisions. Each exhaust duct
shall be fitted with:
7.4.1
7.4.2
duct;
7.4.3
arrangements, operable from within the galley, for shutting off the exhaust fan; and
7.4.4
fixed means for extinguishing a fire within
the duct, see Section 8, H.1.
7.5
Such measures as are practicable shall be
taken in respect of control stations outside machinery
spaces in order to ensure that ventilation, visibility and
freedom from smoke are maintained, so that in the
event of fire the machinery and equipment contained
therein may be supervised and continue to function
effectively. Alternative and separate means of air
supply shall be provided; air inlets of the two sources
of supply shall be so disposed that the risk of both
inlets drawing in smoke simultaneously is minimized.
Such requirements need not apply to control stations
situated on, and opening on to, an open deck.
7.6
The ventilation system for machinery spaces
of category A, galleys, special category spaces and
cargo spaces shall, in general, be separated from each
other and from the ventilation systems serving other
spaces. Except that, galley ventilation on vessels of
less than 4 000 gross tonnage need not be completely
separated, but may be served by separate ducts from a
ventilation unit serving other spaces. In any case, an
automatic fire damper shall be fitted in the galley
ventilation ducts near the ventilation unit.
7.7
Ducts provided for the ventilation of machinery spaces of category A, galleys or special category
spaces shall not pass through accommodation spaces,
service spaces or control stations unless the ducts are
either:
7.7.1
constructed of steel having a thickness of at
least 3 mm and 5 mm for ducts the widths or diameters of which are up to and including 300 mm and
760 mm and over respectively and, in the case of such
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 7
Chapter 8
Page 77
7.11
7.11.1
Purpose
fitted with automatic fire dampers close to the boundaries penetrated; and
insulated to "A-60" standard from the machinery
spaces, galleys or special category spaces to a point at
least 5 m beyond each fire damper;
or
7.7.2
constructed of steel suitable supported and
stiffened and insulated to "A-60" standard throughout
the accommodation spaces, service spaces or control
stations.
7.8
Ducts provided for the ventilation to accommodation spaces, service spaces or control stations
shall not pass through machinery spaces of category
A, galleys or special category spaces unless either:
7.8.1
the ducts where they pass through a machinery space of category A, galley or special category
space are constructed of steel, suitable supported and
stiffened and automatic fire dampers are fitted close to
the boundaries penetrated; and
automatic fire dampers are fitted close to the boundaries penetrated and
the integrity of the machinery space, galley or special
category space boundaries is maintained at the penetrations; or
7.8.2
the ducts where they pass through a machinery space of category A, galley or special category
space are constructed of steel, suitable supported and
stiffened, and
are insulated to "A-60" standard throughout the accommodation spaces, service spaces or control stations.
7.9
Ventilation ducts with a free cross-sectional
area exceeding 0,02 m2 passing through "B" class
bulkheads shall be lined with steel sheet sleeves of
900 mm in length divided preferably into 450 mm on
each side of the bulkheads unless the duct is of steel
for this length.
7.10
Power ventilation of accommodation spaces,
service spaces, cargo spaces, control stations and
machinery spaces shall be capable of being stopped
from an easily accessible position outside the space
being served. This position should not be readily cut
off in the event of a fire in the spaces served. The
means provided for stopping the power ventilation of
the machinery spaces shall be entirely separate from
the means provided for stopping ventilation of other
spaces.
7.11.2
8.1
All exposed surfaces in corridors and stairway enclosures and surfaces including grounds in
concealed or inaccessible spaces in accommodation
and service spaces and control stations shall have low
flame-spread characteristics. Exposed surfaces of
ceilings in accommodation and service spaces (except
saunas) and control stations shall have low flamespread characteristics. 4
8.2
Paints, varnishes and other finishes used on
exposed interior surfaces shall not offer an undue fire
hazard and shall not be capable of producing excessive quantities of smoke. 5
8.3
Primary deck coverings, if applied, in accommodation and service spaces and control stations
shall be of an approved material which will not readily
4
5
Chapter 8
Page 78
Section 7
Details of construction
9.1
Method IC
In accommodation and service spaces and control stations all linings, draught stops, ceilings and their associated grounds shall be of non-combustible materials.
9.2
In corridors and stairway enclosures serving accommodation and service spaces and control stations,
ceilings, linings, draught stops and their associated
grounds shall be of non-combustible materials.
9.3
9.3.1
Except in cargo spaces or refrigerated compartments of service spaces, insulating materials shall
be non-combustible. Vapour barriers and adhesives
used in conjunction with insulation, as well as the
insulation of pipe fittings, for cold service systems,
need not be of non-combustible materials, but they
shall be kept to the minimum quantity practicable and
their exposed surfaces shall have low flame spread
characteristics.
9.3.2
Where non-combustible bulkheads, linings
and ceilings are fitted in accommodation and service
spaces they may have a combustible veneer with a
calorific value 7 not exceeding 45 MJ/m2 of the area
for the thickness used.
9.3.3
The total volume of combustible facings,
mouldings, decorations and veneers in any accommodation and service space bounded by non-combustible
bulkheads, ceilings and linings shall not exceed a
volume equivalent to a 2,5 mm veneer on the combined area of the walls and ceilings.
9.3.4
Air spaces enclosed behind ceilings, panellings, or linings, shall be divided by close-fitting
draught stops spaced not more than 14 m apart. In the
vertical direction, such air spaces, including those
behind linings of stairways, trunks, etc., shall be
closed at each deck.
6
7
I - Part 1
GL 2007
10.
Fixed fire detection and fire alarm systems, automatic sprinkler, fire detection
and fire alarm system
10.1
In vessels in which method IC is adopted, a
smoke detection system shall be so installed and arranged as to protect all corridors, stairways and escape
routes within accommodation spaces.
10.2
In vessels in which method IIC is adopted, an
automatic sprinkler, fire detection and fire alarm system shall be so installed and arranged as to protect
accommodation spaces, galleys and other service
spaces, except spaces which afford no substantial fire
risk such as void spaces, sanitary spaces, etc. In addition, a fixed fire detection and fire alarm system shall
be so arranged and installed as to provide smoke detection in all corridors, stairways and escape routes
within accommodation spaces.
10.3
In vessels in which method IIIC is adopted, a
fixed fire detection and fire alarm system shall be so
installed and arranged as to detect the presence of fire
in all accommodation spaces and service spaces, except spaces which afford no substantial fire risk such
as void spaces, sanitary spaces, etc. In addition, a
fixed fire detection and fire alarm system shall be so
arranged and installed as to provide smoke detection
in all corridors, stairways and escape routes within
accommodation spaces.
11.
Means of escape
11.1
Stairways and ladders shall be so arranged as
to provide, from all accommodation spaces and from
spaces in which the crew is normally employed, other
than machinery spaces, ready means of escape to the
open deck and from there to the lifeboats and liferafts.
11.2
At all levels of accommodation there shall be
provided at least two widely separated means of escape from each restricted space or group of spaces.
11.3
Dispense may be given with one of the means
of escape, due regard being paid to the nature and
location of spaces and to the numbers of persons who
normally might be quartered or employed there.
11.4
No dead-end corridors having a length of
more than 7 m shall be accepted. A dead-end corridor
is a corridor or part of a corridor from which there is
only one escape route.
11.5
Two means of escape shall be provided from
the machinery space by two sets of steel ladders as
widely separated as possible leading to doors in the
upper part of the space similarly separated and from
which access is provided to the open deck.
11.6
For a vessel of a gross tonnage less than
1000, dispense may be given with one of the means of
escape due regard being paid to the dimension and
disposition of the upper part of the space.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
12.
Section 7
Miscellaneous items
12.1
The cargo holds and machinery spaces have
to be capable of being effectively sealed such as to
prevent the inlet of air. Doors fitted in boundary bulkheads of machinery spaces of category A shall be
reasonably gastight and self-closing.
12.2
Chapter 8
Page 79
12.2.3 The traditional wooden lining on the bulkheads and on the ceiling are permitted in the sauna.
The ceiling above the oven shall be lined with a noncombustible plate with an air-gap of at least 30 mm.
The distance from the hot surfaces to combustible
materials shall be at least 500 mm or the combustible
materials shall be suitably protected.
12.2.4 The traditional wooden benches are permitted
to be used in the sauna.
12.2.5
ing.
Fire-extinguishing arrangements according to Section 8, H.4. are to be provided for cargo spaces.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 8
Chapter 8
Page 81
Section 8
Fire Protection and Fire Fighting
arrangement of pipes, valves and hydrants including material, pipe diameters and wall thicknesses
2.
Application
3.3
2.1
General
A.
General
1.
Scope
Fishing vessels of flag states which have already ratified the Torremolinos International Convention for
fishing vessels with a length L 45 m, see Section 1,
A.3., have to follow directly the requirements defined
therein.
2.3
Fire extinguishers
types, sizes and position
Fixed gas fire extinguishing system
hydraulic calculation
3.4
arrangement drawing
European Community
3.2
3.5
arrangement drawing
National regulations
Where national regulations are existing, these regulations have to be met in addition. It will be decided
case by case if GL will supervise also the compliance
with such regulations.
3.6
arrangement drawing
3.
3.7
arrangement drawing
Chapter 8
Page 82
3.8
Section 8
arrangement drawing
3.9
I - Part 1
GL 2007
2.2
Oiltight coamings are to be provided between
boiler and engine rooms not separated by watertight
bulkheads.
2.3
Where boilers are located in machinery
spaces on 'tween-decks and the boiler rooms are not
separated from the machinery spaces by watertight
bulkheads, the 'tween-decks are to be provided with
oiltight coamings at least 200 mm high. Drains from
this area may be led to the bilges. In case of thermal
oil boilers, however, the drains are to be led to a leakage oil tank.
arrangement drawing
3.
3.1
All parts with surface temperatures above
220, e.g. steam, thermal oil and exhaust gas lines,
exhaust gas boilers and silencers, turbochargers etc.,
are to be effectively insulated with non-combustible
materials. The insulation shall be such that oil or fuel
cannot penetrate into the insulating material. Metal
cladding or approved hard jacketing of the insulation
is considered to afford effective protection against
such penetration.
B.
1.
1.1
The arrangement of machinery spaces shall
be so that safe storage and handling of flammable
liquids is ensured.
1.2
All spaces in which internal combustion
engines, oil burners or fuel settling or service tanks are
located shall be easily accessible and sufficiently ventilated.
1.3
Where leakages of flammable liquids may
occur during operation or routine maintenance work,
special precautions are to be taken to prevent these
liquids from coming into contact with sources of ignition.
1.4
Materials used in machinery spaces shall
normally not have properties increasing the fire potential of these rooms.
1.5
Materials used as flooring, bulkhead lining,
ceiling or deck in control rooms, machinery spaces or
rooms with oil tanks shall be non-combustible. This
requirement, however, does not apply to vessels the
hull of which is constructed of combustible materials.
1.6
Where there is a danger that oil may penetrate
insulating materials, these shall be protected against
the penetration of oil or oil vapours.
2.
Installation of boilers
2.1
Boilers are to be located at a sufficient distance from fuel and lubricating oil tanks and from
cargo space bulkheads in order to prevent undue heating of the tank contents or the cargo. Alternatively, the
tank sides or bulkheads are to be insulated.
3.2
Boilers are to be provided with non-combustible insulation which is to be clad with steel sheet
or equivalent.
3.3
Insulation shall be such that it will not crack
or deteriorate when subject to vibration.
4.
5.1
Suitable means of collection are to be fitted
below potential leakage points.
Where oil leakage is liable to be frequent, e.g. with oil
burners, separators, drains and valves of service tanks,
the collectors are to be drained to an oil drain tank.
Leakage oil drains may not be part of an overflow
system.
5.2
The arrangement of piping systems and their
components intended for combustible liquids, shall be
such that leakage of these liquids cannot come into
contact with heated surfaces or other sources of ignition. Where this cannot be precluded by structural
design, suitable precautionary measures are to be
taken.
5.3
Tanks, pipelines, filters, preheaters, etc. containing combustible liquids may not be placed directly
above heat sources such as boilers, steam lines, exhaust gas manifolds and silencers or items of equipment which have to be insulated in accordance with
3.1 and may also not be placed above electrical
switchgear.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 8
5.4
Where tanks with flammable liquids are replenished automatically or remote controlled, means
are to be provided to prevent overflow spillage.
5.5
In periodically unattended machinery spaces
fuel injection high pressure lines of diesel engines are
to be shielded or installed in such a way, that, should
leakage occur, the leaking fuel can be safely collected
in a suitable drain tank with high level alarm.
6.
Bulkhead penetrations
7.1
Any opening in machinery spaces and boiler
rooms shall be capable of being effectively sealed
from outside the space.
7.2
Means are to be provided for stopping ventilating fans serving machinery spaces or boiler rooms
from outside such spaces.
7.3
Any forced - or induced - draft fans, oil fuel
unit pump, oil fuel transfer pump shall be capable of
being stopped from outside the space concerned.
7.4
Except for small independent tanks every oil
fuel suction pipe from storage, settling or service tanks
situated above the double bottom is to be fitted with a
cock or valve capable of being closed from outside the
space concerned. This regulation applies also to lubricating oil tanks.
7.5
The controls required by 7.2, 7.3 and 7.4
should be arranged in as few locations as possible, be
readily accessible, not likely to be cut-off in the event
of a fire in the space concerned and bear clear denominations.
C.
Fire Detection
1.
Periodically unattended machinery spaces are
to be equipped with an approved fire detection and
alarm system.
2.
The design and arrangement are to comply
with Section 11h and Section 12, D.
D.
Chapter 8
Page 83
Fire pumps
1.1
Fishing vessels with L 24 m shall be fitted
with at least two (2) fire pumps one of which is to be
independent from the main engine.
1.2
Fishing vessels with L < 24 m shall be fitted
with at least one fire pump which may be coupled to
the main engine provided that the propeller shaft can
be readily declutched or that a variable pitch propeller
is fitted.
1.3
The fire pumps shall be capable of supplying
a total quantity of water for fire fighting of not less
than two-thirds of the total capacity of the required
bilge pumps.
1.4
The minimum capacity of any fire pump shall
not be less than 25 m3/h for fishing vessels with L
45 m and 15 m3/h for fishing vessels with L < 45 m.
1.5
With the fire pumps supplying water for the
number of jets specified in 4.1, through nozzles specified in 4.9, a pressure of at least 0,25 N/mm2 is to be
maintained at any hydrant.
1.6
Where two pumps are required one of them
may be reduced to 40 % of the capacity specified in
1.3, but not less than the capacity specified in 1.4,
provided that the prescribed total capacity is maintained by increasing the capacity of the second pump
accordingly.
1.7
Bilge, ballast or other seawater pumps of
sufficient capacity and head may be used as fire
pumps provided that at least one pump is immediately
available for fire fighting purposes.
1.8
Where more than one pump is connected to
the fire main a screw-down non-return valve or a
combination of shut-off and check valve is to be fitted
at the outlet of each pump.
1.9
Provisions are to be made as to safeguard the
supply of water for fire fighting under all conditions of
list, trim, roll and pitch likely to be encountered by the
vessel.
1.10
For vessels with unattended machinery
spaces according to Section 12 remote start for at least
one fire pump is to be provided.
Chapter 8
Page 84
2.
Section 8
2.1
For vessels of 1000 GT and above an emergency fire pump shall be provided, if a fire in one
compartment can put all the main fire pumps out of
service. The emergency fire pump shall be capable of
delivering at least 40 % of the capacity specified in
1.3, but in any case not less than the capacity specified
in 1.4.
2.2
Emergency fire pumps shall meet the requirements specified in 1.5, 1.8 and 1.9 and including
their source of power and fuel supply be independent
from the space containing the main fire pumps and be
capable of supplying water to the fire main for at least
18 hours.
2.3
A shut-off valve shall be provided such as to
be capable of isolating the fire main within the space
where the main fire pumps are installed from the rest
of the fire main. The shut-off valve shall be arranged
in a suitable location outside of such space.
2.4
Any diesel driven power source for the pump
shall be capable of being readily started in cold condition down to a temperature of 0 C. If lower temperatures are likely to be encountered proper means are to
be provided to the satisfaction of GL so that ready
starting will be safeguarded.
3.
Fire piping
3.1
The piping system for the distribution of
water for fire fighting shall be designed for the total
capacity of the fire pumps required.
3.2
Materials readily rendered ineffective by heat
shall not be used unless adequately protected. Ordinary cast iron shall not be used.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
4.3
One hydrant is to be arranged near the entrance to any space containing internal combustion
machinery or oil fired boilers.
4.4
The hydrants are to be so located as to be
readily accessible at any time.
4.5
Fire hoses shall be of appropriate materials.
Their length should be chosen in view of easy handling considering the vessel's dimensions, however,
the length shall not exceed 20 m on deck and 15 m in
machinery spaces.
4.6
4.7
Fire hoses with nozzles attached are to be
located near the fire hydrants, the position to be
marked conspicuously.
4.8
Only appropriate quick-acting couplings shall
be used for the connection of hoses to hydrants and
nozzles.
4.9
Nozzle size shall be 12 mm in vessels with
L 24 m and 10 mm in vessels with L < 24 m.
4.10
Nozzles for use in machinery spaces and
boiler rooms shall be of dual purpose type (full
jet/spray with shut-off). However, it is recommended
to use this type of nozzle throughout the vessel.
3.3
The pipes and their accessories are to be
adequately protected against corrosion, shock and
freezing. Drain cocks are to be provided in suitable
locations in order to drain all parts of the system
which may be subjected to freezing.
E.
4.
1.
Portable fire extinguishers shall be provided
in accommodation and service spaces.
4.1
The number and position of hydrants shall be
such that any part of the vessel normally accessible
while at sea can be reached with:
4.2
Fire hydrants shall be fitted with a shut-off
such that any fire hose can be disconnected while the
system is pressurized.
2.
Portable extinguishers should be of a type
suitable for all types of fires to be expected in accommodation and service spaces.
3.
Fire extinguishers shall meet the requirements specified in G.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 8
Chapter 8
Page 85
F.
1.
5.
Spaces containing oil-fired boilers or internal combustion machinery shall be provided with:
(a)
(b)
(c)
In spaces containing only internal combustion machinery, other than for propulsion, of a total power output
of less than 110 kW, one portable extinguisher will be
accepted in lieu of the equipment specified in 1.
3.
G.
Fire Extinguishers
1.
Type of fire
Approval
Minimum charge
The charge in portable dry powder and gas extinguishers should be at least 5 kg and the content of
foam and water extinguishers should be not less than
9 liters.
4.
Toxic gases
Fire extinguishers containing an extinguishing medium which either by itself or under expected conditions gives off toxic gases in such quantities as to
endanger persons shall not be permitted.
Chapter 8
Page 86
5.
Section 8
CO2 extinguishers
CO2 extinguishers may not be located in accommodation spaces and water-filled extinguishers may not be
provided for the extinguishers required in machinery
spaces or boiler rooms.
6.
Location
The extinguishers are to be installed in readily accessible positions. If stowed in a cabinet, conspicuous
marking is to be provided.
One of the extinguishers intended for use in any space
is to be located near the entrance to that space.
7.
Instruction plates
Instruction plates shall be fitted either near the extinguishers or on the extinguishers themselves, stating
that a discharged extinguisher may not be put back
into place.
8.
Spare charges
8.1
For fire extinguishers, capable of being recharged on board, spare charges are to be provided:
8.2
For fire extinguishers which cannot be recharged on board, additional portable fire extinguishers of same type and capacity shall be provided. The
number is to be determined as per 8.1.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
H.
1.
Deep-fat cooking equipment is to be fitted with arrangements as specified in the GL Rules according to
Chapter 2 Machinery Installations, Section 12, M.3.
3.
Cargo spaces
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9a
Chapter 8
Page 9a1
Section 9a
General Rules for Machinery Installations
A.
General
1.
The Rules for Machinery Installations apply
to the propulsion installations of ships classed by
Germanischer Lloyd (GL), including all the auxiliary
machinery and equipment necessary for the operation
and safety of the fishing vessel.
They also apply to machinery which GL is to confirm
as being equivalent to classed machinery.
2.
Apart from the machinery and equipment
detailed in the following, the Rules are also individually applicable to other machinery and equipment
where this is necessary to the safety of the vessel or its
cargo.
3.
Designs which deviate from the Rules for the
Construction of Machinery Installations may be approved provided that such designs have been examined by GL for suitability and have been recognized as
equivalent.
4.
Machinery installations which have been
developed on novel principles and/or which have not
yet been sufficiently tested in shipboard service require GL's special approval.
Such machinery may be marked by the Class Notation
EXP affixed to the Character of Classification and be
subjected to intensified survey, if sufficiently reliable
proof cannot be provided of its suitability and equivalence in accordance with 3.
5.
In the instances mentioned in 3. and 4. GL is
entitled to require additional documentation to be
submitted and special trials to be carried out.
is defined in the different Sections where the requirements for the different elements of the fishing vessel
are given.
C.
Ambient Conditions
1.
1.1
The general ambient conditions for the operations of the machinery installations are defined in
Section 1, C.
1.2
Account is to be taken of the effects on the
machinery installation of distortions of the vessel's
hull.
2.
Vibrations
2.1
Machinery, equipment and hull structures are
normally subjected to vibration stresses. Design, construction and installation must in every case take account of these stresses.
The faultless long-term service of individual components shall not be endangered by vibration stresses.
2.2
Assessment, proof and measurement of vibrations shall follow the GL Rules according to Chapter 2
Machinery Installations.
D.
1.
Dimensions of components
6.
In addition to the Rules, GL reserve the right
to impose further requirements in respect of all types
of machinery where this is unavoidable due to new
findings or operational experience, or GL may permit
deviations from the Rules where these are specially
warranted.
1.1
All parts must be capable of withstanding the
stresses and loads peculiar to shipboard service, e.g.
those due to movements of the vessel, vibrations,
intensified corrosive attack, temperature changes and
wave impact, and has to be dimensioned in accordance
with the requirements set out in the following Sections.
7.
National rules or regulations outside GL's
Rules remain unaffected.
B.
The general conditions for these documents are defined in Section 1, E. The scope of the documentation
1.2
Where connections exist between systems or
plant items which are designed for different forces,
pressures and temperatures (stresses), safety devices
are to be fitted which prevent the over-stressing of the
system or plant item designed for the lower design
Chapter 8
Page 9a2
Section 9a
Materials
Welding
Tests
4.1
Machinery and its component parts are subject to constructional and material tests, pressure and
leakage tests, and trials. All the tests prescribed in the
following Sections are to be conducted under the supervision of GL.
In the case of parts produced in series, other methods
of testing may be agreed with GL instead of the tests
prescribed, provided that the former are recognized as
equivalent by GL.
4.2
GL reserve the right, where necessary, to
increase the scope of the tests and also to subject to
testing those parts which are not expressly required to
be tested according to the Rules.
4.3
Components subject to mandatory testing
must be replaced with tested parts.
4.4
After installation on board of the main and
auxiliary machinery, the operational functioning of the
machinery including the associated ancillary equipment is to be verified. All safety equipment is to be
tested, unless adequate testing has already been performed at the manufacturer's works in the presence of
GL's Representative.
In addition, the entire machinery installation is to be
tested during sea trials, as far as possible under the
intended service conditions.
5.
Corrosion protection
Parts which are exposed to corrosion are to be safeguarded by being manufactured of corrosion-resistant
materials or provided with effective corrosion protection.
6.
Availability of machinery
6.1
Vessel's machinery is to be so arranged and
equipped that it can be brought into operation from the
"dead ship" condition with the means available on
board.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
7.1
Machinery must be so equipped that it can be
controlled in accordance with operating requirements
in such a way that the service conditions prescribed by
the manufacturer can be met.
7.1.1
For the control equipment of main engine and
systems essential for operation see Section 11h.
7.2
In the event of failure or fluctuations of the
supply of electrical, pneumatic or hydraulic power to
regulating and control systems, or in case of a break in
a regulating or control circuit, steps have to be taken
to ensure that:
the appliances remain at their present operational setting or, if necessary, are changed to a
setting which will have the minimum adverse
effect on operation (fail-safe conditions)
the power output or engine speed of the machinery being controlled or governed is not increased and
7.3
Manual operation
Propulsion plant
8.1
Manoeuvring equipment
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9a
8.2
Remote controls
Turning appliances
9.1
Machinery is to be equipped with the necessary turning appliances.
9.2
The turning appliances are to be of the selflocking type. Electric motors are to be fitted with
suitable retaining brakes.
9.3
An automatic interlocking device is to be
provided to ensure that the propulsion and auxiliary
prime movers cannot start up while the turning gear is
engaged. In case of manual turning installations warning devices may be provided alternatively.
10.
12.1
All fuels and consumables used for operations of the machinery installations have to be in accordance with the requirements of the manufacturers.
Chapter 8
Page 9a3
12.2
The flash point 1 of liquid fuels for the operation of boilers and diesel engines may not be lower
than 60 C.
For emergency generating sets, however, use may be
made of fuels with a flash point of 43 C. The fuel
shall enable a starting of the emergency generating set
at ambient temperatures of 15 C and above.
12.3
In exceptional cases, for vessels intended for
operation in limited geographical areas or where special precautions subject to GL's approval are taken,
fuels with flash points between 43 C and 60 C may
also be used. This is conditional upon the requirement
that the temperatures of the spaces in which fuels are
stored or used shall invariably be 10 C below the
flash point.
13.
Refrigerating installations
E.
1.
1.1
Instruments, warning and indicating systems
and operating appliances are to be clearly displayed
and conveniently sited. Absence of dazzle, particularly
on the bridge, is to be ensured.
Operating and monitoring equipment is to be grouped
in such a way as to facilitate easy supervision and
control of all important parts of the installation.
The following requirements are to be observed when
installing systems and equipment:
adequate ventilation
In consoles and cabinets containing electrical or hydraulic equipment or lines carrying steam or water the
electrical gear is to be protected from damage due to
leakage. Redundant ventilation systems are to be provided for air-conditioned machinery and control
rooms.
1.2
Pressure gauges
Chapter 8
Page 9a4
Section 9a
shall be installed in such a way that they can be isolated. Lines leading to pressure gauges shall be installed in such a way that the readings cannot be affected by liquid heads and hydraulic hammer.
2.
2.1
Machinery- and boiler installations and apparatus have to be accessible for operation and maintenance.
2.2
In the layout of machinery spaces (design of
foundation structures, laying of pipelines and cable
conduits, etc.) and the design of machinery and equipment (mountings for filters, coolers, etc.), 2.1 is to be
complied with.
3.
Lighting
Bilge wells/bilges
5.1
Bilge wells and bilges shall be readily accessible, easy to clean and either easily visible or adequately lit.
5.2
Bilges beneath electrical machines shall be so
designed as to prevent bilge water from penetrating
into the machinery at all angles of inclination and
movements of the vessel in service.
5.3
For the following spaces bilge level monitoring is to be provided and limit values being exceeded
are to be indicated at a permanently manned alarm
point:
6.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Ventilation
Noise abatement
F.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9a
9.
Steam and feedwater lines, exhaust gas ducts,
boilers and other equipment and pipelines carrying
steam or hot water are to be effectively insulated.
Insulating materials have to be incombustible. Points
at which combustible liquids or moisture can penetrate
into the insulation are to be suitably protected, e.g. by
means of shielding.
G.
1.
Voice communication
Engineer alarm
Engine telegraph
H.
Essential Equipment
1.
Principal requirements
Chapter 8
Page 9a5
Essential (operationally important) equipment is required to ensure continuity of the following functions:
2.
It comprises e.g.:
steering gear
Reversing, command transmission and operating controls, etc. are to be grouped together at a convenient
point on the control platform.
The current status, "Ahead" or "Astern", of the reversing control is to be clearly indicated on the propulsion
plant control platform.
4.
For details of the design of electrically operated command transmission, signalling and alarm systems, see
Section 11h and Section 12.
Chapter 8
Page 9a6
Section 9a
I - Part 1
GL 2007
It comprises e.g.:
windlasses
3.
4.
Non-essential equipment
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9b
Chapter 8
Page 9b1
Section 9b
Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors
A.
General
1.
Scope
The Rules contained in this Section are valid for internal combustion engines as main and auxiliary drives
as well as air compressors. Internal combustion engines in the sense of these Rules are non-reversible,
four-stroke diesel engines with trunk piston.
For the purpose of these requirements, internal combustion engines are diesel engines.
For other types of internal combustion engines the GL
Rules according to Chapter 2 Machinery Installations, Section 2 are to be applied.
2.
Ambient conditions
Rated power
3.1
Diesel engines are to be designed such that
their rated power when running at rated speed according to the definitions of the engine manufacturer at
ambient conditions as defined in Section 1, C. can be
delivered as continuous power. Diesel engines are to
be capable of continuous operation within power
range 1 in Fig. 9b.1 and of short period operation in
power range 2. The extent of the power ranges is to be
stated by the engine manufacturer.
3.6
Subject to the approval of GL, diesel engines
for special applications may be designed for a continuous power (fuel stop power) which cannot be
exceeded.
3.7
For main engines, a power diagram (Fig.
9b.1) is to be prepared showing the power ranges
within which the engine is able to operate continuously and for short periods under service conditions.
4.
Fuels
4.1
The use of liquid fuels is subject to the Rules
contained in Section 9a, D.12.
4.2
5.
Accessibility of engines
Overload power
Nominal
propeller curve
3.2
Continuous power is to be understood as the
standard service power which an engine is capable of
delivering continuously, provided that the maintenance prescribed by the engine manufacturer is carried
out, between the maintenance intervals stated by the
engine manufacturer.
Power [%]
3.3
The rated power is to be specified in a way
that an overload power corresponding to 110 % of the
rated power can be demonstrated at corresponding
speed for an uninterrupted period of 1 hour. Deviations from the overload power value require the
agreement of GL.
Rated
(continuous)
power
Intermittent
operation
1
Continuous
operation
3.4
After running on the test bed, the fuel delivery system of main engines is normally to be so adjusted that overload power cannot be given in service.
The limitation of the fuel delivery system has to be
secured permanently.
3.5
Subject to the prescribed conditions, diesel
engines driving electric generators are to be capable of
overload operation even after installation on board.
Chapter 8
Page 9b2
6.
Section 9b
6.1
For electronic components and systems
which are necessary for the control of internal combustion engines the following items have to be observed:
6.2
Electronic components and systems have to
be type approved according to the GL Rules VI
Additional Rules and Guidelines, Part 7 Guidelines
for the Performance of Type Approvals, Chapter 2
Test Requirements for Electrical / Electronic Equipment and Systems.
6.3
For computer systems the Rules according to
Section 11h, A.2. have to be observed.
6.4
For main propulsion engines one failure of an
electronic control system shall not result in any sudden loss or change of the propulsion power. In individual cases, GL may approve other failure conditions,
whereby it is ensured that no increase in vessel's speed
occurs.
6.5
The non-critical behaviour in case of a failure
of an electronic control system has to be proven by a
structured analysis (e.g. FMEA), which has to be provided by the system's manufacturer. This shall include
the effects on persons, environment and technical
condition.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
ever applicable, be submitted by the engine manufacturer to GL for approval (A) or information (R).
Where considered necessary, GL may request further
documents to be submitted. This also applies to the
documentation of design changes according to 4.
2.
all drawings of modified components, if available, as per Table 9b.1 together with the licensor's declaration of consent to the modifications
3.
The type specification of an internal combustion engine is defined by the following data:
cylinder bore
6.6
Where the electronic control system incorporates a speed control, F.1.3, Section 11h, C. and Section 12 have to be observed.
stroke
method of injection
7.
7.1
For the local control station, I. has to be observed.
7.2
The indicators named in I. shall be realised in
such a way that one failure can only affect a single
indicator. Where these indicators are an integral part
of an electronic control system, means shall be taken
to maintain these indications in case of failure of such
a system.
7.3
Where these indicators are realised electrically, the power supply of the instruments and of the
electronic system has to be realised in such way to
ensure the behaviour stated in 7.2.
B.
1.
General
The general conditions for these documents are defined in Section 1, E. For each engine type the drawings and documents listed in Table 9b.1 shall, wher-
4.
Design modifications
The approval of exhaust gas turbochargers, heat exchangers, engine-driven pumps, etc. the corresponding
applications are to be submitted to GL by the respective manufacturer.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9b
Table 9b.1
Serial
no.
A/R
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
A
A
R
R
R
R
R
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
R
A
A
A
A
A
A
R
A
A
R
30
31
32
A
A
Description
Details required on GL Forms F 144 and F 144/1 when applying for
approval of an internal combustion engine
Engine transverse cross-section
Engine longitudinal section
Cast bedplate and crankcase
Thrust bearing assembly
Cast thrust bearing bedplate
Tie rod
Cylinder cover/head, assembly
Cylinder liner
Crankshaft, details for each number of cylinders, with data sheets for
calculation of crankshafts
Crankshaft, assembly for each number of cylinders
Shaft coupling bolts
Counterweights(if not integral with crankshaft), including fastening
Connecting rod, details
Connecting rod, assembly
Piston assembly
Camshaft drive, assembly
Material specification of main parts with information on non-destructive
tests and pressure tests
Arrangement of foundation (for main engines only)
Schematic layout or other equivalent documents of starting air system
Schematic layout or other equivalent documents of fuel oil system
Schematic layout or other documents of lubricating oil system
Schematic layout or other documents of cooling water system
Schematic diagram of engine control and safety system
Schematic diagram of electronic components and systems
Shielding and insulation of exhaust pipes, assembly
Shielding of high pressure fuel pipes, assembly
Arrangement of crankcase explosion relief valves
Operation and service manuals
Schematic layout or other equivalent documents of hydraulic system (for
valve lift) on the engine
Type test program and type test report
High pressure parts for fuel oil injection system
Chapter 8
Page 9b3
Quantity Remarks
3
3
3
1
3
1
1
1
1
3
3
3
3
3
3
1
1
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
1
1
3
3
1
6
4
4
4
4
4
2
3
5
3
1
3
A
R
1
2
for approval
for reference
if integral with engine and not integrated in the bedplate
all engines
3
4
only for engines with a bore > 200 mm or a crankcase volume 0,6 m3
and the system so far as supplied by the engine manufacturer. If engines incorporate electronic control systems a failure mode and effects
analysis (FMEA) is to be submitted to demonstrate that failure of an electronic control system will not result in the loss of essential
services for the operation of the engine and that operation of the engine will not be lost or degraded beyond an acceptable performance
criteria of the engine
operation and service manuals are to contain maintenance requirements (servicing and repair) including details of any special tools and
gauges that are to be used with their fittings/settings together with any test requirements on completion of maintenance
for comparison with GL requirements for material, NDT and pressure testing as applicable
the documentation has to contain specification of pressures, pipe dimensions and materials
5
6
7
Chapter 8
Page 9b4
Section 9b
C.
Crankshaft Calculation
1.
Design methods
1.1
Crankshafts are to be designed to withstand
the stresses occurring when the engine runs at rated
power and the documentation has to be submitted for
approval. Calculations are to be based on the GL
Rules VI Additional Rules and Guidelines, Part 4
Diesel Engines, Chapter 2 Guidelines for the Calculation of Crankshafts for I.C. Engines. Other methods
of calculation may be used provided that they do not
result in crankshaft dimensions smaller than those
obtained by applying the aforementioned regulations.
1.2
Outside the end bearings, crankshafts designed according to the requirements specified in 1.1
may be adapted to the diameter of the adjoining shaft
d by a generous fillet (r 0,06 d) or a taper.
1.3
Design methods for application to crankshafts
of special construction and to the crankshafts of engines of special type are to be agreed with GL.
2.
Screw joints
2.1
1.2
Materials with properties deviating from
those specified may be used only with GL's special
approval. GL requires proof of the suitability of such
materials.
2.
D.
Materials
1.
Approved materials
1.1
The mechanical characteristics of materials
used for the components of diesel engines have to
conform to GL Rules II Materials and Welding, Part
1 Metallic Materials, Chapter 2 Steel and Iron
Materials. The materials approved for the various
components are shown in Table 9b.3 together with
their minimum required characteristics and material
Certificates.
Testing of materials
2.1
In the case of individually produced engines,
the following parts are to be subjected to material tests
in the presence of the GL representative.
1.
Crankshaft
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Tie rods
9.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
main bearings
connecting rod bearings
10.
2.1.1
Materials tests are to be performed in accordance with Table 9b.2.
Table 9b.2
Material tests
Cylinder bore
Parts to be tested
(numbered according to the
list under D.2.1)
300 mm
158
156789
> 400 mm
all parts
2.1.2
In addition, material tests are to be carried out
on pipes and parts of the starting air system and other
pressure systems forming part of the engine, see Section 9d.
2.1.3
Material for charge air coolers are to be supplied with manufacturer test reports.
2.2
In the case of individually manufactured
engines, non-destructive material tests are to be performed on the parts listed below in accordance with
Tables 9b.4 and 9b.5.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9b
Table 9b.3
Approved materials
GL Rules *
Components
Crankshafts
Forged steel:
Rm 360 N/mm2
Connection rods
Section 3, C.
Cast steel
Section 3, C.
Section 4, C.
Tie rods
Bolts and studs
Bearing transverse girders
(weldable)
Pistons and piston crowns
Section 5, C.
3
1
3
Cylinder covers/heads
Flywheels
Valve bodies
Engine blocks
Bedplates
Cylinder blocks
Cylinder liners
Cylinder covers/heads
Flywheels
Section 5, B.
Test Certificate **
4
2
4
1
1
1
4
1
1
1
Cylinder covers/heads
Chapter 8
Page 9b5
Engine blocks
Bedplates
Cylinder blocks
*
**
all details refer to GL Rules II Materials and Welding, Part 1 Metallic Materials, Chapter 2 Steel and Iron Materials
Test Certificates are to be issued in accordance with GL Rules II Materials and Welding, Part 1 Metallic Materials, Chapter 1
Principles and Test Procedures Section 1, H. with the following abbreviations:
A: GL Material Certificate, B: Manufacturer Inspection Certificate, C: Manufacturer Test Report
1.
Steel castings for bedplates, e.g. bearing transverse girders, including their welded joints
2.
3.
4.
Connecting rods
5.
8.
6.
Tie rods (at each thread over a distance corresponding to twice the threaded length)
9.
7.
Chapter 8
Page 9b6
Section 9b
2.2.1
Magnetic particle or dye penetrant tests are to
be performed in accordance with Table 9b.4 at those
points, to be agreed between the GL Surveyor and the
manufacturer, where experience shows that defects are
liable to occur.
2.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Pressure tests
2.2.2
Ultrasonic tests are to be carried out by the
manufacturer in accordance with Table 9b.5, and the
corresponding signed manufacturer's Certificates are
to be submitted.
3.
3.1
General
2.2.3
Welded seams of important engine components may be required to be subjected to approved
methods of testing.
2.2.4
Where there is reason to doubt the soundness
of any engine component, non-destructive testing by
approved methods may be required in addition to the
tests mentioned above.
3.1.1
Table 9b.4
Cylinder bore
400 mm
1234
> 400 mm
all parts
Table 9b.5
GL has issued the necessary approval of drawings on the basis of the documents to be submitted in accordance with B.
Ultrasonic tests
Cylinder bore
Parts to be tested
(numbered according to the
list under D.2.2)
400 mm
123458
> 400 mm
1234589
2.3
Crankshafts welded together from forged or
cast parts are subject to GL special approval. Both the
manufacturers and the welding process shall have
been accepted. The materials and the welds are to be
tested.
3.1.2
1.
E.
Manufacturing inspections
1.1
The manufacture of all engines with GL
Classification is subject to supervision by GL.
3.2
1.2
Where engine manufacturers have been approved by GL as "Suppliers of Mass Produced Engines", these engines are to be tested in accordance
with GL Guidelines VI Additional Rules and Guidelines, Part 4 Diesel Engines, Chapter 1 Guidelines
for Mass Produced Engines, Section 1, C.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9b
Table 9b.6
Pressure tests
Component
Cylinder cover, cooling water space 3
Hydraulic system
Chapter 8
Page 9b7
Valves
Pipes
1,5 pe,zul
Engine-driven pumps
(oil, water, fuel and bilge pumps)
In general, items are to be tested by hydraulic pressure as indicated in the Table. Where design or testing features may require
modification of these test requirements, special consideration will be given.
pe, zul [bar] = maximum allowable working pressure in the part concerned.
For forged steel cylinder covers test methods other than pressure testing may be accepted, e.g. suitable non-destructive examination and
dimensional control exactly recorded.
For centrifugally cast cylinder liners, the pressure test can be replaced by a crack test.
3.2.1
Normal case
Note
The engine manufacturer has to state whether the
achievable output is continuous. If there is a time
limit, the permissible operating time is to be indicated.
3.3
During the type test all the tests listed under 3.3.1 to
3.3.3 are to be carried out in the presence of the GL
representative. The results achieved are to be recorded
and signed by GL representative. Deviations from this
program, if any, require the agreement of GL.
3.3.1
Load points
The operating time per load point depends on the engine size and on the time for collection of the operating
Chapter 8
Page 9b8
Section 9b
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Overload power
110 105,8
3
110
100
3a
Rated power
(continuous power)
100
90
90
80
cur
v
70
70
pro
pel
ler
60
50
No
mi
nal
60
50
Torque [%]
80
Power [%]
1
10
40
40
30
30
8
Speed [%]
1
Fig. 9b.2
103,2
100
11
Power/speed diagram
If an engine can continue to operate without its operational safety being affected in the event of a failure of
its independent cylinder lubrication, proof of this shall
be included in the type test.
3.3.1.1 Rated power (continuous power)
The rated power is defined as 100 % output at 100 %
torque and 100 % speed (rated speed) corresponding
to load point 1.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9b
Chapter 8
Page 9b9
Note
The operation point 100 % output at maximum allowable speed corresponding to load point 2 has to be
performed.
3.5
The results of the type approval test are to be compiled in a report which is to be submitted to GL.
3.6
3.7
Emergency operation
3.3.3
Functional tests
starting tests
governor test
test of the safety system particularly for overspeed and failure of the lubricating oil pressure
test of electronic components and systems according to the test program approved by GL
3.4
3.7.1
For engines with cylinder bores 300 mm
which are to be manufactured in series the type test
shall be carried out in accordance with GL Rules VI
Additional Rules and Guidelines, Part 4 Diesel Engines, Chapter 1 Guidelines for Mass Produced Engines.
3.7.2
For the performance of the type test, the engine is to be fitted with all the prescribed items of
equipment. If the engine, when on the test bed, cannot
be fully equipped in accordance with the requirements, the equipment may be demonstrated on another
engine of the same series.
3.8
Works trials
4.1
General
Chapter 8
Page 9b10
4.2.1
Section 9b
b)
Note
After the test bed trials the output shall normally be
limited to the rated power (100 % power) so that the
engine cannot be overloaded in service (see A.3.4).
I - Part 1
GL 2007
4.3
Depending on the type of plant concerned,
GL reserve the right to call for a special test schedule.
4.4
In the case of engines driving electrical generators the rated electrical power as specified by the
manufacurer is to be verified as minimum power.
4.5
Component inspection
c)
5.1.1
d)
e)
a)
f)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
4.2.2
The test is to be performed at rated speed with a constant governor setting under conditions of:
a)
b)
Note
After the test bed trials the output of engines driving
generators is to be so adjusted that overload (110 %)
power can be supplied in service after installation on
board in such a way that the governing characteristics
and the requirements of the generator protection devices can be fulfilled at all times (see A.3.5).
5.1.2
c)
d)
e)
5.1.3
f)
4.2.3
a)
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9b
b)
110 % power:
for 30 minutes
c)
d)
e)
Note
Tests are to be based on the rated powers of the driven
generators.
5.1.4
Chapter 8
Page 9b11
can be declutched in service or which drives a variable-pitch propeller must be fitted with an independent
overspeed protection device so adjusted that the engine speed cannot exceed the rated speed by more than
20 %.
Equivalent equipment may be approved by GL.
1.2
1.2.1
Each diesel engine used to drive an electric
main or emergency generator has to be fitted with a
governor which will prevent transient frequency variations in the electrical network in excess of 10 % of
the rated frequency with a recovery time to steady
state conditions not exceeding 5 seconds when the
maximum electrical step load is switched on or off.
In the case when a step load equivalent to the rated
output of the generator is switched off, a transient
speed variation in excess of 10 % of the rated speed
may be acceptable, provided this does not cause the
intervention of the overspeed device as required by
1.1.1.
5.2
The suitability of main and auxiliary engines
to burn special fuels is to be demonstrated if the machinery installation is designed to burn such fuels.
1.2.2
In addition to the normal governor, each
diesel engine with a rated power of 220 kW or over
shall be equipped with an overspeed protection device
independent of the normal governor which prevents
the engine speed from exceeding the rated speed by
more than 15 %.
5.3
The scope of the shipboard trials may be
extended in consideration of special operating conditions such as low-load operation, towing, trawling, etc.
1.2.3
The diesel engine shall be suitable and designed for the special requirements of the vessel's
electrical system.
5.4
Where two stage load application is required, the following procedure is to be applied: Sudden loading
from no-load to 50 %, followed by the remaining 50
% of the rated generator power, duly observing the
requirements of 1.2.1 and 1.2.4.
Earthing
F.
Safety Devices
1.
1.1
1.1.1
Each diesel engine not used to drive an electric generator has to be equipped with a speed governor or regulator so adjusted that the engine speed
cannot exceed the rated speed by more than 15 %.
1.1.2
In addition to the normal governor, each main
engine with a rated power of 220 kW or over which
load application in more than two steps is considered in the design of the vessel's electrical
system and is approved when the drawings are
reviewed
Section 9b
Chapter 8
Page 9b12
I - Part 1
GL 2007
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
Mean eff. working pressure pe,e [bar]
at rated power of diesel engine
24
Fig. 9b.3 Limiting curves for loading 4-stroke diesel engines step by step from no load to rated
power as function of the brake mean effective pressure
1.2.4
Speed shall be stabilized and in steady-state
condition within five seconds, inside the permissible
range for the permanent speed variation T.
The steady-state condition is considered to have been
reached when the residual speed variation does not
exceed 1 % of the speed associated with the set
power.
1.2.5
The characteristic curves of the governors of
diesel engines of generator sets operating in parallel
must not exhibit deviations larger than those specified
in Sections 11a 11 l.
b)
1.2.6
Generator sets which are installed to serve
stand-by circuits are to satisfy the corresponding requirements when the engine is cold. The start-up and
loading sequence is to be concluded in about 30 seconds.
1.3
1.2.7
Emergency generator sets have to satisfy the
above governor conditions also unlimited with the
start-up and loading sequence having to be concluded
in about 45 seconds.
1.2.8
The governors of the engines mentioned in
1.2.1 have to enable the rated speed to be adjusted
over the entire power range with a maximum deviation of 5 %.
1.2.9
The rate of speed variation of the adjusting
mechanisms has to permit satisfactory synchronization
in a sufficiently short time. The speed characteristic
should be as linear as possible over the whole power
1.3.1
The governor and the associated actuator
shall, for controlling the respective engine, be suitable
for the operating conditions laid down in the Construction Rules and for the requirements specified by
the engine manufacturer. For single propulsion drives
it has to be ensured that in case of a failure of the
governor or actuator the control of the engine can be
taken over by another control device.
The regulating conditions required for each individual
application as described in 1.1 and 1.2 are to be satisfied by the governor system.
Electronic governors and the associated actuators are
subject to type testing.
For the power supply, see Sections 11a 11 l.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
1.3.2
Section 9b
Chapter 8
Page 9b13
3.2.2
Where provision has been made for the
forced extracting the lubricating oil vapours, e.g. for
monitoring the oil vapour concentration, the negative
pressure in the crankcase may not exceed 2,5 mbar.
a)
3.2.3
The vent pipes of two or more engines shall
not be combined. Exemptions may be approved if an
interaction of the combined systems is inhibited by
suitable means.
b)
there is a redundant governor assembly for manual change-over with a separately protected
power supply or
4.
the engine has a manually operated fuel admission control system suitable for manoeuvring
4.1
Crankcase safety devices have to be type
approved.
4.2
Safety valves to safeguard against overpressure in the crankcase are to be fitted to all engines
with a cylinder bore of > 200 mm and/or a crankcase
volume of 0,6 m3.
c)
1.3.3
2.1
All the cylinders of engines with a cylinder
bore of > 230 mm are to be fitted with cylinder overpressure warning devices. The response threshold of
these warning devices shall be set at not more than 40
% above the combustion pressure at the rated power.
2.2
A warning device may be dispensed with if it
is ensured by an appropriate engine design or by control functions that the cylinder pressure cannot increase in an unacceptable range.
3.
3.1
Crankcase airing
4.3
Engines with a cylinder bore of > 200 mm
and 250 mm shall be equipped with at least one
safety valve at each end of the crankcase. If the crankshaft has more than 8 throws, an additional safety
valve is to be fitted near the middle of the crankcase.
Engines with a cylinder bore of > 250 mm and 300
mm shall have at least one safety valve close to every
second crank throw, subject to a minimum number of
two.
Engines with a cylinder bore of > 300 mm shall have
at least one safety valve close to each crank throw.
4.4
Each safety valve shall have a free relief area
of at least 45 cm2.
The total relief area of all safety valves fitted to an
engine to safeguard against overpressure in the crankcase may not be less than 115 cm2/m3 of crankcase
volume.
Notes relating to 4.2 and 4.4
a)
b)
c)
Crankcase venting
3.2.1
Where crankcase venting systems are provided their clear opening is to be dimensioned as small
as possible.
Chapter 8
Page 9b14
Section 9b
I - Part 1
GL 2007
4.5
The safety devices are to be of quick acting
and self closing type. In service they shall be oiltight
when closed and have to prevent air from flowing into
the crankcase. The gas flow caused by the response of
the safety device shall be deflected, e. g. by means of
a baffle plate, in such a way as not to endanger persons standing nearby.
down the engine in the event of failure of the lubricating oil supply. This is not valid for engines serving
solely for the drive of emergency generator sets and
emergency fire pumps. For these engines an alarm has
to be provided.
4.6
Crankcase doors and their fittings are to be so
dimensioned as not to suffer permanent deformation
due to the overpressure occurring during the response
of the safety equipment.
G.
Auxiliary Systems
1.
General
4.7
Crankcase doors and hinged inspection ports
are to be equipped with appropriate latches to effectively prevent unintended closing.
4.8
A warning sign specifying that the crankcase
doors and/or sight holes may not be opened immediately after stopping the engine, but only after a sufficient cooling period has elapsed, is to be mounted on
the local engine control platform or, if appropriate, on
both sides of the engine.
4.9
Engines with a cylinder diameter > 300 mm
or a rated power of 2250 kW and above are to be fitted
with crankcase oil mist detections systems.
7.
2.1
General
2.1.1
Only pipe connections with metal sealing
surfaces or equivalent pipe connections of approved
design may be used for fuel injection lines.
4.10
The oil mist monitoring and alarm information is to be capable of being read from a safe location
away from the engine.
2.1.2
Feed and return lines are to be designed in
such a way that no unacceptable pressure surges occur
in the fuel supply system. Where necessary, the engines are to be fitted with surge dampers approved by
GL.
4.11
For multiple engine installations each engine
is to be provided with a separate oil mist detection
system and a dedicated alarm.
2.1.3
All components of the fuel system are to be
designed to withstand the maximum peak pressures
which will be expected in the system.
4.12
A copy of the documention supplied with the
oil mist detection system such as maintainance and
test manuals are to be provided on board vessel.
2.1.4
If fuel oil reservoirs or dampers with a limited life cycle are fitted in the fuel oil system the life
cycle together with overhaul instructions is to be
specified by the engine manufacturer in the corresponding manuals.
5.
2.1.5
Oil fuel lines are not to be located immediately above or near units of high temperature, steam
pipelines, exhaust manifolds, silencers or other equipment required to be insulated by 7.1. As far as practicable, oil fuel lines are to be arranged far apart from
hot surfaces, electrical installations or other potential
sources of ignition and are to be screened or otherwise
suitably protected to avoid oil spray or oil leakage
onto the sources of ignition. The number of joints in
such piping systems is to be kept to a minimum.
2.2
Shielding
2.2.1
Regardless of the intended use and location
of internal combustion engines, all external fuel injection lines (high pressure lines between injection
pumps and injection valves) are to be shielded by
jacket pipes in such a way that any leaking fuel is:
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9b
safely collected
2.2.2
If pressure variations of > 20 bar occur in fuel
feed and return lines, these lines are also to be
shielded.
2.2.3
The high pressure fuel pipe and the outer
jacket pipe have to be of permanent assembly.
2.2.4
Where pipe sheaths in the form of hoses are
provided as shielding, the hoses have to be demonstrably suitable for this purpose and approved by GL.
2.3
3.1
Fuel and lubricating oil filters which are to be
mounted directly on the engine are not to be located
above rotating parts or in the immediate proximity of
hot components.
3.2
Where the arrangement stated in 3.1 is not
feasible, the rotating parts and the hot components are
to be sufficiently shielded.
3.3
Filters have to be so arranged that fluid residues can be collected by adequate means. The same
applies to lubricating oil filters if oil can escape when
the filter is opened.
3.4
Change-over filters with two or more chambers are to be equipped with means enabling a safe
pressure release before opening and a proper venting
before re-starting of any chamber. Normally, shut-off
devices are to be used. It shall be clearly visible,
which chamber is in and which is out of operation.
Chapter 8
Page 9b15
3.5
Oil filters fitted parallel for the purpose of
enabling cleaning without disturbing oil supply to
engines (e.g. duplex filters) are to be provided with
arrangements that will minimize the possibility of a
filter under pressure being opened by mistake. Filters/
filter chambers shall be provided with suitable means
for:
4.1
General requirements relating to lubricating
oil systems and to the cleaning, cooling, etc. of the
lubricating oil are contained in Section 9d, F. For
piping arrangement 2.1.3 is to be applied.
4.1.1
Engines which sumps serve as oil reservoirs
shall be so equipped that the oil level can be established and, if necessary, topped up during operation.
Means are to be provided for completely draining the
oil sump.
4.1.2
The combination of the oil drainage lines
from the crankcases of two or more engines is not
allowed.
4.1.3
Drain lines from the engine sump to the drain
tank are to be submerged at their outlet ends.
4.2
The equipment of engines fitted with lubricating oil pumps is subject to Section 9d, F.
4.2.1
Main lubricating oil pumps driven by the
engine are to be designed to maintain the supply of
lubricating oil over the entire operating range.
4.2.2
Main engines which drive main lubricating
oil pumps are to be equipped with independently
driven stand-by pumps.
4.2.3
In multi-engine installations having separate
lubricating oil systems approval may be given for the
carriage on board of reserve pumps ready for mounting provided that the arrangement of the main lubricating oil pumps enables the change to be made with
the means available on board.
4.2.4
Lubricating oil systems for cylinder lubrication which are necessary for the operation of the engine and which are equipped with electronic dosing
units have to be approved by GL.
5.
Cooling system
5.1
For the equipment of engines with cooling
water pumps and for the design of cooling water systems, see Section 9d.
Chapter 8
Page 9b16
Section 9b
5.1.1
Main cooling water pumps driven by the
engine are to be designed to maintain the supply of
cooling water over the entire operating range.
5.1.2
Main engines which drive main cooling water
pumps are to be equipped with independently driven
stand-by pumps or with means for connecting the
cooling water system to independently driven stand-by
pumps.
5.1.3
In multi-engine installations having separate
fresh cooling water systems approval may be given for
the carriage on board of reserve pumps ready for
mounting provided that the arrangement of the main
fresh cooling water pumps enables the change to be
made with the means available on board. Shutoff
valves shall be provided enabling the main pumps to
be isolated from the fresh cooling water system.
6.2
I - Part 1
GL 2007
6.2.1
The construction and testing of charge air
coolers are subject to Section 9e, B.
6.2.2
Means are to be provided for regulating the
temperature of the charge air within the temperature
range specified by the engine manufacturer.
6.2.3
The charge air lines of engines with charge
air coolers are to be provided with sufficient means of
drainage.
7.
7.1
Exhaust gas lines are to be insulated and/or
cooled in such a way that the surface temperature
cannot exceed 220 C at any point.
Insulating material must be non-combustible.
5.2
If cooling air is drawn from the engine room,
the design of the cooling system is to be based on a
room temperature of at least 45 C.
7.2
General rules relating to exhaust gas lines are
defined in Section 9d.
H.
Starting Equipment
1.
General
5.3
Where engines are installed in spaces in
which oil-firing equipment is operated, Section 9e is
also to be complied with.
6.
2.
6.1
2.1
Starting air systems for main engines are to
be equipped with at least two starting air compressors.
At least one of the air compressors shall be driven
independently of the main engine and has to supply at
least 50 % of the total capacity required.
6.1.1
The construction and testing of exhaust gas
turbochargers are subject to the GL Rules according to
Chapter 2 Machinery Installations, Section 3b.
6.1.2
Exhaust gas turbochargers may exhibit no
critical speed ranges over the entire operating range of
the engine.
6.1.3
The lubricating oil supply shall also be ensured during start-up and run-down of the exhaust gas
turbochargers.
6.1.4
Even at low engine speeds, main engines are
to be supplied with charge air in a manner to ensure
reliable operating.
6.1.5
If, in the lower speed range or when used for
manoeuvring, an engine can be operated only with a
charge air blower driven independently of the engine,
a stand-by charge air blower is to be installed or an
equivalent device of approved design.
6.1.6
With main engines emergency operation has
to be possible in the event of a turbocharger failure.
2.2
The total capacity of the starting air compressors is to be such that the starting air receivers designed in accordance with 2.4 or 2.5, as applicable,
can be charged from atmospheric pressure to their
final pressure within one hour.
Normally, compressors of equal capacity are to be
installed.
This does not apply to an emergency air compressor
which may be provided to meet the requirement stated
in 1.
2.3
If the main engine is started with compressed
air, the available starting air is to be divided between
at least two starting air receivers of approximately
equal size which can be used independently of each
other.
2.4
The total capacity of air receivers is to be
sufficient to provide, without their being replenished,
not less than six starts.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9b
Chapter 8
Page 9b17
2.5
With multi-engine installations the number of
start-up operations per engine may, with GL's agreement, be reduced according to the concept of the propulsion plant.
3.5
For ventilation requirements see also Section
11b, C.3.
2.6
If starting air systems for auxiliaries or for
supplying pneumatically operated regulating and manoeuvring equipment or tyfon units are to be fed from
the main starting air receivers, due attention is to be
paid to the air consumption of this equipment when calculating the capacity of the main starting air receivers.
4.1
Emergency generating sets are to be so designed that they can be started up readily even at a
temperature of 0 C.
2.7
Other consumers with a high air consumption
apart from those mentioned in 2.6 may not be connected to the main starting air system. Separate air
supplies are to be provided for these units. Deviations
to this require the agreement of GL.
2.8
If auxiliary engines are started by compressed
air sufficient air capacity for three consecutive starts
of each auxiliary engine is to be provided.
2.9
If starting air systems of different engines are
fed by one receiver it is to be ensured that the receiver
air pressure cannot fall below the highest of the different systems minimum starting air pressure.
2.10
For the approximate calculation of the starting air capacity, use may be made of the formula
given in the Rules defined in L.
3.
4.
3.1
Where main engines are started electrically,
two mutually independent starter batteries are to be
installed. The batteries are to be so arranged that they
cannot be connected in parallel with each other. Each
battery shall enable the main engine to be started from
cold.
4.3
In order to guarantee the availability of the
starting equipment, steps are to be taken to ensure that
a)
The total capacity of the starter batteries shall be sufficient for the execution within 30 minutes, without
recharging the batteries, of the same number of startup operations as is prescribed in 2.4 or 2.5 for starting
with compressed air.
b)
c)
the starting, charging and energy storage equipment is located in the emergency generator
room.
3.2
If two or more auxiliary engines are started
electrically, at least two mutually independent batteries are to be provided. Where starter batteries for the
main engine are fitted, the use of these batteries is
acceptable.
The capacity of the batteries has to be sufficient for at
least three start-up operations per engine.
If only one of the auxiliary engines is started electrically, one battery is sufficient.
3.3
The starter batteries may only be used for
starting (and preheating where applicable) and for
monitoring equipment belonging to the engine.
3.4
Steps are to be taken to ensure that the batteries are kept charged and the charge level is monitored.
4.4
Where automatic starting is not specified,
reliable manual starting systems may be used, e.g. by
means of hand cranks, spring-loaded starters, handoperated hydraulic starters or starters using ignition
cartridges.
4.5
Where direct manual starting is not possible,
starting systems in accordance with 4.2 and 4.3 are to
be provided, in which case the starting operation may
be initiated manually.
4.6
The starters of emergency generator sets may
be used only for the purpose of starting the emergency
generator sets.
Chapter 8
Page 9b18
5.
Section 9b
5.1
Diesel engines driving emergency fire pumps
are to be so designed that they can still be reliably
started by hand at a temperature of 0 C.
If the engine can be started only at higher temperatures, or where there is a possibility that lower temperatures may occur, heating equipment is to be fitted
to ensure reliable starting.
5.2
If manual start-up using a hand crank is not
possible, the emergency fire-extinguisher set is to be
fitted with a starting device approved by GL which
enables at least 6 starts to be performed within 30
minutes, two of these being carried out within the first
10 minutes.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
2.
Main engines
2.1
I.
Control Equipment
1.
General
Table 9b.7
2.2
If the fishery vessel has a control station for the propulsion system with remote operation or control, the
indicators listed in Table 9b.7 are to be installed in the
machinery control room, see also Section 12.
Description
Speed / direction
Engine overspeed 4
Lubricating oil pressure at engine inlet
Lubricating oil temperature at engine inlet
Fuel oil pressure at engine inlet
Fuel oil leakage from high pressure pipes
Cylinder cooling water pressure or flow at engine inlet
Cylinder cooling water temperature at engine outlet
Charge air pressure at cylinder inlet
Charge air temperature at charge air cooler inlet
Charge air temperature at charge air cooler outlet
Starting air pressure
Control air pressure
Exhaust gas temperature 1
Oil mist concentration in crankcase or alternative monitoring
system 6, 7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Propulsion
engines
I
A, S
Auxiliary
engines
Emergency
engines
A, S
A, S
I, L, S
I, H
I
A
I, L
I, H
I
I
I, H
I, L
I, L
I, H 2
I, L, S
I 4, H 4
I
A
I 3, L 3
I, H
I, L
I H4
I, H 5
I, H 5
I, H 5
I:
A:
H:
L:
S:
Indicator
Alarm
Alarm for upper limit
Alarm for lower limit
Shutdown
4,
A
I L3
I, H
3,
I - Part 1
GL 2007
2.3
Section 9b
Bridge/navigation centre
2.3.1
The essential operating parameters for the
propulsion system are to be provided in the control
station area.
2.3.2
The following stand-alone control equipment
is to be installed showing:
2.3.3
In the case of engine installations up to a total
output of 600 kW, simplifications can be agreed with
GL.
2.4
Auxiliary engines
For auxiliary engines and emergency application engines as a minimum requirement the controls given in
Table 9b.7, third and forth column are to be provided.
J.
Alarms
1.
General
1.1
The following requirements apply to machinery installations which have been designed for conventional operation without any degree of automation.
1.2
Within the context of these requirements, the
word alarm is to be understood as the visual and audible warning of abnormal operating parameters.
2.
Scope of alarms
K.
Chapter 8
Page 9b19
Engine Alignment/Seating
1.
Engines are to be mounted and secured to
their foundations in conformity with the GL Guidelines VI Additional Rules and Guidelines, Part 4
Diesel Engines, Chapter 3 Guidelines for the Seating
of Propulsion Plants and Auxiliary Machinery.
2.
The crankshaft alignment is to be checked
every time an engine has been aligned on its foundation by measurement of the crank web deflection
and/or other suitable means.
For the purpose of subsequent alignments note is to be
taken of:
3.
Where the engine manufacturer has not specified values for the permissible crank web deflection,
assessment is to be based on GL's reference values
according to Chapter 2 Machinery Installations, Section 2, K.4.
L.
M.
Air Compressors
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9c
Propulsion System
Chapter 8
Page 9c1
Section 9c
Propulsion System
A.
Main Shafting
1.
General
1.1
Scope
Materials
2.1
Approved materials
2.2
Testing of materials
Shaft dimensions
3.1
General
All parts of the shafting are to be dimensioned in accordance with the following formulae and in compliance with the requirements relating to torsional vibrations set out in F. The dimensions of the shafting shall
be based on the total rated installed power. Where the
geometry of a part is such that it cannot be dimensioned in accordance with these formulae, special
evidence of the mechanical strength of the part or
parts concerned is to be furnished to GL.
3.2
3.2.1
For fishing vessels with L < 24 m and fishing
along the coast line at a distance not exceeding 20
nautical miles from main land or off-shore islands the
minimum shaft diameter is to be determined by the
following formula:
da d k C 3
PW
n
[mm]
(1a)
da
PW
Chapter 8
Page 9c2
Section 9c
Propulsion System
I - Part 1
GL 2007
3.2.2
For all other fishing vessels the minimum
shaft diameter is to be determined by applying formula (1b):
PW
da d F k
3
di
d 4
n 1 i
da
CW
(1)
CW
= material factor []
= 560 / (Rm + 160)
(2)
Rm
4.
Design
4.1
General
4.3.1
Sealing
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9c
Propulsion System
Chapter 8
Page 9c3
r6 ~ 0,5 b
Section E - E
A
r5
up to 150
up to 250
up to 450
from 450
3
4
5
6
E
b
B C D
r1
r5
r2
r3
r5
r5
Sections: A - A
B-B
r4
r5
C-C
D-D
B C D
a
(a~b)
Detail X
Fig. 9c.1
(3)
The propeller boss seating is to be effectively protected against the ingress of seawater. This seal can be
dispensed with if the propeller shaft is made of corrosion-resistant material.
4.3.2
Shaft liners
4.4
Coupling connection
4.3.2.1 Propeller shafts which are not made of corrosion- resistant material and which run in seawater are
to be protected against ingress of seawater by seawater-resistant metal liners or other liners approved by
GL and by proven seals at the propeller.
These flanges shall not be thinner than the Rule diameter of the fitted bolts if these are based on the
same tensile strength as that of the shaft material.
Chapter 8
Page 9c4
cA
Section 9c
Propulsion System
= coefficient for shrink-fitted joints [], depending on the kind of driving unit
= 1,0 for geared diesel engine and turbine
drives
I - Part 1
GL 2007
4.4.4
The minimum thread root diameter dk of the
connecting bolts used for clamp-type couplings is to
be determined using the formula:
ds
dk
PW
Rm
sfl
4.4.6
For the calculation of the safety margin of the connection against slippage, the maximum clearance will be
applied, derived as the difference between the lowest
respectively highest still acceptable limit of the applied nominal tolerance field for the bore and the
shaft. The contact pressure p in the shrunk-on joint to
achieve the required safety margin may be determined
by applying formulae (6) and (7).
2
2
2
2
2
T + f cA Q + T T
Af
[N/mm2] (6)
"+"
""
4.4.2
The bolts used to connect flange couplings
are normally to be designed as fitted bolts. The minimum diameter ds of fitted bolts at the coupling flange
faces is to be determined by applying the formula:
ds = 16
(5)
p=
[mm]
4.4.5
The shaft of necked-down bolts shall not be
less than 0,9 times the thread root diameter. If, besides
the torque, the bolted connection has to transmit considerable additional forces, the bolts shall be increased
accordingly.
106 Pw
n d z Rm
d k = 12
106 Pw
n D z Rm
[mm]
(4)
4.4.3
Where, in special circumstances, the use of
fitted bolts is not feasible, GL may agree to the use of
an equivalent frictional transmission.
f = o 2
S
[]
4.5
Shafting bearings
4.5.1
(7)
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9c
Propulsion System
A max = K1 d
(8)
K1
Where the shaft speed exceeds 350 min-1 it is recommended that the maximum bearing spacing is determined in accordance with formula (9) in order to
avoid excessive loads due to bending vibrations. In
limiting cases a bending vibration analysis should be
made for the shafting system.
A max
d
= K2
n
(9)
K2
4.5.2
The length of the after stern tube bearing may be reduced to 1,5 da where the contact load, which is calculated from the static load and allowing for the
weight of the propeller is less than 0,8 MPa in the case
Chapter 8
Page 9c5
The peripheral speed of propeller shafts in greaselubricated grey cast iron bearings shall not exceed 2,5
up to a maximum of 3 m/s and that of propeller shafts
in rubber and water-lubricated lignum vitae bearings
shall not exceed 6 m/s and 3 up to a maximum of 4
m/s respectively.
4.5.2.5 Where propeller shafts are to run in roller
bearings inside the stern tube, these should wherever
possible take the form of cylindrical roller bearings
with cambered rollers or races and with increased
bearing clearance. The camber must be large enough
to accommodate a 0,1 % inclination of the shaft relative to the bearing axis without adverse effects.
Bearing lubrication
Chapter 8
Page 9c6
Section 9c
Propulsion System
4.5.3.3 In the case of vessels with automated machinery, Section 12 has to be complied with.
4.5.4
I - Part 1
GL 2007
B.
Gears, Couplings
1.
General
1.1
Scope
4.5.5
Shaft alignment
Pressure Tests
5.1
Shaft liners
Stern tubes
1.1.2
Application of these requirements to the
auxiliary machinery couplings mentioned in 1.1.1 may
generally be limited to a basic design approval by GL
of the particular coupling type. Regarding the design
of elastic couplings for use in generator sets, reference
is made to 7.2.6.
1.1.3
For the dimensional design of gears and couplings for vessels with ice class, see E.
1.2
Materials
2.1
Approved materials
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9c
Propulsion System
Testing of materials
Chapter 8
Page 9c7
for
3.
SH = 1,3 SF = 1,8
di
0, 4
da
may be set to 1, 0.
di
da
= material factor []
=
Rm
560
R m + 160
Gear shafts
5.
Equipment
4.1
Minimum diameter
5.1
Cw
For gears in main propulsion plants and for dynamically and statically loaded gears of essential equipment sufficient load bearing capacity of the toothing
has to be proven according to Chapter 2 Machinery
Installations, Section 5, C. But for fishing vessels with
L < 24 m, the following minimum safety margins for
flank and root bending stress may be used:
d 4
n 1 i
da
d 4
1 i
da
For fishing vessels with L < 24 m Inspection Certificates 3.1 B according to EN 10204 : 1995 can be accepted.
Suitable documentation is to be submitted for the
materials used for the major components of the couplings and gears of all other functionally essential
equipment in accordance with Section 9a, H. This
documentation may be a GL Material Test Certificate
or an acceptance test Certificate of the steelmaker.
da d F k
Chapter 8
Page 9c8
Section 9c
Propulsion System
I - Part 1
GL 2007
= degree of balance []
5.2
Gear casings
Seating of gears
6.1
Balancing
6.1.1
Gear wheels, pinions, shafts, gear couplings
and, where applicable, high-speed flexible couplings
shall be assembled in a properly balanced condition.
6.1.2
The generally permissible residual imbalance
U per balancing plane of gears for which static or dynamic balancing is rendered necessary by the method
of manufacture and by the operating and loading conditions can be determined by applying the formula
U =
G
9,6 Q G
[kgmm]
zn
6.2
Testing of gears
6.2.1
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9c
Table 9c.1
Propulsion System
Material /
Manufacturing
of toothing
Working tooth
depth (without
tip relief)
Width of tooth
(without end
relief)
heat-treated,
milling shaping
33 % average
values
70 %
surface-hardened, grinding,
scarping
40 % average
values
80 %
7.1
Tooth couplings
7.1.1
Adequate loading capacity of the tooth flanks
has to be proven according the generally accepted
methods defined in Chapter 2 Machinery Installations, Section 5, G. For fishing vessels with L < 24 m
Inspection Certificates 3.1 B according to EN 10204 :
1995 can be accepted.
7.1.2
The coupling teeth are to be effectively lubricated. For this purpose a constant oil level maintained
in the coupling may generally be regarded as adequate
if
Chapter 8
Page 9c9
Testing of couplings
Flexible couplings
7.2.1
Flexible couplings shall be type approved for
the loads specified by the manufacturer and for use in
main propulsion plants and essential auxiliary machinery.
7.2.2
Flexible couplings in the main propulsion
plant and in power-generating plants shall be so dimensioned that they are able to withstand for a reasonable time operation with one engine cylinder out of
service. Additional dynamic loads for vessels with ice
class are to be taken into account. In this connection
reference is made to E.
7.2.3
With regard to the routine supervision of
coupling types already approved by GL and in order to
prove adequate dynamic fatigue strength prior to the
C.
1.
General
1.1
Scope
1.2.1
The general conditions for these documents
are defined in Section 1, E.
1.2.2
Design drawings of propellers in main propulsion systems having an engine output in excess of
300 kW and in lateral thrust systems of over 500 kW,
as well as a general arrangement drawing are to be
submitted to GL in triplicate for examination. The
drawings are required to contain all the details necessary to carry out an examination in accordance with
the following requirements.
Chapter 8
Page 9c10
Section 9c
Propulsion System
I - Part 1
GL 2007
1.3
Materials
CG
1.3.1
CW
Table 9c.2
Description 1
Cw
Cu 1
Cu 2
Cu 3
Cu 4
440
440
590
630
Fe 1
Fe 2
Fe 3
440
440
600
Fe 4
Novel materials
Fe 5
Material testing
2.1
Characteristic values Cw
Material
Fe 6
1
dk
dm
500
600
cA
600
= R tan
ET
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Hm
Section 9c
Propulsion System
Chapter 8
Page 9c11
= number of blades []
(R B H)
(R B)
R, B and H are corresponding measures of
the various sections.
Table 9c.3
Profile shape
0,35 R
0,6 R
Segmental profiles
with circular arced
back
73
62
44
Segmental profiles
with parabolic
suction side
77
Blade profiles as
for Wageningen B
Series propellers
80
66
0,91 H
D
0,53 H
D
= half-conicity []
=
o
66
1,27 H
D
Values of k
0,25 R
C
2
47
44
max
= ratio of maximum to mean stress at pressure
m
side of blades []
2.2
= torque [Nm]
[min-1]
n2
= propeller speed
Pw
= 1+
VS
= wake fraction []
D
Pw 105 2
cos + sin
Hm
n 2 B z Cw cos2
K1
CG
= size factor []
= maximum blade thickness of developed cylindrical section at radii 0,25 R (t0,25), 0,35
R (t0,35), 0,6 R (t0,6) and 1,0 R (t1,0) [mm]
n2
e cos
+
H
15000
k as in Table 9c.3
Rm
(1)
D
1000
12, 2
f1
(2)
1,1 CG 0,85
f1
Section 9c
Chapter 8
Page 9c12
Propulsion System
t 1,0
I - Part 1
GL 2007
max.
thickness line
1,0 R
(+)
(-)
0,9 R
0,8 R
curve of
swept area
t 0,6
0,7 R
0,6 R
B0,6
0,5 R
0,4 R
t 0,25
rS
rD
0,25 R
0,2 R
B0,25
trailing edge
leading edge
Blade-sections according to
Wageningen B-series
max / m 0,8
1, 0
0, 7
Cdyn =
for
(3)
max
> 1,5 ; otherwise
m
Cdyn = 1,0
max/m is generally to be taken from the detailed
calculation analogously to the calculation in 2.2.5. If,
in exceptional cases, no such calculation exists, the
stress ratio may be calculated approximately according to formula (4).
max
= f2 ET + 1
m
(4)
2.2.2
The blade thicknesses calculated by applying
formula (1) are minima for the finish-machined propellers.
2.2.3
The fillet radius at the transition from the
pressure and suction side of the blades to the propeller
boss shall correspond, in the case of three and fourbladed propellers, to about 3,5 % of the propeller diameter. For propellers with a larger number of blades
the maximum possible fillet radius shall be aimed at,
but the radius shall not in any case be made smaller
than 40 % of the blade root thickness.
2.2.4
A variable fillet radius, ensuring a uniform
stress distribution, may be accepted based on a
strength calculation case by case. The resulting calculated maximum stress shall not exceed the values,
resulting from a standard constant fillet radius design
in accordance to 2.2.3.
ET
= 4,3 109
(5)
2.2.5
For special designs such as propellers with
skew angle 25, tip fin propellers, special profiles,
etc., special mechanical strength calculations are to be
submitted to GL.
f2
A blade geometry data file and details on the measured wake are to be submitted to GL by data carrier or
e-mail: prop@gl-group.com, together with the design
documents to enable the check of the blade stress
distribution of these special designs.
VS n 2 (1 w) D3
T
2.2.6
If the propeller is subjected to an essential
wear due to special operating conditions, e.g. abrasion
Section 9c
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Propulsion System
Propeller Mounting
3.1
Cone connection
L = Lmech + Ltemp
(6)
2 T 2 + f c A 2 ce6 Q 2 + T 2 T
Af
L temp =
t
dm
6 106 (35 t)
C
Q FR = 2, 0 Q + 1,8 Q V MCR
(10)
(8)
(9)
Ltemp
(7)
f = o 2
S
Chapter 8
Page 9c13
Note:
"+" sign following the root applies to shrunk joints
of tractor propeller
"" sign following the root applies to shrunk joints
of push propeller
Flange connections
4.1
Balancing
Chapter 8
Page 9c14
4.2
Section 9c
Propulsion System
Testing
5.1
General
5.1.1
Scope
Materials
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Shipboard trials
D.
Steering Gear
1.
General
1.1
Scope
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9c
Propulsion System
Chapter 8
Page 9c15
2.
Materials
3.
2.1
Approved materials
3.1
Testing of materials
2.2.1
The materials of important load-transmitting
components of the steering gear as well as of the pressurized casings of hydraulic steering gears are to be
tested under the supervision of GL in accordance with
the Rules II Materials and Welding, Part 1 Metallic Materials.
3.3.1
Auxiliary steering gears shall, with the rudder
fully immersed in calm water, be capable of putting
the rudder from 15 port to 15 starboard or vice versa
within 60 seconds at 50 % of the vessel's maximum
speed, subject to a minimum of eight knots. Hydraulically operated auxiliary steering gears are to be fitted
with their own piping system independent of that of
the main steering gear. The pipe or hose connections
of steering gears shall be capable of being shut off
directly at the pressurized casings.
3.3.2
Manual operation of auxiliary steering gear
systems is permitted up to a theoretical stock diameter
of 230 mm referring to steel with a minimum nominal
upper yield stress ReH = 235 N/mm2.
3.4
Power unit
Chapter 8
Page 9c16
Section 9c
Propulsion System
Locking equipment
Steering gear systems are to be equipped with a locking system effective in all rudder positions, see Section 3.
Where hydraulic plant is fitted with shutoffs directly
at the cylinders or rotary vane casings, special locking
equipment may be dispensed with.
For steering gears with cylinder units which may be
independently operated these shut-off devices do not
have to be fitted directly on the cylinders.
3.8
Overload protection
3.8.1
Power-operated steering gear systems are to
be equipped with overload protection (slip coupling,
relief valves) to ensure that the driving torque is limited to the maximum permissible value. The overload
protection device shall be secured to prevent later
adjustment by unauthorized persons. Means have to be
provided for checking the setting while in service.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
3.8.2
Relief valves have to be provided for protecting any part of the hydraulic system which can be
isolated and in which pressure can be generated from
the power source or from external forces.
Controls
I - Part 1
GL 2007
3.11
Section 9c
Propulsion System
Piping
Storage tank
Arrangement
Steering gears are to be installed in a way to be accessible at any time and to be easily maintainable.
3.15
Electrical equipment
Chapter 8
Page 9c17
6.
Shipboard trials
E.
1.
Scope
Necessary reinforcements
propellers
gears
flexible couplings.
F.
Torsional Vibrations
1.
Scope
For the purposes of these requirements, torsional vibration stresses are additional loads due to torsional
vibrations. They result from the alternating torque
which is superimposed on the main torque.
Chapter 8
Page 9c18
2.
Section 9c
Propulsion System
2.1
Operating ranges which, because of the magnitude of the torsional vibration stresses for shaftings
and torsional torques for elastic couplings and gears,
may only be passed through, are to be indicated as
prohibited ranges of operation by red marks on the
tachometer or in some other suitable manner at the
operating station. In normal operation the speed range
0,8 is to be kept free of prohibited ranges of operation, where is the speed ratio actual speed to nominal speed.
In specifying prohibited ranges of operation it is important to ensure that the navigating and manoeuvring
functions are not severely restricted.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
2.2
Measures necessary to avoid overloading of
the propulsion plant under misfiring conditions are to
be displayed on instruction plates to be affixed to all
engine control stations.
3.
Further details
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9d
Chapter 8
Page 9d1
Section 9d
Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps
A.
General
1.
Scope
1.1
For fishing vessels with a length L 45 m the
GL Rules Chapter 2 Machinery Installations, Section 11 are to be applied. For fishing vessels with a
length 12 m L < 45 m, the requirements defined in
the following have to be applied.
1.2
The requirements of B. to P. apply to pipes
and piping systems, including valves, fittings and
pumps, which are necessary for the operation of the
main propulsion plant together with its auxiliaries and
equipment. They also apply to piping systems used in
the operation of the vessel whose failure could directly
or indirectly impair the safety of vessel or catch, and
to piping systems which are dealt with in other parts
of the Rules.
1.3
The requirements of Q. apply to the storage
of liquid fuels, lubricating and hydraulic oils as well
as to oil residues.
1.4
For systems and equipment not covered by
these Rules, please refer to Chapter 2 Machinery
Installations, Section 10 and Section 11.
1.5
Ventilation systems are subject to Chapter 21
- Ventilation.
1.6
Gas welding equipment is subject to the GL
Rules VI Additional Rules and Guidelines, Part 3
Machinery Installations, Chapter 5 Guidelines for
the Design, Equipment and Testing of Gas Welding
Installations on Seagoing Ships.
2.
2.1
The following drawings/documents are to be
submitted for approval, at least in triplicate:
2.1.1
2.1.2
Ventilation system drawings for machinery
spaces and cargo holds, stating volumes of air, coaming heights, type of mechanical ventilators as well as
arrangement and operating devices of fire/weathertight
closures.
2.1.3
Tank plan including particulars regarding
arrangement, medium and volume of tanks as well as
information about the maximum height of the overflow level.
2.1.4
Diagrammatic plans of the following piping
systems including all the details necessary for approval (e.g. lists of valves, fittings and pipes):
bilge systems
air, overflow and sounding pipes including details of filling pipe cross sections
2.1.5
For remotely controlled valves; diagrammatic
piping plans and the arrangement of piping and control stands in the vessel, including power units, control
stands, pressure vessels and electrical circuit diagrams.
3.
Pipe classes
1.
General
Materials
Chapter 8
Page 9d2
Table 9d.1
Section 9d
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Medium/type of pipeline
Pipe class
Air, gas
Non-flammable hydraulic fluid
Boiler feedwater, condensate
Seawater and fresh water for cooling
Brine in refrigerating plant
Liquid fuels, lubricating oil, flammable hydraulic fluid
Refrigerants
Open-ended pipelines (without shutoff), e.g. drains, venting pipes,
overflow lines and boiler blowdown lines
manganese steel pipes, valves and fittings are not to be
used for temperatures above 400 C. However, they
may be used for higher temperatures provided that
their metallurgical behaviour and their strength property after 100 000 h of operation are in accordance
with national or international regulations or standards
and if such values are guaranteed by the steel manufacturer. Otherwise, alloy steels in accordance with
GL Rules II Materials and Welding, Part 1 Metallic Materials are to be used.
2.4
II
III
PR > 40
or
t > 300
PR 40
and
t 300
PR 16
and
t 200
PR > 16
or
t > 150
PR 16
and
t 150
all
PR 7
and
t 60
Pipes, valves and fittings of lamellargraphite cast iron (grey cast iron)
2.2
2.3
2.5
Plastic pipes
2.5.1
Plastic pipes may be used after type approval
1
by GL. The use of such systems is restricted to pipe
class III only.
2.5.2
Pipes, connecting pieces, valves and fittings
made of plastic materials are to be subjected to a continuous GL-approved quality control by the manufacturer.
2.5.3
Pipe penetrations through watertight bulkheads and decks as well as through fire divisions are
to be approved by GL. Dependent on application and
installation location additional flame tests may be
required.
See IMO Resolution A.753 (18): Guidelines for the Application of Plastic Pipes on Ships.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9d
2.5.4
Plastic pipes are to be continuously and permanently marked with the following particulars:
manufacturer's marking
year of manufacture
2.5.5
Valves and connecting pieces made of plastic
shall, as a minimum requirement, be marked with the
manufacturer's marking and the outside diameter of
the pipe.
Table 9d.2
Steels
Pipes
Forgings,
plates,
flanges,
Bolts,
nuts
Cast steel
Application of materials
Pipe class
I
II
III
Steel pipes for high temperatures
above 300 C,
Pipes for
Steel not subject to any special
pipes made of steel with high/ low
general
quality specification, weldability in
temperature toughness at temperaapplications
accordance with Rules for Welding
tures below 10 C,
stainless steel pipes for chemicals
Steel suitable for the corresponding service and processing conditions,
high temperature steel for temperatures above 300 C,
steel with high/low-temperature toughness for temperatures below 10 C
Bolts for general machinery constructions,
high-temperature steel for temperaBolts for general machine construction
tures above 300 C,
steel with high/low temperature
toughness for temperatures below
10 C
High-temperature cast steel for
temperatures above 300 C,
cast steel with high/low temperaCast steel for general applications
ture toughness at temperatures
below 10 C,
stainless castings for aggressive
media
Only ferritic grades, elongation A5 at least 15 %
Copper,
copper alloys
Plastics
Non ferrous
metals
(valves, fittings,
i )
Approved materials
Material or application
Non-metallic
materials
2.6
Chapter 8
Page 9d3
On special approval
(see 2.5)
Chapter 8
Page 9d4
Table 9d.3
Type of
component
Section 9d
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Pipes 1,
Steel,
Pipe elbows,
Copper,
Fittings
Copper alloys,
Aluminium
Design
temperature
Aluminium alloys
Plastics
Valves 1,
Steel,
Flanges,
Cast steel,
Copper alloys
Nominal diameter
DN
> 50
50
II
> 50
50
III
All
DN > 100
DN 100
PB DN > 2500
or DN > 250
PB DN 2500
and DN 250
All
PB DN > 1500
PB DN 1500
III
All
I, II
III
I, II
> 225 C
Steel,
Cast steel,
Type Certificate +
A
> 300 C
Pipe
class
300 C
I, II
III
225 C
I, II
200 C
Plastics
Acc. to Type
Approval
Certificate
Semi-finished
products,
According to Table 9d.2
Screws and
other components
Casings of valves and pipes fitted on vessels side and bottom and bodies of valves fitted on collision bulkhead are to be included in pipe
class II.
Test Certificates are to be issued in accordance with GL Rules II Materials and Welding, Part 1 Metallic Materials, Chapter 1
Principles and Test Procedures, Section 1, H. with the following abbreviations:
A: GL Material Certificate, B: Manufacturer Inspection Certificate, C: Manufacturer Test Report
I - Part 1
GL 2007
3.
Section 9d
Testing of materials
3.1
For piping systems belonging to class I and
II, tests in accordance with GL Rules II Materials
and Welding, Part 1 Metallic Materials and under
GL supervision are to be carried out in accordance
with Table 9d.3 for:
3.2
Welded joints in pipelines of classes I and II
are to be tested in accordance with GL Rules II Materials and Welding, Part 3 Welding.
4.
4.1
Definitions
4.1.1
Table 9d.4
Chapter 8
Page 9d5
Max. working
temperature
T 60 C
T > 60 C
PB 7 bar
3 bar or max.
working pressure, whichever
is greater
3 bar or max.
working pressure, whichever
is greater
PB > 7 bar
max. working
pressure
14 bar or max.
working pressure, whichever
is greater
Max. working
pressure
4.2
4.2.1
All Class I and II pipes as well as steam lines,
feed water pressure pipes, compressed air and fuel
lines having a design pressure PR greater than 3,5 bar
together with their integral fittings, connecting pieces,
branches and bends, after completion of manufacture
but before insulation and coating, if this is provided,
shall be subjected to a hydraulic pressure test in the
presence of the Surveyor at the following value of
pressure:
pp = 1,5 pc [bar]
pc = design pressure
4.1.2
Nominal pressure, PN [bar]
This is the term applied to a selected pressure temperature relation used for the standardization of struc
tural components. In general, the numerical value of
the nominal pressure for a standardized component
made of the material specified in the standard will
correspond to the maximum allowable working pressure PB at 20 C.
4.2.2
Where for technical reasons it is not possible
to carry out complete hydraulic pressure tests on all
sections of piping before assembly on board, proposals are to be submitted to GL for approval for testing
pipe connections on board, particularly in respect of
welding seams.
4.1.3
4.2.3
Where the hydraulic pressure test of piping is
carried out on board, these tests may be conducted in
conjunction with the tests required under 4.3.
4.2.4
Pressure testing of pipes with less than DN 15
may be omitted at GL's discretion depending on the
application.
4.1.4
4.3
4.3.1
After assembly on board, all pipelines covered by these requirements are to be subjected to a
tightness test in the presence of a GL Surveyor.
In general, all pipe systems are to be tested for leakage
under operational conditions. If necessary, special
techniques other than hydraulic pressure tests are to be
applied.
4.3.2
Heating coils in tanks and pipe lines for fuels
are to be tested to not less than 1,5 PR but in no case
less than 4 bar.
Section 9d
Chapter 8
Page 9d6
4.4
The following valves are to be subjected in the manufacturer's works to a hydraulic pressure test in the
presence of a GL Surveyor:
Shut-off devices of the above type are to be additionally tested for tightness with the nominal pressure.
5.
Attention shall be given to the workmanship in construction and installation of the piping systems according to the approved data in order to obtain the maximum efficiency in service. For details concerning
structural tests and tests following heat treatments, see
Table 9d.5
I - Part 1
GL 2007
C.
1.
1.1
The pipe thicknesses stated in Tables 9d.5 to
9d.8 are the assigned minimum thicknesses, unless
due to stress analysis greater thicknesses are necessary.
Provided that the pipes are effectively protected
against corrosion, the wall thicknesses of group M and
D stated in Table 9d.6 may, with GL's agreement, be
reduced by up to 1 mm, the amount of the reduction is
to be in relation to the wall thickness.
Minimum wall thickness groups N, M and D of steel pipes and approved locations
Ballast lines
M
D
Seawater lines
Fuel lines
Lubricating lines
D
X
Steam lines
Condensate lines
Feedwater lines
Drinking lines
Hydraulic lines
1
Weather deck
M1
X
X
X
N
M
Accommodation
Condensate and
feedwater tanks
M
X
Thermal lines
M
Bilge lines
Cargo holds
Piping system
Machinery Spaces
Location
N
X
N
N
X
X
N
X
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9d
Table 9d.6
Group N
Chapter 8
Page 9d7
Group M
Group D
da
da
da
da
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
10,2
1,6
from 406,4
6,3
from 21,3
3,2
from 38,0
6,3
from 13,5
1,8
from 660,0
7,1
from 38,0
3,6
from 88,9
7,1
from 20,0
2,0
from 762,0
8,0
from 51,0
4,0
from 114,3
8,0
from 48,3
2,3
from 864,0
8,8
from 76,1
4,5
from 152,4
8,8
from 70,0
2,6
from 914,0
10,0
from 177,8
5,0
from 457,2
8,8
Table 9d.7
Pipe outside
diameter
da
[mm]
Minimum wall
thickness
s
[mm]
up to
17,2
1,0
up to
48,3
1,6
up to
88,9
2,0
up to
168,3
2,3
up to
219,1
2,6
up to
273,0
2,9
up to
406,0
3,6
over
406,0
4,0
Table 9d.8
Pipe outside
diameter
da
[mm]
10
1,0
0,8
12
20
1,2
1,0
25
44,5
1,5
1,2
50
76,1
2,0
1,5
2,5
2,0
159
3,0
2,5
193,7 267
3,5
3,0
273
4,0
3,5
(470)
4,0
3,5
508
4,5
4,0
88,9 108
133
457,2
1.3
For the minimum wall thickness of air,
sounding and overflow pipes through weather decks,
see M., Table 9d.17a.
1.4
Where the application of mechanical joints results in reduction in pipe wall thickness (bite type rings
or other structural elements) this is to be taken into
account in determining the minimum wall thickness.
1.5
For the calculation of pipe wall thicknesses
see Chapter 2 Machinery Installations, Section 11, C.
Chapter 8
Page 9d8
Section 9d
D.
1.
General principles
1.2
Welded connections rather than detachable
couplings shall be used for pipelines carrying toxic
media and inflammable liquefied gases.
1.3
Expansion in piping systems due to heating
and shifting of their suspensions caused by deformation of the vessel are to be compensated by bends,
compensators and flexible pipe connections. The arrangement of suitable fixed points is to be taken into
consideration.
1.4
Where pipes are protected against corrosion
by special protective coatings, e.g. hot-dip galvanising, rubber lining etc., it is to be ensured that the protective coating will not be damaged during installation.
2.
Pipe connections
2.1
full penetration butt welds with/without provision to improve the quality of the root
2.2.2
Gaskets are to be suitable for the intended
media under design pressure and temperature conditions and their dimensions and construction shall be in
accordance with recognized standards.
2.2.3
Steel flanges may be used as shown in Tables
9d.13 and 9d.14 in accordance with the permitted
pressures and temperatures specified in the relevant
standards.
2.2.4
Flanges made of non-ferrous metals may be
used in accordance with the relevant standards and
within the limits laid down in the approvals. Flanges
and brazed or welded collars of copper and copper
alloys are subject to the following requirements:
a)
b)
c)
2.2.5
Flange connections for pipe classes I and II
with temperatures over 300 C are to be provided with
necked-down bolts.
2.3
Pipe class
Welded butt-joints
with special provisions
for root side
I, II, III
Welded butt-joints
without special provisions for root side
II, III
Outside
diameter
The thickness of the sockets is to be in accordance with C.1.1 at least equal to the thickness
of the pipe.
The use of welded socket connections in systems of pipe class II may be accepted only under
the condition that in the systems no excessive
stress, erosion and corrosion are expected.
2.4
2.4.1
Screwed socket connections with parallel and
tapered threads shall comply with requirements of
recognized national or international standards.
all
III
II
Welded socket connections may be accepted according to Table 9d.9. Following conditions are to be observed.
Pipe connections
Types of connections
Socket weld
Flange connections
2.2.1
Dimensions of flanges and bolting shall comply with recognized standards.
1.1
Piping systems are to be constructed and
manufactured on the basis of standards generally used
in shipbuilding.
2.2
I - Part 1
GL 2007
60,3 mm
2.4.2
Screwed socket connections with parallel
threads are permitted for pipes in class III with an
outside diameter 60,3 mm as well as for subordinate
systems (e.g. sanitary and hot water heating systems).
They are not permitted for systems for flammable
media.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9d
2.4.3
Screwed socket connections with tapered
threads are permitted for the following:
Mechanical joints
2.6.1
Type approved mechanical joints 2 may be
used as shown in Tables 9d.10 to 9d.12.
2.6.2
Mechanical joints in bilge and seawater systems within machinery spaces or spaces of high fire
risk, shall be flame resistant.
2.6.3
Mechanical joints are not to be used in piping
sections directly connected to sea openings or tanks
containing flammable liquids.
2.6.4
3.3
Watertight bulkhead penetrations of supply
and operating installations, such as piping, scuppers or
electric cables, require to be approved by type test 3
that for a period of 30 minutes leakages will not occur
at the penetrations. The pressure assumed is to at least
correspond to the pressure head prevailing at the intended points of installation of the penetrations.
Penetrations welded into bulkheads watertight are not
subject to type testing.
3.4
Piping close to electrical switchboards shall
be so installed or protected that a leakage cannot damage the electrical installation.
3.5
Piping systems are to be so arranged that they
can be completely emptied, drained and vented. Piping systems in which the accumulation of liquids during operation could cause damage shall be equipped
with special drain arrangements.
3.6
Pipe lines laid through ballast tanks, which
are coated in accordance with Chapter 1 Hull Structures, Section 35, F. are to be either effectively protected against corrosion or they are to be of low susceptibility to corrosion.
The method of corrosion protection of tanks and pipes
shall be compatible.
Chapter 8
Page 9d9
3.1
Piping systems shall be adequately identified
according to their purpose. Valves are to be permanently and clearly marked.
3.2
Pipe penetrations leading through bulkheads/decks and tank walls have to be water and oil
tight. Bolts through bulkheads are not permitted.
Holes for fastening screws shall not be drilled in the
tank walls.
3.7
The wall thickness of pipes between vessel's
side and first shut-off device is to be in accordance
with Table 9d.17 b, column B. Pipes are to be connected by welding or flanges.
4.
Shut-off devices
4.1
Shut-off devices shall comply with a recognized standard. Valves with screwed-on covers are to
be secured to prevent unintentional loosening of the
cover.
4.2
Hand-operated shut-off devices are to be
closed by turning in the clockwise direction.
4.3
Valves must be clearly marked to show
whether they are in the open or closed position.
4.4
Change-over devices in piping systems in
which a possible intermediate position of the device
could be dangerous in service shall not be used.
4.5
Valves are to be permanently marked. The
marking shall comprise at least the following details:
nominal diameter
nominal pressure
Chapter 8
Page 9d10
Section 9d
Welded and
brazed type
Compression Couplings
Swage type
Press type
Bite type
Flared type
Slip-on Joints
Grip type
Machine grooved
type
I - Part 1
GL 2007
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9d
Chapter 8
Page 9d11
Slip type
Kind of connections
Compression couplings 5
Slip-on joints
+
+
+
+
+
+
2, 3
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
2, 3
2, 3
3
3
3
1
2, 3
Footnotes:
1
Inside machinery spaces of category A only approved fire resistant types
2
Not inside machinery spaces of category A or accommodation spaces. May be accepted in other
machinery spaces provided the joints are located in easily visible and accessible positions.
3
Approved fire resistant types
4
Above freeboard deck only
5
If compression couplings include any components which readily deteriorate in case of fire, they are
to be of approved fire resistant type as required for Slip-on joints.
Section 9d
Chapter 8
Page 9d12
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Table 9d.12 Application of mechanical joints depending upon the class of piping
Types of joints
II
III
+
(da 60,3 mm)
+
(da 60,3 mm)
Pipe Unions
Welded and brazed type
Compression Couplings
Swage type
Press type
Bite type
Flared type
+
(da 60,3 mm)
+
(da 60,3 mm)
Slip-on Joints
Machine grooved type
Grip type
Slip type
Abbreviations:
+ Application is allowed
Application is not allowed
Pipe
class
PR [bar]
> 10
10
II
III
A
A, B
> 400
400
A, B, C
A
A, B
250
A, B, C, D, E
5.1
For the mounting of valves on the shell plating, see Chapter 1 Hull Structures, Section 6, G.
5.2
Valves on the shell plating shall be easily
accessible. Seawater inlet and outlet valves have to be
capable of being operated from above the floor plates.
Cocks on the shell plating shall be so arranged that the
handle can only be removed when the cock is closed.
A, B, C, E
A, B, C, D, E A, B, C, E
Other media
Temperature
[C]
A, B
A, B, C
Type of
flange
> 250
5.
Type of
flange
Lubricating
oil, fuel oil
Type of
flange
> 400
400
A, B
> 250
A, B, C
250
A, B, C, D, E
A, B, C, D, E, F 3
5.3
Valves with only one flange may be used on
the shell plating and on the sea chests only after special approval.
5.4
On vessels with > 500 GT, in periodically
unattended machinery spaces, the controls of sea inlet
discharge valves shall be sited so as to allow to reach
and operate sea inlet and discharge valves in case of
influx of water within 106 minutes after triggering of
the bilge alarm.
Non return discharge valves need not to be considered.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
6.
Section 9d
Pumps
6.1
For materials and construction requirements
VI Additional Rules and Guidelines, Part 6
Pumps, Chapter 1 Guidelines for Design, Construction and Testing of Pumps of GL are to be applied.
6.2
For the pumps listed below, a performance
test is to be carried out in the manufacturer's works
under GL supervision:
fire pumps
7.
piping systems which may be exposed to pressures in excess of the design pressure
Safety valves shall be capable of discharging the medium at a maximum pressure increase of 10 % of the
allowable working pressure. Safety valves are to be
fitted on the low pressure side of reducing valves.
E.
1.
Bunker lines
Chapter 8
Page 9d13
2.2
Shut-off devices on fuel oil tanks having a
capacity of less than 500 l need not be provided with
remote control.
2.3
Filling lines are to extend to the bottom of the
tank. Short filling lines directed to the side of the tank
may be admissible. Storage tank suction lines may
also be used as filling lines.
2.4
Where filling lines are led through the tank
top and end below the maximum oil level in the tank,
a non-return valve at the tank top is to be arranged.
2.5
The inlet connections of suction lines are to
be arranged far enough from the drains in the tank so
that water and impurities which have settled out will
not enter the suctions.
3.
Pipe layout
3.1
Fuel lines may not pass through tanks containing feed water, drinking water or lubricating oil.
3.2
Fuel lines which pass through tanks with
other media, are to have an increased wall thickness
according to Table 9d.5.
3.3
Fuel lines may not be laid directly above or in
the vicinity of boilers, turbines or equipment with high
surface temperatures (over 220 C) or in way of other
sources of ignition.
3.4
Flanged and screwed socket connections in
fuel oil lines shall be screened or otherwise suitably
protected to avoid, as far as practicable, oil spray or
oil leakages onto hot surfaces, into machinery air
intakes, or other sources of ignition.
The number of detachable pipe connections is to be
limited. In general, flanged connections according to
recognized standards shall be used.
3.4.1
Flanged and screwed socket connections in
fuel oil lines which lay directly above hot surfaces or
other sources of ignition are to be screened and provided with drainage arrangements.
2.1
Filling and suction lines from storage and
settling tanks situated above the double bottom and
from which in case of their damage fuel oil may leak,
are to be fitted directly on the tanks with shut-off
devices capable of being closed from a safe position
outside the space concerned.
3.4.2
Flanged and screwed socket connections in
fuel oil lines with a maximum allowable working
pressure of more than 0,18 N/mm2 and within about
3 m from hot surfaces or other sources of ignition and
direct sight of line must be screened. Drainage arrangements need not to be provided.
3.4.3
Flanged and screwed socket connections in
fuel oil lines with a maximum allowable working
pressure of less than 0,18 N/mm2 and within about
3 m from hot surfaces or other sources of ignition
shall be assessed individually taking into account
working pressure, type of coupling and possibility of
failure.
Chapter 8
Page 9d14
Section 9d
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Type B
Type C
Type D
Type E
Type F
Plain flange
- welded on both sides -
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9d
3.4.4
Flanged and screwed socket connections in
fuel oil lines with a maximum allowable working
pressure of more than 1,6 N/mm2 need normally to be
screened.
3.4.5
Pipes running below engine room floor need
normally not to be screened.
3.5
Shut-off valves in fuel lines in the machinery
spaces are to be operable from above the floor plates.
3.6
Glass and plastic components are not permitted in fuel systems.
Chapter 8
Page 9d15
Sight glasses made of glass located in vertical overflow pipes may be permitted.
6.7
Engines for the exclusive operation of emergency generators and emergency fire pumps may be
fitted with simplex filters.
3.7
Fuel pumps shall be capable of being isolated
from the piping system by shut-off valves.
6.8
Fuel transfer units are to be fitted with a simplex filter on the suction side.
4.
7.
4.1
Fuel transfer, feed and booster pumps shall be
designed for the operating temperature of the medium
pumped.
4.2
A fuel transfer pump is to be provided. Other
service pumps may be used as a stand-by pump provided they are suitable for this purpose.
4.3
At least two means of oil fuel transfer are to
be provided for filling the service tanks.
4.4
Where a feed or booster pump is required to
supply fuel to main or auxiliary engines, stand-by
pumps shall be provided. Where pumps are attached to
the engines, stand-by pumps may be dispensed with
for auxiliary engines.
5.
Purifiers
7.1
Manufacturers of purifiers for cleaning fuel
and lubricating oil have to be approved by GL.
7.2
Where a fuel purifier may exceptionally be
used to purify lubricating oil the purifier supply and
discharge lines are to be fitted with a change-over
arrangement which prevents the possibility of fuel and
lubricating oils being mixed.
Suitable equipment is also to be provided to prevent
such mixing occurring over control and compression
lines.
7.3
The sludge tanks of purifiers are to be fitted
with a level alarm which ensures that the level in the
sludge tank cannot interfere with the operation of the
purifier.
8.
Filters
6.1
Fuel oil filters are to be fitted in the delivery
line of the fuel pumps.
6.2
For ships with Class Notation AUT the filter
equipment shall satisfy the requirements of Chapter 4
Automation, Section 2.
6.3
Mesh size and filter capacity are to be in
accordance with the requirements of the manufacturer
of the engine.
6.4
Uninterrupted supply of filtered fuel has to be
ensured during cleaning of the filtering equipment. In
case of automatic back-flushing filters it is to be en-
F.
1.
General requirements
1.1
Lubricating oil systems are to be so constructed to ensure reliable lubrication over the whole
range of speed and during run-down of the engines
and to ensure adequate heat transfer.
1.2
Priming pumps
Chapter 8
Page 9d16
1.3
Section 9d
Emergency lubrication
A suitable emergency lubricating oil supply (e.g. gravity tank) is to be arranged for machinery which may
be damaged in case of interruption of lubricating oil
supply.
1.4
Equipment necessary for adequate treatment of lubricating oil such as purifiers, automatic back-flushing
filters, filters and free-jet centrifuges are to be provided.
2.
2.1
2.1.1
For the capacity and location of these tanks
see Q.3.
2.1.2
The suction connections of lubricating oil
pumps are to be located as far as possible from drain
pipes.
2.1.3
Gravity tanks are to be fitted with an overflow pipe which leads to the circulating tank. Arrangements are to be made for observing the flow of
excess oil in the overflow pipe.
2.2
Purifiers
2.2.1
Filling and suction lines of lubricating oil
tanks with a capacity of 500 l and more located above
the double bottom and from which in case of their
damage lubricating oil may leak, are to be fitted directly on the tanks with shut-off devices according to
E.2.1.
The remote operation of shut-off valves according to
E.2.1 may be dispensed with for valves which are kept
closed during normal operation
2.2.2
Where lubricating oil lines are to be led in the
vicinity of hot machinery, steel pipes which shall be in
one length and which are protected where necessary
are to be used.
2.2.3
For screening arrangements of lubricating oil
pipes E.3.4 applies as appropriate.
2.3
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Filters
2.3.1
Lubricating oil filters are to be fitted in the
delivery line of the lubricating oil pumps.
2.3.2
Mesh size and filter capacity are to be in
accordance with the requirements of the manufacturer
of the engine.
2.3.3
Uninterrupted supply of filtered lubricating
oil has to be ensured under cleaning conditions of the
filter equipment. In case of automatic back-flushing
3.
3.1
Main engines
3.1.1
Main and independent stand-by pumps are to
be arranged for vessels for unrestricted service. Main
pumps driven by the main engines are to be so designed that the lubricating oil supply is ensured over
the whole range of operation.
3.1.2
On vessels with more than one main engine
and with separate lubricating oil systems, complete
spare lubricating oil pumps on board may be accepted
instead of stand-by pumps, provided that the main
lubricating oil pumps are so arranged that they can be
replaced with the means available on board.
3.2
3.2.1
Lubricating oil is to be supplied by a main
pump and an independent stand-by pump.
3.2.2
Where a reduction gear has been approved by
GL to have adequate self-lubrication at 75 % of the
torque of the propelling engine, a stand-by lubricating
oil pump for the reduction gear may be dispensed with
up to a power-speed ratio of
P / n1 [kW/min-1] 3,0
n1 = gear input revolution [min-1]
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9d
3.2.3
The requirements under 3.1.2 are to be applied for multi-propeller plants and plants with more
than one engine.
3.3
Auxiliary machinery
3.3.1
Diesel generators
Chapter 8
Page 9d17
2.1.1
For vessels with ice class E1 to E4 the sea
chest is to be arranged as follows:
Where only one diesel generator is available a complete spare pump is to be carried on board.
G.
2.1.2
As an alternative two smaller sea chests of a
design as specified in 2.1.1 may be arranged.
1.
2.1.3
All discharge valves shall be so arranged that
the discharge of water at any draught will not be obstructed by ice.
1.1
At least two sea chests are to be provided.
Wherever possible, the sea chests are to be arranged as
low as possible on either side of the vessel.
1.2
For service in shallow waters, it is recommended that an additional high seawater intake is
provided.
1.3
It is to be ensured that the total seawater
supply for the engines can be taken from only one sea
chest.
1.4
Each sea chest is to be provided with an effective vent. The following venting arrangements will
be approved:
1.5
Compressed air connections (or steam if
available) are to be provided for cleaning the sea chest
gratings. The compressed air lines are to be fitted with
shut-off valves fitted directly to the sea chests. Compressed air for blowing through sea chest gratings may
exceed 2 bar only if the sea chests are constructed for
higher pressures. Alternative solutions have to be
agreed with GL.
1.6
Where a sea chest is exclusively arranged as
chest cooler the steam or compressed airlines for
clearing according to 1.5 may, with GL's agreement,
be dispensed with.
2.
2.1
For one of the sea chests specified in 1.1 the
sea inlet is to be located as near as possible to midship
and as far aft as possible. The seawater discharge line
of the entire engine plant is to be connected to the top
of the sea chest.
2.2
Where necessary, a steam connection or a
heating coil is to be arranged for de-icing and thawing
the sea chests.
2.3
At least one fire pump shall have a suction
from the de-iced sea chest.
3.
Sea valves
3.1
Sea valves are to be so arranged that they can
be operated from above the floor plates.
3.2
Discharge pipes for seawater cooling systems
are to be fitted with a shut-off valve of non-return type
at the shell.
4.
Strainer
5.1
5.1.1
Main propulsion plants are to be provided
with main and stand-by cooling water pumps.
5.1.2
The main cooling water pump may be attached to the propulsion plant. It is to be ensured that
the attached pump is of sufficient capacity for the
cooling water required by main engines and auxiliary
equipment over the whole speed range of the propulsion plant.
The drive of the stand-by cooling water pump is to be
independent of the main engine.
Chapter 8
Page 9d18
Section 9d
5.1.3
Main and stand-by cooling water pumps are
each to be of sufficient capacity to meet the maximum
cooling water requirements of the plant.
5.1.4
Other suitable seawater pumps may be used
as stand-by cooling water pumps.
5.2
For plants with more than one engine and with separate cooling water systems, complete spare pumps
stored on board may be accepted instead of stand-by
pumps provided that the main seawater cooling pumps
are so arranged that they can be replaced with the
means available on board.
5.3
H.
1.
General
1.1
Fresh water cooling systems are to be so
arranged that the engines can be sufficiently cooled
under all operating conditions.
1.2
Depending on the requirements of the engine
plant, the following fresh water cooling systems are
allowed:
I - Part 1
GL 2007
1.4
As far as possible, the temperature controls of
main and auxiliary engines as well as of different
circuits are to be independent of each other.
1.5
Where, in automated engine plants, heat
exchangers for fuel or lubricating oil are incorporated
in the cylinder cooling water circuit of main engines,
the entire cooling water system is to be monitored for
fuel and oil leakage.
1.6
Common engine cooling water systems for
main and auxiliary plants are to be fitted with shut-off
valves to enable repairs to be performed without taking the entire plant out of service.
2.
2.1
The construction and equipment of heat exchangers and coolers are subject to the requirements
of Section 9e.
2.2
The coolers of cooling water systems, engines and equipment are to be so designed to ensure
that the specified cooling water temperatures can be
maintained under all operating conditions. Cooling
water temperatures are to be adjusted to meet the requirements of engines and equipment.
2.3
Heat exchangers for auxiliary equipment in
the main cooling water circuit are to be provided with
by-passes if in the event of a failure of the heat exchanger it is possible by these means to keep the system in operation.
2.4
It is to be ensured that auxiliary machinery
can be maintained in operation while repairing the
main coolers. If necessary, means are to be provided
for changing over to other heat exchangers, machinery
or equipment through which a temporary heat transfer
can be achieved.
2.5
Shut-off valves are to be provided at the inlet
and outlet of all heat exchangers.
2.6
Every heat exchanger and cooler is to be
provided with a vent and a drain.
2.7
2.7.1
Arrangement and construction drawings of
keel and box coolers are to be submitted for approval.
1.3
The cooling circuits are to be so divided that,
should one part of the system fail, operation of the
auxiliary systems can be maintained. Change-over
arrangements are to be provided for this purpose if
necessary.
2.7.2
Permanent vents for fresh water are to be
provided at the top of keel coolers and chest coolers.
2.7.3
Keel coolers are to be fitted with pressure
gauge connections at the fresh water inlet and outlet.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
3.
Section 9d
Expansion tanks
3.1
Expansion tanks are to be arranged at sufficient height for every cooling water circuit. Different
cooling circuits may only be connected to a common
expansion tank if they do not interfere with each other.
Care must be taken here to ensure that damage to or
faults in one system cannot affect the other system.
3.2
Expansion tanks are to be fitted with filling
connections, aeration/de-aeration devices, water level
indicators and drains.
4.
Chapter 8
Page 9d19
Internal combustion engines driving emergency generating units are to be fitted with independent cooling
systems. Such cooling systems are to be made proof
against freezing.
4.1
Main and stand-by cooling water pumps are
to be provided for each fresh water cooling system.
4.2
Main cooling water pumps may be driven
directly by the main or auxiliary engines which they
are intended to cool provided that a sufficient supply
of cooling water is assured under all operating conditions.
I.
1.
General
4.3
The drives of stand-by cooling water pumps
are to be independent of the main engines.
1.1
Pressure lines connected to air compressors
are to be fitted with non-return valves at the compressor outlet.
4.4
Stand-by cooling water pumps are to have the
same capacity as main cooling water pumps.
1.2
M.
4.5
Main engines are to be fitted with at least one
main and one stand-by cooling water pump. Where
according to the construction of the engines more than
one water cooling circuit is necessary, a stand-by
pump is to be fitted for each main cooling water
pump.
4.6
For fresh cooling water pumps of essential
auxiliary engines the requirements for sea water cooling pumps in G.5.3 may be applied.
4.7
A stand-by cooling water pump of a cooling
water system may be used as a stand-by pump for
another system provided that the necessary pipe connections are arranged. The shut-off valves in these
connections are to be secured against unintended operation.
4.8
Equipment providing emergency cooling
from another system can be approved if the plant and
the system are suitable for this purpose.
4.9
For plants with more than one main engine
the requirements for sea cooling water pumps in G.5.2
may be applied.
5.
Temperature control
Cooling water circuits are to be provided with temperature controls in accordance with the requirements.
Control devices whose failure may impair the func-
1.3
Starting air lines may not be used as filling
lines for air receivers.
1.4
Only type-tested hose assemblies made of
metallic materials may be used in starting air lines of
diesel engines which are permanently kept under pressure.
1.5
The starting air line to each engine is to be
fitted with a non-return valve and a drain.
1.6
Tyfons are to be connected to at least two
compressed air receivers.
1.7
A safety valve is to be fitted downstream of
each pressure-reducing valve.
1.8
Pressure water tanks and other tanks connected to the compressed air system are to be considered as pressure vessels and shall comply with the
requirements in Section 9e for the working pressure of
the compressed air system.
1.9
For compressed air connections for blowing
through sea chests refer to G.1.5.
1.10
Requirements for starting engines with compressed air, see Section 9b, H.2.
Chapter 8
Page 9d20
2.
Section 9d
2.1
Control air systems for essential consumers
are to be provided with the necessary means of air
treatment.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
1.1.2
Bilge suctions are normally to be located on
both sides of the vessel. For compartments located
fore and aft in the vessel, one bilge suction may be
considered sufficient provided that it is capable of
completely draining the relevant compartment.
2.2
Pressure reducing valves in the control air
system of main engines are to be redundant.
1.1.3
Spaces located forward of the collision bulkhead and aft of the stern tube bulkhead and not connected to the general bilge system are to be drained by
other suitable means of adequate capacity.
J.
1.1.4
The required pipe thickness of bilge lines is
to be in accordance with Table 9d.5.
1.
Pipe layout
1.1
Engine exhaust gas pipes are to be installed
separately from each other, taking into account the
structural fire protection. Other designs are to be submitted for approval. The same applies to boiler exhaust gas pipes.
1.2
Account is to be taken of thermal expansion
when laying out and suspending the lines.
1.3
Where exhaust gas lines discharge near water
level, provisions are to be taken to prevent water from
entering the engines.
2.
Silencers
Water drains
Insulation
K.
Bilge Systems
1.
Bilge lines
1.1
1.1.1
Bilge lines and bilge suctions are to be so
arranged that the bilges can be completely drained
even under unfavourable trim conditions.
1.2
1.2.1
Bilge pipes may not be led through tanks for
lubricating oil or drinking water.
1.2.2
Bilge pipes from spaces not accessible during
the voyage if running through fuel tanks located above
double bottom are to be fitted with a non-return valve
directly at the point of entry into the tank.
1.3
1.3.1
Bilge suctions are to be so arranged as not to
impede the cleaning of bilges and bilge wells. They
are to be fitted with easily detachable, corrosionresistant strums.
1.3.2
Emergency bilge suctions are to be arranged
such that they are accessible, with free flow and at a
suitable distance from the tank top or the vessel's
bottom.
1.3.3
For the size and design of bilge wells see
Chapter 1 Hull Structures, Section 8, B.5.3.
1.3.4
Bilge alarms of main- and auxiliary machinery spaces, see Section 9a, E.5. and Section 12.
1.4
Bilge valves
1.4.1
Valves in connecting pipes between the bilge
and the seawater and ballast water system, as well as
between the bilge connections of different compartments, are to be so arranged that even in the event of
faulty operation or intermediate positions of the
valves, penetration of seawater through the bilge system will be safely prevented.
1.4.2
Bilge discharge pipes are to be fitted with
shut-off valves and reverse-flow protection at the
vessel's shell.
1.4.3
Bilge valves are to be arranged so as to be
always accessible irrespective of the ballast and loading condition of the vessel.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
1.5
Section 9d
Reverse-flow protection
Chapter 8
Page 9d21
3.
Bilge pumps
1.5.1
A screw-down non-return valve or a combination of a non-return valve without positive means of
closing and a shut-off valve are recognized as reverse
flow protection.
3.1
1.6
dH
Pipe layout
1.6.1
To prevent the ingress of ballast and seawater
into the vessel through the bilge system two means of
reverse-flow protection are to be fitted in the bilge
connections.
One of such means of protection is to be fitted in each
suction line.
1.6.2
The direct bilge suction and the emergency
suction need only have one means of reverse-flow
protection as specified in 1.5.1.
(3)
3.2
The minimum capacity shall be 4/3 of the
required fire pump capacity.
3.3
Where centrifugal pumps are used for bilge
pumping, they shall be self-priming or priming units
are to be provided.
3.4
1.6.3
Where a direct seawater connection is arranged for attached bilge pumps to protect them
against running dry, the bilge suctions are also to be
fitted with two reverse flow protecting devices.
2.
3.4.2
In the event of failure of one of the required
bilge pumps, one pump each has to be available for
fire fighting and bilge pumping.
2.1
The calculated values according to formulae
(1) to (2) are to be rounded up to the next higher
nominal diameter.
2.2
a)
b)
[mm]
[mm]
(1)
(2)
On vessels of less than 100 gross tonnage, one mechanically driven bilge pump is sufficient. The second
independent bilge pump may be a permanently installed manual bilge pump. The engine-driven bilge
pump may be coupled to the main propulsion plant.
dH
3.5
d H = 1, 68 L ( B + H ) + 25
3.4.3
Bilge ejectors are acceptable as bilge pumping arrangements provided that there is an independent
supply of driving water.
4.
4.1
Machinery spaces
dz
4.1.1
On vessels of more than 100 gross tonnage,
the bilges of every main machinery space shall be
capable of being pumped simultaneously as follows:
a)
b)
c)
2.3
Minimum diameter
Chapter 8
Page 9d22
Section 9d
4.1.2
On vessels with Class Notation K the emergency bilge suction may be dispensed with.
4.1.3
If the vessel's propulsion plant is located in
several spaces, a direct suction in accordance with
4.1.1 b) is to be provided in each watertight compartment in addition to branch bilge suctions in accordance with 4.1.1 a).
4.5
I - Part 1
GL 2007
4.6
4.1.4
The diameter of the emergency suction shall
be equal to the diameter of the pump's suction line.
The emergency bilge suction must be connected to the
pump suction line by a reverse-flow protection according to 1.5.
L.
1.
Holds
On vessels with only one hold, bilge wells of sufficient size are to be provided fore and aft.
4.3
Chain lockers
Bilge testing
2.1
A sludge tank is to be provided. For the fittings and mountings of sludge tanks, see Q.
2.2
A self-priming pump is to be provided for
sludge discharge to reception facilities. The capacity
of the pump shall be such that the sludge tank can be
emptied in a reasonable time.
4.4
2.3
A separate discharge line is to be provided for
discharge of fuel/oil residues to reception facilities.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
M.
Section 9d
General
1.1
Arrangement
1.1.1
All tanks, void spaces, etc. are to be fitted at
their highest position with air pipes or overflow pipes.
1.2
Chapter 8
Page 9d23
1.2.1
The number and arrangement of the air pipes
is to be so performed that the tanks can be aerated and
de-aerated without exceeding the tank design pressure
by over- or underpressure.
1.2.2
Tanks which extend from side to side of the
vessel shall be fitted with an air/overflow pipe at each
side. At the narrow ends of double bottom tanks in the
forward and aft parts of the vessel, only one air/ overflow pipe is sufficient.
1.3
1.1.3
Air and overflow pipes passing through cargo
holds are to be protected against damage.
1.1.4
For the height above deck of air and overflow
pipes, see Section 2, Table 2.2.
1.1.5
Air pipes from unheated leakage oil tanks and
lubricating oil tanks may terminate at clearly visible
positions in the engine room. Where these tanks form
part of the vessel's hull, the air pipes are to terminate
above the freeboard deck.
1.1.6
Air pipes from lubricating oil tanks and leakage oil tanks which terminate in the engine room are
to be provided with funnels and pipes for safe drainage in the event of possible overflow.
filling
mode
The overflow pipes of changeable tanks shall be capable of being separated from the fuel overflow system.
1.1.9
Where the air and overflow pipes of several
tanks situated at the vessel's shell lead to a common
line, the connections to this line are to be above the
freeboard deck, as far as practicable but at least so
high above the deepest load waterline that should a
leakage occur in one tank due to damage to the hull or
listing of the vessel, fuel or water cannot flow into
another tank.
1.1.10 The air and overflow pipes of lubricating oil
and fuel tanks shall be kept separate.
1.1.11 For the cross-sectional area of air pipes and
air/overflow pipes, see Table 9d.15.
by pumping
LR
LR
1/3 f
per tank
1,25 f
per tank 1
Explanatory note:
LR
= air pipe
LR = air-/overflow pipe
f
1
1.1.7
Air pipes for cofferdams/void spaces with
bilge connections are to be extended above the open
deck.
1.1.8
Where fuel service tanks are fitted with
change-over overflow pipes, the change-over devices
are to be so arranged that the overflow is led to one of
the storage tanks.
by gravity
Cross-sectional areas of
air and overflow pipes
Overflow systems
1.4.1
The overflow collecting manifolds of fuel
tanks are to be led at a sufficient gradient to an overflow tank of sufficient capacity.
Chapter 8
Page 9d24
Table 9d.16
Section 9d
AR
Stand-pipe
1/3 f
Relief valve
1/3 f 1
min. 1,25 F
1/3 F at chest
min. 1,25 F
1,25 F
Manifold
1/3 F
min. 1,25 F
Overflow tank
1/3 F
Overflow chest
Explanatory notes:
LR
R
AR
f
F
1
2
1.5
Remarks
LR
Filling
Overflow
system
I - Part 1
GL 2007
=
=
=
=
=
air pipe
overflow pipe
drainage line
cross-sectional area of tank filling pipe
cross-sectional area of main filling pipe
1/3 f only for tanks in which an overflow is prevented by structural arrangements.
Determined in accordance with 1.4
Sounding pipes
2.1
General
cross-sectional area of
stand-pipe 1,25 F
cross-sectional area of
relief valve 1,25 F
2.1.1
Sounding pipes are to be provided for tanks,
cofferdams and void spaces with bilge connections
and for bilges and bilge wells in spaces which are not
accessible at all times.
2.1.4
Sounding pipes which terminate below the
deepest load waterline are to be fitted with selfclosing shut-off devices. Such sounding pipes are
only permissible in spaces which are accessible at all
times.
All other sounding pipes are to be extended to the
open deck. The sounding pipe openings have to be
always accessible and fitted with watertight closures.
2.1.5
Sounding pipes of tanks are to be provided
close to the top of the tank with holes for equalising
the pressure.
2.1.6
In holds, a sounding pipe is to be fitted to
each bilge well.
2.1.7
Where level alarms are arranged in each
bilge well of cargo holds, the sounding pipes may be
dispensed with. The level alarms are to be independent from each other and are to be type approved by
GL 5.
2.1.8
Sounding pipes passing through cargo holds
are to be laid in protected spaces or they are to be
protected against damage.
2.2
2.1.2
Where tanks are fitted with remote level
indicators which are type approved by GL, the arrangement of sounding pipes can be dispensed with.
2.2.1
Sounding pipes which terminate below the
open deck are to be provided with self-closing devices as well as with self-closing test valves, see also
Q.2.3.3.6.
2.1.3
As far as possible, sounding pipes are to be
laid straight and are to extend as near as possible to
the bottom.
Section 9d
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Chapter 8
Page 9d25
Tanks
with
same
media
Tanks
with
disparate
media
above
freeboard
without
with
deck
shut-off on shut-off on
ship's side ship's side
Scupper
pipes from
open deck
Cargo
holds
Machinery
spaces
A
B
Discharge
pipes of
pumps for
sanitary
systems
Outside pipe
diameter da
[mm]
- 82,5
- 114,3
- 139,7
- 177,8
- 457,2
Table 9d.17b Minimum wall thickness of air, overflow, sounding and sanitary pipes
below
weather
deck
Discharge
and scupper
pipes leading
directly
overboard
38
88,9
101,6
127
152,4
159
193,7
219,1
244,5
above
weather
deck
B1
C1
4,5
4,5
4,5
4,5
4,5
5
5,4
5,9
6,3
7,1
8
8
8,8
10
10
12,5
12,5
12,5
6,3
6,3
7,1
8
8,8
8,8
8,8
8,8
8,8
2.3
Cross-sections of pipes
2.3.1
Sounding pipes shall have an inside diameter
of at least 32 mm.
2.3.2
The diameters of sounding pipes which pass
through refrigerated holds at temperatures below 0 C
are to be increased to an inside diameter of 50 mm.
2.3.3
The minimum wall thicknesses of sounding
pipes are to be in accordance with Tables 9d.17a and
9d.17b.
N.
1.
2.2.2
Sounding pipes shall not be located in the
vicinity of oil firing equipment, machine components
with high surface temperatures or electrical equipment.
2.2.3
Sounding pipes shall not terminate in accommodation or service spaces.
2.2.4
pipes.
1.1
For the design and arrangement of drinking
water tanks, see Chapter 1 Hull Structures, Section 12.
1.2
On vessels with ice class E1 to E4 and higher
drinking water tanks located at the vessel's side are to
be provided with means for tank heating to prevent
freezing.
Chapter 8
Page 9d26
2.
Section 9d
2.1
Filling connections are to be located sufficiently high above deck and are to be fitted with a
closing device.
2.1.1
pipes.
2.2
Air/overflow pipes are to be extended above
the open deck and are to be protected against the entry
of insects by a fine mesh screen.
O.
Sewage Systems
1.
General
1.1
Vessels of 400 gross tonnage and above and
vessels of less than 400 gross tonnage which are certified to carry more than 15 persons and with keel laying on or after 2003-09-27 are to be fitted with the
following equipment:
a holding tank
I - Part 1
GL 2007
1.2
A pipeline for the discharge of sewage to a
reception facility is to be arranged. The pipeline is to
be provided with a standard discharge connection.
3.1
Drinking water pipe lines are not to be connected to pipe lines carrying other media.
1.3
National requirements are to be observed
additionally.
3.2
Drinking water pipe lines are not to be laid
through tanks which do not contain drinking water.
2.
3.3
Drinking water supply to tanks which do not
contain drinking water (e.g. expansion tanks of the
fresh water cooling system) is to be made by means of
an open funnel or with means of preventing backflow.
4.
For design, equipment, installation and testing of pressure water tanks and calorifiers, Section 9e is to be
observed.
5.
5.1
Separate drinking water pumps are to be
provided for drinking water systems.
5.2
The pressure lines of the pumps of drinking
water pressure tanks are to be fitted with screw-down
non-return valves.
6.
Arrangement
2.1
For scuppers and overboard discharges see
Chapter 1 Hull Structures, Section 21.
2.2
The minimum wall thicknesses of sanitary
pipes below freeboard and bulkhead decks are specified in Tables 9d.17a and 9d.17b.
2.3
For discharge lines located above freeboard
deck steel pipes according to Table 9d.6, Group N
may be used.
2.4
For sanitary discharge lines located below
freeboard deck within a watertight compartment,
which terminate in a sewage tank or in a sanitary
treatment plant, pipes according to 2.3 may be used.
2.5
2.5.1
Sewage tanks are to be fitted with air pipes
leading to the open deck. For air pipe closing devices
see M.1.3.
2.5.2
Sewage tanks are to be fitted with a filling
connection, a rinsing connection and a level alarm.
2.5.3
The discharge lines of sewage tanks and
sewage treatment tanks are to be fitted at the vessel'
side with screw-down non-return valves.
When the valve is not arranged directly at the vessels
side, the thickness of the pipe is to be according to
Table 9d.17b, column B.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9d
2.5.4
A second means of reverse-flow protection is
to be fitted in the suction or delivery line of the sewage pump from sewage tanks or sewage treatment
plants.
2.5.5
Where at a heeling of the vessel of 5 at port
or starboard, the lowest inside opening of the sewage
system lies on the summer load line or below, the
discharge line of the sewage collecting tank is to be
fitted in addition to the required reverse-flow protection device according to 2.5.4 with a gate valve directly at the shell plating. In this case the reverse-flow
protection device needs not to be of screw-down type.
2.5.6
Bilge pumps may not be used for emptying
sewage tanks.
Q.
1.
General
1.1
Scope
1.
Hose assemblies and compensators made of
non-metallic and metallic materials may be used according to their suitability in fuel-, lubricating oil-,
hydraulic oil-, bilge-, ballast-, fresh water cooling-,
sea water cooling-, compressed air-, auxiliary steam-,
and exhaust gas systems as well as in secondary piping systems.
2.
Hoses and compensators used in the systems
mentioned in 1. are to be of approved type 6.
3.
Hose assemblies and compensators made of
non-metallic materials are not permitted in permanently pressurized starting air lines. Furthermore it is
not permitted to use hose assemblies and compensators in fuel injection piping systems of combustion
engines.
4.
Hose assemblies and compensators for the
use in fuel-, lubricating oil-, hydraulic oil-, bilge- and
sea water systems are to be flame-resistant.
5.
Non-metallic hose assemblies and compensators are to be located at visible and accessible positions.
6.
Where hose assemblies and compensators are
installed in the vicinity of hot components they shall
be provided with approved heat-resistant sleeves.
7.
Manufacturers of hose assemblies and compensators 7 are to be recognized by GL.
Definitions
P.
Chapter 8
Page 9d27
Tank plan
A tank plan is to be submitted for approval in triplicate. It should include particulars regarding arrangement, medium and volume of the tanks as well as
information about the maximum height of the overflow level.
2.
2.1
2.2.1
Chapter 8
Page 9d28
Section 9d
2.3.1
For filling and suction lines see E.; for air,
overflow and sounding pipes see M.
2.3.2
Service tanks are to be so arranged that water
and residues can deposit despite of ship movement.
Fuel tanks located above the double bottom are to be
fitted with water drains with self-closing shut-off
valves.
2.3.3
Tank gauges
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Sounding pipes are either to terminate in locations remote from ignition hazards or they are to
be effectively screened to prevent that spillage
through the sounding pipes may come into contact with a source of ignition.
The sounding pipes are to be fitted with selfclosing shut-off devices and self-closing test
cook.
2.4
2.4.1
Appliances, mountings and fittings not forming part of the fuel tank equipment may be fitted to
tank walls only by means of intermediate supports. To
free-standing tanks only components forming part of
the tank equipment may be fitted.
2.4.2
Valves and pipe connections are to be attached to doubler flanges welded to the tank wall.
Holes for attachment bolts shall not be drilled in the
tank wall.
Instead of doubler flanges, thick walled pipe stubs
with flange connections may be welded into the tank
walls.
2.5
2.6
sounding pipes
oil-level gauges with flat glasses and selfclosing shut-off valves at the connections to the
tank and protected against external damage
2.3.3.2 For fuel storage tanks the provision of sounding pipes is sufficient. The sounding pipes may be
dispensed with, if the tanks are fitted with oil-level
indicating devices which have been type-tested by GL.
2.3.3.3 Fuel oil settling and daily service tanks are to
be fitted with oil-level indicating devices or oil-level
gauges according to 2.3.3.1. For vessels under German
flag only type approved oil-level gauges are allowed.
2.3.3.4 Sight glasses and oil gauges fitted directly on
the side of the tank and cylindrical glass oil gauges are
not permitted.
2.3.3.5 Sounding pipes of fuel tanks may not terminate in accommodation spaces, nor shall they terminate in spaces where the risk of ignition of spillage
from the sounding pipes consists.
2.3.3.6 Sounding pipes should terminate outside
machinery spaces. Where this is not possible, the
following requirements are to be met:
3.
3.1
Tank arrangement
For the arrangement of the tanks 2.2.2.1 and analogously Section 3 are to be applied.
3.2
3.2.1
For filling and suction lines of lubricating oil
and hydraulic oil tanks, see F.2.2.
3.2.2
For tank sounding devices for oil tanks, see
2.3.3.1 and 2.3.3.4.
3.2.3
For the mounting of appliances and fittings
on the tanks 2.4 is to be applied.
3.3
3.3.1
Lubricating oil circulation tanks should be
sufficiently dimensioned to ensure that the dwell time
is long enough for settling out of air bubbles, residues,
etc. With a maximum permissible filling level of about
85 %, the tanks shall be large enough to hold at least
the lubricating oil contained in the entire circulation
system including the contents of gravity tanks.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9d
3.3.2
Measures, such as the provision of baffles or
limber holes consistent with structural strength requirements, particularly relating to the machinery bed
plate, are to be provided to ensure that the entire content of the tank remains in circulation.
Limber holes should be located as near the bottom of
the tank as possible. Suction pipe connections should
be placed as far as practicable away from the oil drain
pipe so that neither air nor sludge may be sucked in
irrespective of the heeling angle of the vessel likely to
be encountered during service.
3.3.3
Lubricating oil circulating tanks are to be
equipped with sufficiently dimensioned vents.
4.
4.1
Chapter 8
Page 9d29
4.2.1
For tank sounding devices 2.3.3.2 and 2.3.3.5
are to be applied.
4.2.2
5.
5.1
Storage of gas bottles shall be located on
open deck or in well ventilated spaces which only
open to open deck.
5.2
Gaseous fuel systems for domestic purposes
shall comply with an acceptable standard. National
requirement, if any, are to be observed.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 9e
Chapter 8
Page 9e1
Section 9e
Boilers and Pressure Vessels
A.
3.
1.
Scope
3.1
Steam boilers
1.1
Steam boilers
raising the temperature of water above the boiling point corresponding to atmospheric pressure
(hot water generators)
For warm water generators with a permissible discharge temperature of not more than 120 C and all
systems incorporating steam or hot water generators
which are heated solely by steam or hot liquids B.
applies regarding materials, design calculations and
manufacturing principles. For equipment and testing
the requirements of 2. - 4. apply.
2.
General principles
2.1
Steam and hot water generators and thermal
oil heaters as defined in 1. are to be manufactured,
equipped and tested in accordance with the GL Rules
according to Chapter 2 Machinery Installations,
Sections 7a and 7b.
Chapter 8
Page 9e2
Section 9e
B.
Pressure Vessels
1.
Scope
General principles
4.
Following installation on board, a check is to be carried out on the fitting of the pressure vessels, the
equipment and on the arrangement and setting of
safety appliances. Operating tests are to be performed
wherever necessary.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
C.
1.
General
1.1
Oil firing equipment for steam boilers or
thermal oil heaters is subject to the GL Rules according to Chapter 2 Machinery Installations, Section 9,
B.
1.2
Where oil burners are to be used additionally
for burning waste oil and oil sludge, the necessary
measures are to be agreed with GL Head Office in
each case.
1.3
The oil burners of warm water generators,
oil-fired heaters and small heating appliances which
are located in the engine room or in spaces containing
equipment important to the operation of the machinery
space are subject to the requirements of the Rules
defined in Chapter 2 Machinery Installations, Section 9, C.
2.
Exemption
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 10
Refrigeration Installations
Chapter 8
Page 101
Section 10
Refrigeration Installations
A.
General
4.
1.
Scope
4.1
1.1
2.
C.
D.
F.
J.1.
M.1.5
Refrigerants
Refrigerating Machinery Spaces
Pressure Vessels and Apparatus
Safety Equipment
Escape from refrigerated or air-cooler
spaces, etc.
b)
c)
d)
Drawings of the compressors, such as longitudinal and transverse sections, and a workshop
drawing of the crankshaft or rotors.
e)
f)
Drawings of all vessels and equipment under refrigerant pressure, e.g. condensers, evaporators,
oil separators, receivers as well as brine/RSW
coolers together with details of the materials
used.
g)
h)
Drawings showing the arrangement and equipment of the refrigerated spaces with details of
air ventilation including airducts.
i)
j)
k)
l)
m)
Definitions
Within the scope of this Section refrigerating installations on board fishing vessels are:
cargo refrigerating installations for the refrigeration of insulated brine/seawater tanks (RSW)
The provisions assume that the refrigerating installations are permanently installed and belong to the vessel.
3.
Safety requirements
a)
3.1
For the Classification and Characters of Classification of refrigeration installations see GL Rules
Part 0 Classification and Surveys, Section 2.
3.2
For surveys of refrigeration installations see
GL Rules Part 0 Classification and Surveys, Section 3.
Chapter 8
Page 102
5.
Section 10
Refrigeration Installations
I - Part 1
GL 2007
3.
5.1
The selecting and testing of materials is subject to the GL Rules II Materials and Welding, Part
1 Metallic Materials, Chapters 1 4.
3.1
At least two complete refrigerating units
including compressors, condensers, receivers (if applicable) and prime mover are to be provided.
5.2
Components under refrigerant pressure are
required to undergo material testing as a matter of
principle. Specific requirements are stated individually
within this Section.
3.2
Where several compressors operate in a
closed circuit with one condenser and, where installed,
one brine cooling evaporator, this also counts as one
refrigerating unit.
5.3
Material tests are to be performed on the
crankshafts of reciprocating compressors and the rotors of screw compressors with a calculated journal
diameter of more than 50 mm. Works Certificates are
sufficient in case of journal diameters 50 mm.
3.3
Where only two refrigerating units are installed, each compressor shall be capable of working
with each condenser and, where applicable, with each
brine cooling evaporator.
5.4
GL reserve the right to extend material testing to other important plant components.
3.4
In case of vessels with Class Notation K and
with refrigerated spaces less than 400 m3, consideration will be given to the installation of only one condensing unit.
4.
B.
1.
Design principles
1.1
Refrigeration systems shall be so designed,
constructed, tested and installed as to take account of
the safety of the system and also emission of chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs) or any other ozone-depleting
substances from the refrigerant held in quantities or
concentrations which are hazardous to human health
or to the environment and shall be also to the satisfaction of the Administration of the country of registration.
1.2
Refrigeration systems shall be adequately
protected against vibration, shock, expansion, shrinkage, etc. and shall be provided with an automatic
safety control device to prevent a dangerous rise in
temperature and pressure.
2.
Refrigerating capacity
4.1
The refrigerating capacity of the installation
is to be rated in such a way that the required temperature(s) in holds or tanks can be maintained when any
of the refrigerating units are out of operation. Fully
loaded condition is to be assumed.
The required temperature is the temperature on which
the refrigerating capacity calculation is based and
which is certified in the Refrigerating Installation
Certificate.
4.2
Where additional plants, such as quick freezers, icemakers, etc. are connected to the refrigerating
installation, the reserve refrigerating unit may be taken
into account when the conditions are most unfavourable.
5.
5.1
The calculation of the required refrigerating
capacity is to be based on a seawater temperature of at
least 32 C and an ambient air temperature of at least
40 C with 55 % relative humidity unless other values
are agreed with GL in consideration of special operation.
5.2
The calculation shall likewise be based on the
area enveloping the refrigerated spaces/tanks on the
inside of the insulation, where such spaces are adjacent to non-cooled spaces, cooled spaces at higher
temperatures, the ambient air or seawater.
6.
6.1
Automated refrigerating installations are to
be so equipped that they can also be operated with
manual control.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 10
Refrigeration Installations
Chapter 8
Page 103
6.2
Input units and actuating devices are to be
type-tested.
6.3
Measures shall be taken to prevent freezing
of refrigerated seawater.
7.
6.4
Defrosting arrangements for air coolers are to
be controlled by a defrosting program.
6.5
Fault alarms
Table 10.1
Display
Pressure 1
Running
Pressure 1
Discharge line: - pressure
Compressor
- temperature
Temperature 1
Pressure 1
Suction line: - pressure
- temperature
Temperature 1
Intermediate stage (if fitted)
Pressure 1
Circulation pumps
Running
Available pumps
Running
Secondary circuit
Brine/CO2 cooler inlet/outlet Temperature 1
Brine/CO2
Pressure line
Pressure 1
Header tank
Level 1
Cooling water pumps
Running
Available cooling water pump Running
Condenser
Cooling water inlet
Temperature 1
Cooling water outlet
Temperature 1
Refrigerating
Lock-in alarm
machinery space
Refrigerant
leakage
Refrigerated
spaces
Alarm
Activated
Low
Stop
High
High/low
Low
High
High
Stop
Start
High (outlet)
Low
Low
Stop
Start
-High
Reaction
Automatic stop
Automatic stop
Automatic stop (high)
Automatic stop
Automatic stop
For auto start
Manually activated
Concentration in refrigerating
machinery space, pump rooms,
production areas
Concentration in refrigerated
spaces
Detection system
Temperature measuring
Temperature
Left/right hand cooler delivery
Temperature
air/return air
Lock-in alarm
Manually activated
Ventilation fan
(full/half speed)
Defrost
Stop/running
Time duration
High
Failure
Disabled
Chapter 8
Page 104
Section 10
C.
Refrigerants
1.
Classification
Refrigeration Installations
Table 10.2
Chlorodifluormethane
R134a Tetrafluorethane
CHCIF2
CH2F-CF3
R404A R125/143a/134a(44/52/4%)
R407A R32/125/134a(20/40/40%)
Refrigerant
High-pressure side
(HP)
Low-pressure side
(LP)
R22
R134a
22,5
13,9
17,0
10,6
R404A
R407A
25,0
25,2
19,7
19,8
R407B
R407C
26,5
23,9
20,9
18,8
R410A
R507
33,6
25,6
26,4
20,2
R717 (NH3)
R744 (CO2)
24,0
17,5
R407B R32/125/134a(10/70/20%)
R407C R32/125/134a(23/25/52%)
R410A R32/125(50/50%)
R507
R125/143a(50/50%)
R744
Carbon Dioxide
CO2
Ammonia
NH3
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Working pressures
2.2
Within the meaning of these Rules, the lowpressure side of the plant includes all parts exposed to
the evaporation pressure of the refrigerant. However,
these parts are also subject to the design pressure PR
for the high-pressure side if, e.g. for hot gas defrosting, a switch-over of the system can subject them to
high pressure.
Medium-pressure vessels of two-stage plants form
part of the high pressure side.
3.
3.1
Reserve supplies of refrigerants may be
stored only in steel bottles approved for this purpose
by the competent authorities of the country of registration.
3.2
The filling level of these bottles shall be
suitable for tropical conditions, unless operating range
of the fishing vessel is restricted to cold climate zones.
2.1
For the common refrigerants, the allowable
working pressures PB (design pressures PR) are laid
down in Table 10.2.
3.3
Bottles containing refrigerant are to be securely anchored in an upright position and protected
against overheating.
3.4
Bottles containing refrigerant may be stored
only in well ventilated spaces specially prepared for
this purpose or in refrigerating machinery spaces.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 10
Refrigeration Installations
3.5
On fishing vessels where, with due regard for
the provisions of D., there is no refrigerating machinery space and the refrigerating machinery is installed
in the main or auxiliary engine room, GL may permit
exceptions to 3.4 in the case of refrigerants belonging
to Group 1. In this case storage bottles up to a maximum of 20 % of the total refrigerant charge for immediate replenishing of the system may be kept in the
main or auxiliary engine room.
D.
1.
Definition
2.1
Any space containing refrigerating machinery
including condensers and gas tanks utilizing toxic
refrigerants shall be separated from any adjacent space
by gastight bulkheads.
2.2
When the containment according to 2.1 is not
practicable, due to the size of the vessel, the refrigerating system may be installed in the machinery space
provided that the quantity of refrigerant used will not
cause danger to persons in the machinery space,
should all the gas escape and provided that an alarm is
fitted to give warning of dangerous concentration of
gas should any leakage occur in the compartment.
This arrangement may be considered for a total refrigerant charge of less than 25 kg.
2.3
Refrigerating machinery is to be installed in
such a way that sufficient space is left for operation,
servicing and repair.
3.
3.1
Refrigeration systems using ammonia in
charges exceeding 25 kg are to be installed in refrigerating machinery spaces separated by gas tight divisions from other ship spaces and service rooms.
3.2
Regardless of the type of refrigerant used, the
doors of refrigerating machinery spaces shall not give
access to living quarters or corridors in the accommodation area. The doors must open outwards and be
self-closing.
3.3
Where refrigeration systems operate with
ammonia spaces accommodating the refrigerating
machinery are to be equipped as follows:
a)
Chapter 8
Page 105
b)
3.4
Provision shall be made for the bilge pumping or drainage of refrigerating machinery spaces.
Where installations are operated with ammonia, the
refrigerating machinery spaces shall be provided with
drainage devices leading to a place where refrigerant
presents no danger to the vessel or to the persons on
board.
4.
4.1
Refrigerant leak detectors need to be fitted in
case of NH3 and/or CO2 in any area where leakage
may occur, e.g. refrigerating machinery spaces, fish
processing area, valve stations, refrigerating cargo
holds. Welded pipelines passing through passageways
or access ducts are not considered possible leakage
areas.
4.2
Leak detection systems are to be type tested.
Set points for alarms shall be adjusted as given in
Table 10.1.
4.3
Leak detectors are to activate audible and
visual alarms located both inside and outside the affected space. The alarm is to be linked to the general
machinery alarm system and is to trip an alarm on the
bridge as well as in the engine control room.
5.
Ventilation
5.1
Refrigerating machinery spaces shall have a
suitably arranged, mechanical ventilation system. The
ventilation system shall be activated either manually or automatically by the detector system. Where
Group 1 refrigerants are used, at least the exhaust air
shall be conveyed into the open air separately from the
Chapter 8
Page 106
Section 10
Refrigeration Installations
b)
I - Part 1
GL 2007
1.2
Other compressor drives, like diesel engines,
turbines, etc. shall comply with Section 9b and the
relevant Sections of Chapter 2 Machinery Installations.
1.3
Air-cooled compressors are to be designed
for an air temperature of at least 45 C.
1.4
Seawater-cooled compressors are to be designed for a minimum inlet temperature of 32 C. The
cooling water spaces of compressors are to be protected against excessive overpressure by safety valves
or rupture safety devices, unless provided with a free
outlet.
2.
For the design and construction of refrigerant compressors, see GL Rules defined in Chapter 10 Refrigerating Installations, Section 1, E.
3.
Material testing
Equipment
4.1
Compressors are to be equipped with devices
such as pressure relief valves, rupture discs, etc.
which, if the maximum allowable working pressure is
exceeded, will equalize the pressures on the discharge
and suction sides. Semi-hermetic compressors in
automatic installations may be exempted from this
requirement, provided that they are protected by overpressure safety switches and can be operated with
permanently open shutoff valves in such a way that
the safety valves fitted to the installation remain effective.
4.2
Pressure gauges and thermometers are to be
fitted in accordance with J.2.1 and J.2.2.
5.6
Exhaust air ducts of fans serving refrigerating
machinery spaces are to be gastight inside the vessel.
4.3
A manufacturer's plate with the following
information is to be fixed to each refrigerant compressor:
manufacturer
year of construction
refrigerant
maximum allowable working pressure PB [bar]
E.
Refrigerant Compressors
1.
General
5.
1.1
Where the compressors are electrically
driven, the motors and other items of electrical plant
shall comply with the Sections 11a 11 l.
Testing
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 10
Refrigeration Installations
F.
1.
1.1
General
Pressure vessels and apparatus under refrigerant pressure shall comply with the GL Rules in Chapter 2
Machinery Installations, Section 8.
1.2
Safety devices
1.3.1
Pressure vessels and apparatus which contain
liquid refrigerant and which can be shut off are to be
fitted with a safety valve, see J.1.
1.3.2
Where more than one pressure vessel are
provided with one common safety valve, any closing
device fitted between the pressure vessels is to be
equipped as to secure in the open position. A warning
sign with the following wording is to be fitted in the
vicinity of each closing device:
"Valve is to be secured in open position and may be
closed for repairs only".
1.3.3
Filters and dryers need not be fitted with
safety valves.
1.4
After completion, pressure vessels and apparatus under refrigerant pressure are to be subjected to the pressure and tightness tests specified in K.
2.
Brine tanks
2.1
General
2.1.1
The term "brine" as a cooling medium means
a solution of industrial salts. The use of other media
with a low freezing point requires the special approval
of GL.
2.1.2
In this context, brine tanks do not include
brine cooling evaporators. The latter shall comply
with the requirements for pressure vessels and apparatus under refrigerant pressure, as set out in 1.
2.1.3
2.1.5
Brine tanks which can be shut off shall be
protected against excessive pressure rises due to the
thermal expansion of the brine by the provision of
safety valves or by mechanism for interlocking the
shutoff devices in the open position.
2.2
Testing
Material testing
The materials of components under refrigerant pressure must be tested in accordance with the GL Rules
defined in Chapter 2 Machinery Installations, Section 8, B.
1.3
Chapter 8
Page 107
2.1.4
Brine systems have to be equipped with air
pipes which cannot be closed off and with brine compensating tanks.
3.
3.1
Each RSW tank is to be provided with appropriate venting and sounding arrangements. The arrangements to assess the liquid levels in the tanks may
be permanently installed or be a temporary arrangement.
3.2
Where a RSW tank is intended to carry dry
fish in bulk, the following arrangements are to be
provided:
4.
Air coolers
4.1
General
4.1.1
Air coolers for direct evaporation 1 count as
apparatus under refrigerant pressure and are therefore
subject to the requirements in 1. Notwithstanding this,
safety devices are required only for flooded evaporators.
4.1.2
Air coolers operated by indirect evaporation,
insofar as brine is used as the cooling medium, shall
not be galvanized internally.
4.1.3
Air coolers are to be provided with drip trays
and adequate drains.
4.1.4
Air coolers are to be provided with defrosting
equipment according to M.2.
4.1.5
Air coolers shall be made of corrosion resistant material or be externally protected against corrosion by galvanizing.
Chapter 8
Page 108
Section 10
Refrigeration Installations
I - Part 1
GL 2007
4.1.6
Where finned-tube or multi-plate type air
coolers are used, the distance between the fins or
plates shall be not less than 10 mm, at least on the air
inlet side. In this context, the air inlet side is taken to
mean of the length of the cooler measured in direction of air flow.
4.1.7
Depending on the type of air circulation system employed, the air coolers are to be subdivided by
shut offs in such a way that, even after breakdown of
one air cooler section, the cooling of the refrigerated
space can be maintained.
1.1.8
Pipe sections of CO2 piping systems which
can be isolated are to be protected by a pressure relief
valve. At least one pressure relief valve is to be fitted
at the CO2 piping system which ensures safe blow-off
of CO2-vapour directly to a safe location above deck.
1.2
4.2
1.2.1
Materials for refrigerant pipes are to be tested
in accordance with the GL Rules defined in Chapter 2
Machinery Installations, Section 11, B.
Material testing
G.
1.
1.1
General
1.1.7
Shut-off valves are to be provided to allow
the replacement of hose assemblies without loss of
refrigerant.
Material testing
1.2.2
Refrigerant valves and fittings are subject to
material testing if their housings are made of cast steel
or nodular graphite cast iron and the product of the
maximum allowable working pressure PB [bar] multiplied by the nominal diameter DN [mm] is > 2500.
Valves and fittings with nominal diameter DN 50
are exempted from this requirement.
1.2.3
Where the housings of valves and fittings are
made of grey iron, GL reserve the right to check the
quality of the material. EN-GJL-200 grade material is
to be used as a minimum.
1.2.4
Where the housings of valves and fittings are
manufactured by die-forging or are made of copper
alloys, material testing is not required.
1.1.1
Refrigerant pipes, valves and fittings are to be
designed in accordance with Section 9d.
1.3
1.3.1
Refrigerant valves and fittings are to be subjected in the manufacturers works to the pressure and
tightness tests specified in K.
1.1.2
Refrigerant pipes shall be insulated in accordance with L.1. Steel pipes shall be galvanized externally, unless other adequate corrosion protection has
been demonstrated to GL.
1.3.2
Automatic control valves can be exempted
from this requirement where sensitive internal components may be damaged by the pressure testing. Where
the design permits, the housings are to be tested without internal components in these cases.
1.1.3
At points where pipes are supported or pass
through decks or bulkheads, a metallic contact with
steel members of the vessel's structure has to be
avoided.
1.3.3
After installation, refrigerant pipes are to be
subjected to the tightness test specified in K.2.1.3.
1.1.4
Where necessary, refrigerant pipes between
compressors and condensers are to be protected
against being inadvertently touched.
2.
2.1
General
1.1.5
Automatic control valves are to be arranged
or fitted with by-passes so that the installation can be
operated by hand.
2.1.1
Brine pipes, valves and fittings have to comply with the requirements set out in Section 9d. They
are not to be galvanized internally, but shall be protected against corrosion externally.
1.1.6
Flexible refrigerant hoses of non-metallic
materials shall comply with the requirements of the
GL Rules defined in Chapter 2 Machinery Installa-
2.1.2
In general thick-walled pipes in accordance
with Section 9d, group M are to be used.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 10
Refrigeration Installations
2.1.3
At points where brine pipes are supported or
pass through decks or bulkheads, a metallic contact
with steel members of the vessel's structure has to be
avoided.
2.2
Testing
H.
1.
Fans
After being installed, the fans are to be tested in accordance with Q.1.5.
Provision shall be made for replacing fan impellers
and fan motors even when the refrigerated holds are
fully loaded. On fishing vessels with Class Notation K
this requirement may be dispensed with.
2.
3.1
At least two mutually independent pumps are
to be installed, one of which is to act as a stand-by.
On fishing vessels with Class Notation K the stand-by
pump may be dispensed with.
3.2
Brine pumps are to be subjected in the manufacturer's works to a performance test in presence of a
GL Surveyor and to the hydraulic pressure and tightness tests specified in K. A pneumatic tightness test is
not required.
4.
I.
1.
General
Suction lines
2.1
At least two mutually independent pumps are
to be installed, one of which is to act as a stand-by.
3.
Chapter 8
Page 109
The requirements set out in 3. are applicable in analogous manner. Regarding the stand-by pumps see I.2.
4.
Dock operation
Testing
J.
1.
Safety equipment
1.1
General
1.1.1
Provisions are to be made to ensure that the
compressor switches off automatically if the limits are
exceeded, see Table 10.1.
Chapter 8
Page 1010
Section 10
Refrigeration Installations
I - Part 1
GL 2007
1.1.2
Pressure vessels and apparatus which can be
isolated and which contain liquefied refrigerants have
to be equipped with a safety valve, see also F.1.3.
K.
1.
General
1.1.3
Provision has to be made for the safe blowoff of refrigerants directly into the open air.
1.1
All pressure and tightness tests are to be
performed in presence of a GL Surveyor. They are to
be carried out initially during supervision of construction at the manufacturers works or on board of the
vessel as specified in the relevant parts of this Section.
1.2
1.2.1
Safety valves exposed to refrigerant pressure
are subject to the requirements set out in G.1. The
provisions of G.2. are applicable in analogous manner
to safety valves under brine pressure.
1.2.2
Safety valves are to be set to the maximum
allowable working pressure and secured to prevent the
setting being altered inadvertently.
1.2.3
Where a rupture disk is fitted upstream of a
safety valve, the space between the rupture disc and
the safety valve is to be monitored by an alarm pressure gauge or an equivalent device.
A screen is to be fitted downstream the rupture disc to
ensure the function of the safety valve.
The bursting pressure of the rupture disc shall not
exceed the maximum allowable working pressure. A
margin of 10 % is permitted.
2.
Monitoring equipment
Pressure gauges
The suction and discharge pipes of refrigerant compressors, intermediate stage pressure vessels and pressurized brine pipes are to be fitted with pressure
gauges. Refrigerant pressure gauges are required to
have pressure and temperature scales for the refrigerant concerned. The maximum allowable working
pressure is to be indicated by a red mark.
1.2
As a rule, pneumatic tightness tests are to be
performed after the hydraulic pressure tests.
1.3
Exceptionally, GL may, on application, waive
the hydraulic pressure test provided that a pneumatic
pressure test is performed at a test pressure approved
by GL. In addition regulations for accident prevention
of national authorities are to be observed.
1.4
In refrigerating installations which have already been charged with refrigerant, pneumatic pressure tests may be performed only with nitrogen or
carbon dioxide if Group 1 refrigerants are used or only
with nitrogen if the refrigerant is ammonia.
The use of other gases requires the agreement of GL.
2.
Test pressures
2.1
2.1.1
The hydraulic test pressure is to be 1,5 the
maximum allowable working pressure PB according
to Table 10.2.
2.1.2
Where the low-pressure side of the installation can be subjected by operational switching to the
pressure of the high pressure side, e.g. for defrosting
with hot gas, the vessels and equipment involved are
to be designed and tested at the pressures prescribed
for the high pressure side.
2.1.3
The pneumatic tightness test pressure is to be
equal to the maximum allowable working pressure PB.
2.2
2.2
Thermometers
L.
2.3
1.
Cold insulation
Direct indicators such as sight glasses for liquid refrigerants are to be fitted with shut off valves.
The use of tubular glasses is not permitted.
1.1
Pressure vessels, apparatus, pipes, valves and
fittings whose operating temperatures may drop below
the ambient temperatures are to be provided with cold
insulation. Components of plants which are accom-
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 10
M Refrigeration Installations
Heat insulation
2.1
To avoid premature refrigerant condensation,
hot gas defrosting pipes are to be insulated over their
entire length.
2.2
If insulation is provided to prevent accidental
touching see also G.1.1.4.
2.3
Components requiring insulation are to be
protected against corrosion.
Chapter 8
Page 1011
1.4
The clear openings of access trunkways and
companion hatches leading to cargo or air-cooler
spaces shall not be less than 600 600 mm. Hinged
hatch covers are to be protected against closing accidentally and shall be capable of being reopened by
hand from inside.
1.5
Refrigerated or air-cooler spaces are to be
equipped with an escape leading out to the open deck.
For this purpose, each space is to be provided with at
least one door which can also be opened from inside.
In addition an alarm for operation from within the
space shall be connected to the bridge or permanently
manned machinery control centre (MCC) to prevent
persons being trapped.
1.6
The supporting structures of refrigerated
spaces and inspection passageways are to be designed
to withstand the load expected by the cargo.
1.7
Refrigerated spaces are to be provided with
drains and/or bilge pumping facilities. In this connection see Section 9d, K.
1.8
For scuppers in the bulkhead deck, see
Section 2.
1.9
Circulating fans and air-coolers installed in
refrigerated or air-cooler spaces have to be accessible
at all times. It shall be possible to change fan impellers
and drive motors even when the cargo spaces are fully
loaded, see also H.1.
If spaces are served by two or more fans having a
capacity that the minimum required temperature can
be maintained under most unfavourable conditions
with anyone fan out of action, this requirement need
not be applied.
2.
M.
1.
Equipment
1.1
The external boundary walls of refrigerated
spaces are to be watertight and made of steel. If the
use of other materials is envisaged, the agreement of
GL is required.
1.2
Manholes in the double bottom or in oil tank
tops are to be surrounded with an oiltight coaming
100 mm in height.
1.3
Brine or refrigerant pipe penetrations through
watertight bulkheads and decks shall be of approved
design. The pipes may not come into direct contact
with bulkheads, vessel's structure or other metal structural members. The fire resistance of the bulkheads
and decks shall not be impaired.
Defrosting
2.1
Means are to be provided for defrosting aircoolers. Efficient defrosting is to be ensured even
when refrigerated compartments are loaded to their
maximum.
2.2
Drip trays and drains are to be protected from
freezing by adequate heating arrangements.
2.3
Means are to be provided to protect air coolers from overheating.
3.
Insulation
3.1
The inside surfaces of refrigerated spaces are
to be adequately insulated. Thermal bridges are to be
avoided. Structural members of the vessel which may
act as thermal bridges, e.g. decks, partitions and pillars, are to be fully insulated over a length of at least
1 m into the refrigerated space.
Chapter 8
Page 1012
Section 10
Refrigeration Installations
3.2
Divisions, bulkheads and decks separating
refrigerated spaces at the same temperature need not
be insulated. However, the requirement in 3.1 is to be
complied with. Cladding is to be fitted to protect the
cargo.
3.3
Insulation materials shall be odourless and
non-hygroscopic as possible. Combined with their
cladding material, it shall be not readily ignitable.
3.4
If timber is used in refrigerated cargo spaces,
this is to be impregnated with, if possible, odourless
media to prevent rotting and fire.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
N.
1.
General
1.1
Suitably distributed and easily accessible
thermometers are to be placed in each refrigerated
space. At least one thermometer each is required before and after each air-cooler.
1.2
Based on spaces of normal geometry and on
the useful volume shown, the following number of
thermometers is to be fitted as a minimum:
3.5
Insulation is to be permanently secured.
Where insulation in the form of slabs is used, the
edges of the slabs are to abut tightly against each
other.
3.6
The insulation at manhole covers, bilge suctions and wells shall be removable.
3.7
For the insulation of piping in refrigerated
spaces see L.
3.8
The edges of insulated hatches and hatch
covers, doors, bilge covers, etc. are to be protected
against damage.
3.9
At hatches and for about 500 mm beyond, the
deck insulation in lower holds is to be provided with a
special protective covering. The same applies also to
shaft tunnels.
3.10
Unless suitable deck material or aluminium
gratings are provided as top covering, the insulation of
the decks of refrigerated spaces is to be protected by
battens measuring at least 50 mm by 50 mm in cross
section. The battens may take the form of removable
gratings.
3.11
The insulation of the bulkheads of refrigerated spaces and of air ducts is to be suitably protected
against damage. This protection is to be so designed
that the cooling air is able to circulate freely.
3.12
Refrigerated spaces should not lie adjacent to
fuel or lubricating oil tanks. Where this cannot be
avoided, a sufficiently wide gap is to be left between
the vertical surfaces of such tanks and the insulation.
This gap is to be provided with a drain leading to the
bilge and with a vent pipe leading to the open air. The
back of the insulation is to be protected against the
penetration of moisture, e.g. by metal cladding.
3.13
The requirements set out in 3.12 apply in
analogous manner to the tops of lubricating oil and
fuel tanks. In the case of welded tank tops, the specified isolating gap may be dispensed with, provided
that the top is covered with a well established oilproof
coating without joints and of sufficient thickness.
2.1
Where temperatures are not monitored locally, electrical devices are to be fitted which comply
both with the following requirements and with Sections 11a 11 l.
2.2
In design and degree of protection, all appliances and other system components shall be compatible with the mechanical and climatic conditions attaching to their particular operating environments. If
mobile temperature sensors are provided for refrigerated holds they are then to be fitted with connecting
leads of sufficient length and the sensors are to be
protected against mechanical damage.
2.3
Means are to be provided to enable temperature measuring of cargo holds in case of failure of the
temperature monitoring system. The number of measuring points (sensors) in refrigerated spaces depends
on the configuration and size of each space. The requirements set out in 1.1 and 1.2 are to be complied
with as a minimum.
2.4
The measuring range of the system has to
cover the entire anticipated temperature range plus an
additional 5 K. Temperatures above and below the
measuring range shall not have any harmful effect on
the systems.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 10
Refrigeration Installations
Chapter 8
Page 1013
2.5
For the accuracy of the temperature measurements and reading the following values are to be
applied:
2.
Protective equipment
2.1
Breathing apparatus
2.6
Wires and their installation has to comply
with Sections 11a 11 l. Waterproof distribution and
junction boxes shall be used.
2.7
Each temperature measuring system has to be
provided with its own power supply. The power supply system shall be duplicated.
2.8
Where temperature measuring systems are
supplied by their own power sources or via converters
from the vessels supply system provision shall be
made for easy switching to a stand-by power source.
2.2
The provision of gas masks, respirators, protective clothing, etc. is also subject to national accident prevention regulations.
2.3
Adequate guidance for the safe operation and emergency procedures of the refrigeration system shall be
provided by suitable notices displayed on board of the
vessel.
2.9
Instruments and appliances shall be marked
with their type and number.
2.10
The system and its individual components are
to be subjected to a test in the manufacturer's works
under the supervision of GL.
Q.
Shipboard Testing
1.
Operational tests
1.
For pressurized parts of quick freezing installations, such as plate elements or freezing coils, the
requirements in F. shall be complied with.
2.
Spaces for quick freezing installations shall
be in line with the requirements set out in D.3., D.4.
and D.2.1.
P.
1.
Spare parts
1.1
The extent of spare parts to be carried on
board is indicated in Section 13. In the case of recording instruments, the supply of spare parts is to be
agreed with GL.
1.2
For fishing vessels with Class Notation K the
availability of spare parts for refrigerating installations
should be specially considered and decided upon by
the owner.
1.1
All compressors, pumps, fans, etc. are to be
operated individually and simultaneously in all anticipated speed ranges.
The operation of the compressors has to be demonstrated at different evaporating temperatures.
During the test, the compressors are to be connected to
the condensers and evaporators in all combinations
possible in service.
1.2
In case of automatic refrigerating installations
the proper working of the automatic and manual
modes of operation are to be demonstrated.
1.3
The condensers are to be operated with the
main cooling water pump and with the stand-by pump.
The operation of the cooling water supply when the
fishing vessel is in dock, is to be demonstrated in
accordance with I.4.
1.4
1.5
It is to be demonstrated that the specified air
changes and a uniform air distribution in cargo holds
are achieved.
1.6
The efficient working of the defrosting system is to be demonstrated.
Chapter 8
Page 1014
2.
Section 10
Refrigeration Installations
Refrigeration test
2.1
A refrigeration test (balance test) is to be
performed to demonstrate to GL the degree of thermal
insulation of the refrigerated spaces/tanks and that the
available refrigerating capacity of the installation
complies with the requirements set out in B.3. and
B.5. The required proof of performance is deemed to
have been supplied if the evaluation of the test by GL
shows that the heat transfer coefficient, on which the
calculation is based, has not been exceeded.
2.2
The temperature in the refrigerating
holds/tanks is to be lowered to the level corresponding
to the refrigerated space/tank temperature specified for
the installation. For this purpose, the temperature
difference between the ambient air and the refrigerated
spaces/tanks shall not be less than 15 K.
Where the test is performed during cold season the test
conditions will be given special consideration by GL.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
2.7.2
Compressors
Condensers
Brine
2.3
Before commencement of the balance test the
agreed refrigerated hold/tank temperature is to be kept
constant for at least 10 hours in order to achieve a
uniform cooling of all parts. At the end of this cooling
period, the refrigerating machinery must be in steady
operating condition.
2.4
The temperature measurements for the balance test are to be performed for a period of at least
six hours. During this time the outside temperature
shall be constant as possible. Periods of strong solar
radiation are to be avoided.
2.5
During the balance test all machinery and
equipment in use is to be maintained in a steady operating condition and to be operated manually.
2.6
The number of compressors needed to
achieve the condition of balance is to be fixed so as to
achieve continuous operation. If the capacity of even a
single compressor is too high, the plant has to be operated intermittently while recording the "on" time. The
switching off of individual cylinders or rows of cylinder is not allowed.
2.7
Measurements
Refrigerated spaces/tanks
2.7.6
2.7.7
Measuring intervals
Reports
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 11a
Chapter 8
Page 11a1
Section 11a
General Requirements and Instructions for Electrical Installations
A.
General
1.
Scope
1.1
The requirements of the Sections 11a to 11 l
apply to electrical equipment of decked fishing vessels
with a length L 12,0 m. For fishing vessels with a
length L < 24 m reduced requirements may be defined
in different parts of the following Sections.
For other types of ships engaged in the fishery business, like fish processing vessels, whale factory ships
or fish transport and flotilla mother ships as well as for
fishing vessels with a length L 45 m, the electrical
installations have to follow the requirements of Chapter 3 Electrical Installations.
3.
3.1
Where the requirements for electrical equipment and facilities are not laid down in these Rules,
decision shall be made, wherever necessary, regarding
the use of other regulations and standards. These include e.g. IEC publications, especially all IEC 60092
publications.
3.2
If necessary, besides of the GL's Construction
Rules for fishing vessels national regulations are to be
observed as well.
4.
1.4
For DC or AC main installations with a voltage not exceeding 50 volts and/or a power not exceeding 5 kW, the requirements of the Sections 11a to 11 l
are not wholly applicable. Such installations may be
given special consideration by GL Head Office.
2.
Application
2.1
Fishing vessels of flag states which have already ratified the Torremolinos International Convention for
fishing vessels with a length L 45 m, see Section 1,
A.3.3, have to follow directly the requirements defined therein.
2.2
European Communities
Design
the maintaining of normal operational and habitable conditions provided on board will be ensured without recourse to the emergency source
of electrical power
1.2
Versions deviating from the Construction
Rules may be approved if they have been tested for
suitability and accepted as equivalent by GL.
1.3
GL reserve the right to specify additional
requirements to the Construction Rules where these
are related to new systems or installations or where
they are necessary because of new knowledge or operating experience.
B.
Definitions
1.
The power supply installations comprise all installations for the generating, conversion, storage and distribution of electrical energy.
2.
Essential equipment
Chapter 8
Page 11a2
3.
Section 11a B
Emergency consumers
Electric network
An electric network comprises all equipment/ installations connected together at the same rated voltage.
5.1
Safety voltage
8.1
Locked electrical spaces are spaces which are provided with lockable doors and are intended solely for
the installation of electrical equipment such as switchgear, transformers, etc. They have to be constructed as
dry spaces.
9.
Systems
Systems contain all equipment necessary for monitoring, control and safety including the input and output
devices. Systems cover defined functions including
behaviour under varying operating conditions, cycles
and running.
10.
Protection devices
Safety devices
Safety systems
13.
7.
14.
Low-voltage systems
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Alarms
8.
All equipment which directly affect the flow of electrical energy; consist of the functional wired semiconductor elements together with their protection and
cooling devices, the semiconductor transformers or
inductors and the switchgear in the main circuits.
Machinery spaces
15.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
16.
Section 11a
"Dead ship" condition means that the complete machinery plant including the main source of electrical
power are out of operation and auxiliary energy as
compressed air, starting current from batteries, etc. are
not available for the restoration of the main power
supply, for the restart of the auxiliaries and for the
start-up of the propulsion plant. It is however assumed
that the equipment for start-up of the emergency diesel-generator is ready for use.
17.
Main switchboard
Chapter 8
Page 11a3
alarm systems
navigation lights
1.1
The drawings of switchgear and control systems are to be accompanied by parts lists indicating
the manufacturers and characteristics of the electrical
components, circuit diagrams together with descriptions, where these constitute a necessary aid to understanding.
The drawings and documents shall make it clear that
the requirements set out in this Chapter have been
complied with.
1.2
Any non-standard symbols used are to be
explained in a key.
1.3
All documents are to be indicated with the
hull number and the name of the shipyard.
1.4
All documentation shall be submitted in English or German language.
1.5
GL reserve the right to demand additional
documentation if that submitted is insufficient for an
assessment of the installation.
C.
1.
Newbuildings
2.
D.
Chapter 8
Page 11a4
Section 11a E
I - Part 1
GL 2007
E.
Ambient Conditions
1.
Environmental effects
2.
1.1
The selection, layout and arrangement of all
shipboard machinery, equipment and appliances shall
be such as to ensure faultless continuous operation
under the ambient conditions defined in Section 1, C.
Therefore the manufacturer/supplier shall be informed
by the user about the expected environmental conditions.
Vibrations
2.1
Electrical machinery and appliances are normally subjected to vibration stresses. Design, construction and installation must in every case take account of these stresses.
The faultless long-term service of individual components shall not be impaired by vibration stresses.
1.2
Products are classified according to their
applications into the environmental categories as
stated in Table 11a.1. In type approval Certificates
will be referred to the respective category.
2.2
Assessment, proof and measurement of vibrations shall follow the GL Rules defined in Chapter 3
Electrical Installations, Section 1, E.2.
Environmental Conditions
Open Deck Area
Vibrations
0 C
to
+ 45 C
to
100 %
0,7 g
0 C
to
+ 45 C
to
100 %
4g
0 C
to
+ 55 C
to
100 %
0,7 g
0 C
to
+ 55 C
to
100 %
4g
0 C
to
+ 40 C
to
80 %
0,7 g
relative
Humidity
Vibrations
Comments
relative
Humidity
Temperature
Closed Area
Temperature
Environmental Category
25 C
to
+ 45 C
to
100 %
0,7 g
25 C
to
+ 45 C
to
100 %
2,3 g
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 11a
F.
Operating Conditions
10
1.
U n / U [%]
1.1
All electrical equipment shall be so designed
that it works faultlessly during the voltage and frequency variations occurring in the normal operation.
The variations indicated in Table 11a.2 are to be used
as a basis.
Frequency
Voltage
General
Storage
batteries
and static
converters
1
Parameter
Voltage
Variations
Continuous
see 1.2
1.2
If in direct-current systems supplied by storage batteries and static converters the permissible
limits are exceeded, the faultless function of all electrical devices shall be ensured.
1.3
Any larger voltage variations likely because
of the different conditions in distribution systems
supplied by storage batteries and static converters are
to be taken into account. Measures are to be taken to
stabilize the input voltage of specific systems, e.g.
electronic equipment, which cannot operate satisfactorily within the stated limits.
2.
0,1
10 % (5 s)
5%
+ 6 % - 10 % 20 % (1,5 s)
Mains quality
2.1
In systems without substantial static converter
load and supplied by synchronous generators, the total
voltage harmonic distortion shall not exceed 5 %.
2.2
In systems fed by static converters and systems in which the static converter load predominates,
for single harmonics in permanence the limit values
indicated in Fig. 11a.1 apply. The total harmonic distortion shall not exceed 8 %.
G.
1.
Low-voltage systems
0,2
Transient
20 % 1
0,5
Chapter 8
Page 11a5
5 7 10 15 25
n
100
2.
2.1
Systems with hull return are to be installed
only with special acceptance of GL Head Office.
The hull return system of distribution shall not be used
for power, heating or lighting in vessels for "unrestricted service".
2.2
of:
2.3
The connection of the return conductor to the
hull shall be made somewhere easy to check and not
in compartments with isolated bulkheads, e.g. cold
rooms.
3.
Chapter 8
Page 11a6
Section 11a J
I - Part 1
GL 2007
J.
4.1
In non-earthed systems, the generator neutral
points shall not be connected together.
1.
4.2
The insulation resistance of a distribution
system without earthing of the system is to be monitored and displayed.
H.
4.
Electrical installations
500 V
250 V
50 V
For carrying out the types of protection, see IEC Publication 60529.
2.
2.1
I.
1.
Electrical machines, cables and devices shall
be resistant to air containing moisture and salt, seawater and oil vapours.
They shall not be hygroscopic and shall be flame
retardant and self-extinguishing. The insulation of
windings need not be flame-retardant.
In case where special precautions against electric shock will be necessary, the additional usage
of residual current protective devices 30 mA
(not for essential equipment).
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 11a
Chapter 8
Page 11a7
Table 11a.4 Minimum degrees of protection against foreign bodies and water (in conformity with publication IEC 60529)
Equipment
Generators,
motors,
transformers 1
Switchgear,
electronic
equipment
and recording
devices 1
Location
Locked dry electrical
service rooms
Dry spaces, service rooms
dry control rooms,
accommodation
Wheelhouse, radio room,
control stations
Wet spaces (e.g. machinery
spaces, bow thruster room,
ventilation ducts (internal),
pantries, provision rooms,
store rooms
Machinery spaces below
floor (bilge), separator and
pump rooms, refrigerated
rooms, galleys, laundries,
bathrooms and shower
rooms
Pipe tunnels, ventilation
trunks (to open deck),
cargo holds
Open decks
Communication
equipment, display and input
units, signalling
equipment,
switches, power
sockets, junction
boxes and control elements 1
Heating
appliances
heaters and
cooking equipment
Lighting fittings
IP 00
IP 00
IP 20
IP 20
IP 20
IP 20
IP 20
IP 20
IP 20
IP 20
IP 22
IP 22
IP 22
IP 22
IP 22
IP 22
IP 22
IP 44 2
IP 22
IP 22
IP 44
IP 44
IP 55 2, 3
IP 44 3
IP 34 3
IP 55
IP 55
IP 55 2
IP 55
IP 55
IP 56
IP 56
IP 56
IP 56
IP 55
Notes
1
2
3
2.3
For the degree of protection for the equipment of watertight doors, see Section 2, B.2.
Motors and associated control and monitoring equipment
: IP X7
Door position indicators
: IP X8
Door-closure warning devices
: IP X6
For the degrees of protection for measuring chamber of smoke detectors
: IP 42
For the degrees of protection for bathrooms and shower rooms, see Section 11i, C.2.
Protective earthing
earthing conductor, or the connection cable shall contain a green/yellow coded core. Cable braids and armouring shall not be used as earthing conductors.
2.4.2
A conductor normally carrying current shall
not be used simultaneously as an earthing conductor,
nor may it be connected with the latter to the vessel's
hull. The green/yellow coded core shall not be used as
a current-carrying conductor.
2.4.3
The cross-section of the earthing conductor
shall at least conform to the values indicated in Table
11a.5.
2.4.4
Machines and devices which are insulated
mounted are to be earthed by flexible cables, wires or
stranded copper straps.
Chapter 8
Page 11a8
Section 11a L
Minimum cross-section of
earthing conductor
in insulated
cables
separately
laid
[mm2]
[mm2]
equal to
cross-section
of outer
equal to
conductor
cross-section but not less
of outer
than 1,5 for
conductor
stranded and
4 for solid
earth
conductor
0,5
to
4
>4
to
16
> 16
to
35
>35
to
< 120
120
equal to
cross-section
of outer
equal to
conductor
half the
cross-section
16
of outer
conductor
equal to
but not less
half the
than 4
cross-section
of outer
conductor
70
flexible
cables
and wires
[mm2]
equal to
cross-section
of outer
conductor
70
2.4.5
The connection of the earthing conductor to
the vessel's hull shall be located at a point where it can
easily be checked. Connections of earthing conductors
shall be protected against corrosion.
2.4.6
Insulated mounted structures and aluminium
structures have to be connected to the vessel's hull by
special conductors at several points. The connections
shall have a high electrical conductivity and shall be
corrosion-resistant. The minimum cross-section is 50
mm2 per conductor.
3.
3.2
The IEC publications 60533 and 60945 for
the bridge and deck zone are to be observed.
3.3
The requirements for electrical and electronic
equipment subject for mandatory type approval regarding immunity and emissions of electromagnetic
influence can be taken from GL Rules VI Additional
Rules and Guidelines, Part 7 Guidelines for the
Performance of Type Approvals, Chapter 2 Test
Requirements for Electrical/Electronic Equipment and
Systems.
3.4
Electrical and electronic equipment on board
ships, required neither by Classification Rules nor by
international conventions, liable to cause electromagnetic disturbance shall be of a type which fulfils the
test requirements of the GL Rules VI - Additional
Rules and Guidelines, Part 7 - Guidelines for the Performance of Type Approvals, Chapter 2 - Test Requirements for Electrical/Electronic Equipment and
Systems, Section 3, B.21. and B.22.
4.
equal to
cross-section
of outer
conductor
but not less
than 16
3.1
Electrical and electronic equipment shall not
be impaired in their function by electromagnetic energy. General measures are to extend with equal importance over:
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Lightning protection
K.
Explosion Protection
L.
Spare Parts
1.
In order to be able to restore machinery operation and manoeuvring capability of the vessel in the
event of damage at sea spare parts for the main propulsion plant and the essential equipment shall be
available aboard of each vessel together with the necessary tools.
2.
The amount of spare parts for unrestricted
service and for Class Notations M, K and W have to
be agreed with GL.
3.
The amount of spare parts shall be documented and a corresponding list shall be carried
aboard.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 11b
Chapter 8
Page 11b1
Section 11b
Installation of Electrical Equipment
A.
General
1.
Equipment location
1.1
Electrical equipment is to be so placed or
protected as to minimize the probability of mechanical
injury or damage from the accumulation of dust, oil
vapours, steam or dripping liquids. Skylights and ventilators are to be so arranged as to avoid the probability of flooding the apparatus.
C.
Storage Batteries
1.
Location
1.2
In spaces where flammable mixtures are
liable to collect and in any compartment assigned
principally to the containment of an accumulator battery, no electrical equipment should be installed unless
GL is satisfied that it is:
1.1
Storage batteries shall be so installed as to
ensure accessibility for changing of cells, inspection,
testing, topping-up and cleaning. Storage batteries
shall not be installed in the accommodation area or in
cargo holds. An exception may be granted for gastight
cells, such as those used in emergency lamps, where
charging does not result in the development of harmful gases.
2.
B.
1.
Main generators
1.2
Storage batteries shall not be installed in
positions where they are exposed to excessively high
or low temperatures, water spray or other factors liable
to impair their serviceability or shorten their service
life. The minimum degree of protection required is
IP 12.
1.3
When installing storage batteries, attention is
to be paid to the capacity of the associated chargers.
The charging power is to be calculated as the product
of the maximum charger current and the rated voltage
of the storage battery.
Depending on the operating mode, application and
duty of the storage battery to be charged, and on the
mode of the charging (charger characteristic), and by
agreement with GL, the calculation of the charging
capacity need not be based on the maximum current.
For the typical automatic IU- charging the calculation
is stated under 3.
1.4
Storage batteries shall be prevented from
sliding. The constraints shall not hinder ventilation.
2.
Battery-room equipment
2.1
Only explosion-protected lamps, switches,
fan motors and space-heating appliances shall be in-
Chapter 8
Page 11b2
Section 11b C
explosion group II C
temperature class T 1
I - Part 1
GL 2007
2.2
Where leakage is possible, the inner walls of
battery-rooms, boxes and cupboards, and all supports,
troughs, containers and racks, shall be protected
against the injurious effects of the electrolyte.
V = 2,5 Q
Q = f 0,25 I n
V
3.2
Where the room volume or the ventilation is not sufficient, enclosed battery cabinets or containers with
natural ventilation into suitable rooms or areas shall be
used.
3.
3.1
General requirements
the batteries are valve regulated (VRLA), provided with solid electrolyte
b)
c)
3.3
The air ducts for natural ventilation shall have a crosssection as follows, assuming an air speed of 0,5 m/s:
A = 5,6 Q
A
= cross-section [cm2]
Cross-section [cm2]
Lead
battery
Lead
battery
solid
fluid
electrolyte electrolyte
NickelCadmium
battery
VRLA
< 500
500 < 1000
1000 < 1500
1500 < 2000
2000 < 3000
> 3000
40
60
80
80
80
60
80
120
160
240
80
120
180
240
forcedventilation
forced ventilation
I - Part 1
GL 2007
3.4
Section 11b
Ventilation requirements
Ventilation inlet and outlet openings shall be so arranged to ensure that fresh air flows over the surface
of the storage battery.
The air inlet openings shall be arranged below and air
outlet openings shall be arranged above.
If batteries are installed in several floors, the free
distance between them shall be at least 50 mm.
Devices which obstruct the free passage of air, e.g.
fire dampers and safety screens, shall not be mounted
in the ventilation inlet and outlet ducts of battery
rooms. If necessary, weather tight closures shall be
carried out otherwise.
Air ducts for natural ventilation shall lead to the open
deck directly.
Openings shall be at least 0,9 m above the cupboard/
boxes. The inclination of air ducts shall not exceed
45 from vertical.
3.6
Forced ventilation
Chapter 8
Page 11b3
conditions as required for the installation of the emergency generator, see B.2.
5.
5.1
Batteries for starting of internal combustion
engines shall be installed near the engine.
5.2
H.3.
6.
Caution labels
7.1
Where batteries are fitted for use for essential
and emergency services a schedule of such batteries is
to be compiled and maintained. The schedule, which
is to be approved by GL, is to include at least the following information regarding the battery(ies):
location
7.2
Procedures are to be put in place to ensure
that where batteries are replaced that they are of an
equivalent performance type.
D.
Power Transformers
1.
Transformers shall be installed at readily
accessible and adequately ventilated rooms.
2.
Open transformers with IP 00 degree of protection may be installed in dry and locked electrical
service rooms.
4.
The location in which storage batteries for the emergency power supply are installed shall fulfil the same
Chapter 8
Page 11b4
Section 11b F
3.
The location of transformers for the main
electrical power supply shall fulfil the same conditions
as those applying to the installation of the main generator, see B.1.
4.
The location of transformers for the emergency power supply shall fulfil the same condition as
those applying to the installation of the emergency
source of electrical power, see B.2.
E.
Electronics
1.
Power electronic equipment and central units
for information processing shall be installed in readily
accessible and adequately ventilated spaces.
2.
The heat generated in the unit shall be removed in a suitable manner. Where electronic equipment is installed in engine rooms or other spaces with
enhanced danger of pollution and corrosion, air filters
shall be provided if necessary.
1.2
If installed on the floor above the bilge, the
main switchboard must be completely sealed from
below.
Pipework with flanges or fittings and air ducts are to
be run in such a way that the switchgear is not endangered in the event of leaks.
1.3
The control passage in front of the main
switchboard shall be wide enough to afford an adequate view for the operation of the board.
A sufficiently wide passageway is to be provided
behind the free-standing panels where these have to be
accessible from behind for operation and maintenance.
1.4
The floor in front of main switchboards with
an operating voltage of more than 50 V has to be provided with insulating gratings or mats and where necessary behind.
The insulation shall be done by a suitable insulating
mat (e.g. according to IEC publication 61111).
2.
F.
Switchboard
1.
Main switchboards
1.1
Normally main switchboards shall be installed relative to the main generators in such a way
that the normal electricity supply can only be impaired
if a fire or other damage occur in the same room. Installation in a separate control room is permissible.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Emergency switchboards
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 11c
Chapter 8
Page 11c1
Section 11c
Power Supply Installations
A.
1.
A power balance of the electrical equipment
has to be submitted to proof the sufficient ratings of
units for the generating, storage and transformation of
electrical energy.
1.1
The power demand has to be determined for
the following operating conditions:
1.4
The arrangement of the vessel's main source
of electrical power shall be such that the services referred to in Section 11a, A.4. can be maintained in all
seas and under all navigating and manoeuvring conditions, even when the vessel is stopped.
1.5
Where transformers constitute an essential
part of the supply system required herein, the system
shall be so arranged as to ensure continuity of the
supply.
navigation at sea
fishing
1.6
1.2
Extreme environmental conditions, e.g. arctic
or tropical conditions, appropriate to the vessel's area
of operation are also to be taken into account.
2.
In the case of fishing vessels with Class Notation RIC for classified refrigeration installations
according to Section 10 account is also to be taken of
the power required for refrigeration systems and preservation of the catch.
2.
2.1
Supply voltage
B.
1.
Design
1.1
Where electrical power constitutes the only
means of maintaining auxiliary services essential for
propulsion, manoeuvring and the safety of the vessel,
a main source of electrical power shall be provided
which shall include at least two generating sets, one of
which may be driven by the main engine (shaft generator). GL Head Office may accept other arrangements having equivalent electrical capability.
1.3
However, in fishing vessels with the Class
Notation K, in the event of any one of the generating
sets being stopped, it shall only be necessary to ensure
the functioning of services essential for propulsion,
manoeuvring and the safety of the vessel. One of the
required generating sets may consist of a generator in
combination with a battery of sufficient capacity.
2.2.1
With a terminal short circuit on three phases
of a generator, the steady short circuit current shall not
be less than three times or greater than six times the
rated current. The alternator and its exciter shall be
capable of withstanding the steady short circuit current
for two seconds without damage.
2.2.2
Exemptions from these requirements may be
allowed where it is demonstrated in particular instances that provision has been made for short circuits
in the vessel's mains to be selectively disconnected at
lower steady short circuit currents.
2.3
1.2
The power of these sets shall be such as to
ensure the functioning of the services referred to in
Section 11a, A.4. and in case of Class Notation RIC,
including the power required in preservation of the
catch, in event of any one of these generating sets
being stopped.
Voltage drop
Parallel operation
Chapter 8
Page 11c2
Section 11c C
I - Part 1
GL 2007
ratings, of the combined load for any steady-state condition in the combined load between 20 % and 100 %
of the sum of the rated loads of all generators.
C.
1.
Serving time
2.5
Prime movers
3.1
On vessels with remote control from the
wheelhouse it is necessary to ensure that when manoeuvres, preventing the continued operation of the
shaft driven generator plant are initiated, the supply to
consumers and controls essential for propulsion, manoeuvring and steering is automatically restored as
quick as possible.
3.2
Approval may be given for the use of standby
sets which are started up by remote control from the
bridge and are able to assume the supply automatically.
4.
4.1
In vessels for unrestricted service and provided with periodically unattended machinery space
the main source of electrical power shall be supplied
as follows:
2.
Class Notation K
Consumers
MF radio
MF/HF radio
4.1.1
Where the electrical power can normally be
supplied by one generator, there shall be provided
suitable load shedding arrangements to ensure the
integrity of supplies to services required for propulsion and steering. To cover the case of loss of the
generator in operation, there shall be adequate provisions for automatic starting and connecting to the
main switchboard of a stand-by generator of sufficient
capacity to permit propulsion and steering and with
automatic restarting of the essential auxiliaries including, where necessary, sequential operations.
3.2
Internal communication equipment, fire detecting systems and signals which may be required in
an emergency.
3.3
3.4
a)
b)
c)
d)
4.1.2
If the electrical power is normally supplied
by more than one generating set simultaneously, there
shall, be provisions, e.g. by load shedding, to ensure
that in case of loss of one of these generating sets, the
remaining ones are kept in operation without overload
to permit propulsion and steering.
e)
4.2
Where required to be duplicated, other auxiliary machinery essential to propulsion shall be fitted
with automatic change-over devices allowing transfer
to a stand-by machine. An alarm shall be given on
automatic change-over. Stand-by circuits are to be
provided to enable sets of the same type to operate
alternatively.
3.5
any.
4.
Type of source
4.1
Where the emergency source of electrical
power is a generator, it shall be provided with an independent fuel supply and with an automatic starting
and switch-over system.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 11c
Chapter 8
Page 11c3
5.
The emergency source of electrical power
and automatic starting equipment shall be so constructed and arranged as to enable adequate testing to
be carried out by the crew while the vessel is in operating condition.
6.
The emergency source of electrical power
may be used for starting up the main propulsion plant
from the dead ship condition provided that its capacity
is sufficient to supply the emergency services at the
same time.
7.
Provided that suitable measures are taken for
safeguarding independent emergency operation under
all circumstances, the emergency generator may be
used exceptionally and for short periods to supply
non-emergency circuits.
D.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 11d
Chapter 8
Page 11d1
Section 11d
Installation Protection and Power Distribution
A.
General
3.
Switchgear
1.
Generator protection
3.1
General
1.1
Generators shall be protected against short
circuits and overloads.
1.2
Generators of less than 50 kVA not arranged
for parallel operation may be protected by fuses. All
generators of 50 kVA or above are to be protected by
a circuit breaker providing long-time overcurrent
protection not exceeding 15 % above either full-load
rating on continuous-rated machines or the overload
rating of special-rated machines.
The shutting down of the prime mover is to cause the
tripping of the vessel service generator circuit breaker.
1.3
Alternating-current generator circuit breakers
are to be provided with short-time delay short-circuit
trips. The time delay should be up to about 500 milliseconds.
1.4
Direct-current generator circuit breakers are
to be provided with short-circuit trips set below the
maximum generator short-circuit current with a time
delay up to about 200 milliseconds. This trip is to be
set at the lowest value of current which will coordinate
with the trip settings of feeder circuit breakers supplied by the generator.
1.5
Selective tripping is to be provided between
generator and feeder protective devices to ensure the
proper coordination indicated in 1.3 and 1.4. In circuits supplying essential services, selective tripping is
also to be provided between feeder and branch-circuit
protective devices and each protective device associated with essential services is to have an interrupting
rating not less than the maximum short-circuit current
possible at the point of installation.
1.6
Direct-current generators arranged for parallel operation are to be provided with reverse-current
circuit breaker trips, see C.2.
1.7
Generator protection devices are subject to
mandatory type approvals.
2.
Reverse-power protection
3.1.1
Each non-earthed conductor shall be switched
and protected against short circuit and overload.
3.1.2
When tripped due to overcurrent, generator
circuit breakers have to be ready for immediate reconnection. The use of thermal bi-metallic release for
generators used to supply essential consumers is not
permitted.
3.1.3
Generator circuit breakers shall be provided
with a reclosing inhibitor which prevents automatic
reclosure after tripping due to a short circuit.
3.2
Single operation
3.3
Parallel operation
a three-pole circuit breaker with delayed overcurrent trip and short-time delay short circuit
trip, and
4.
Sychronizing equipment
protection against parallel connection in opposite phase, e.g. a synchronizer interlock for generators with an output per unit of 50 kVA and
above has to be provided.
Chapter 8
Page 11d2
B.
Section 11d G
Emergency generators supply the emergency switchboards and the connected emergency consumers.
1.
overload protection
2.
Overcurrent protection may be dispensed
with in transformers with a rated current of less than
2 A on the secondary side.
E.
F.
C.
1.
Single operation
2.
A power circuit breaker operating simultaneously on all non-earthed poles, with delayed
overcurrent trip and short-time-delay short circuit trip, or a fuse in each non-earthed pole and
a quick-break on-load switch of sufficient
make/break capacity for the simultaneous disconnection of all non-earthed poles.
For generators with an output of 50 kVA and
above circuit breakers are to be provided in
every case.
Parallel operation
D.
Power Electronics
1.
Power electronics facilities are to be protected against overload and short circuit.
2.
Inverters intended for supply of emergency
consumers from the emergency battery shall be designed for continuous operation.
G.
Storage Batteries
Overload shedding
I - Part 1
GL 2007
A power circuit breaker with delayed overcurrent trip and short-time-delay short circuit trip, a
reverse current trip and short-time-delay undervoltage protection.
Polarity-reversing facilities.
Transformers
1.
Transformers shall be protected against short
circuits on the primary side and against overloads on
the secondary side.
Shore Connection
1.
The shore connection box shall be linked to
the power supply system by permanently laid cables.
2.
A device for connection of a protective conductor or a potential equalizer has to provided, if required.
3.
Switching-on of the shore supply shall only
be possible if the switches of the main generators have
been shut-off. Short-term parallel operation of the
vessel's mains and the shore mains for load transfer is
permissible.
4.
The shore connection shall be switchable and
it shall be protected against short circuit and overload.
The shore connection box shall be provided at least
with short circuit protection.
5.
A voltage indicator shall be provided in the
main switchboard.
6.
Facilities shall be provided to compare the
polarity (in the case of direct current) and the phase sequence (in the case of three-phase alternating current)
of the shore connection with those of the vessel's mains.
7.
The following details shall be indicated on a
plate fitted to the shore connection box:
voltage system
rated voltage
frequency, in case of AC
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 11d
Chapter 8
Page 11d3
H.
1.2
1.
General
1.2.1
All final supply circuits shall have all-pole
insulation. The return conductors are to be connected
in the associated distribution switchboard to an insulated busbar, which is connected to the hull.
1.1
Protective equipment shall be so selected and
co-ordinated with the generator protection that in the
event of a short circuit the selectivity is safeguarded.
If necessary the evidence is to be proved.
1.2.2
The connections to the hull shall have at least
the same cross-section as the supply cable.
1.2
Every non-earthed conductor in a distribution
circuit shall be protected against overload and short
circuit.
Bare wires shall not be used. Casings or their mounting bolts shall not be used as return conductors or to
make their connection.
1.3
Where the three phase system is isolated from
the hull the overcurrent protection can be realised in
only 2 conductors, if the disconnection of all phases is
safeguarded.
1.3
Up to 3 distribution switchboards may be supplied by a common supply cable.
2.
2.1
I.
Power Distribution
1.
1.1
Regarding permissible supply systems see
Section 11a, G.
2.
2.1
Essential systems shall be supplied directly
from the main switchboard, the emergency switchboard or the transitional emergency power supply, as
the Rules require.
2.2
Essential consumers performing the same
function, e.g. main and standby lubricating oil pumps,
are to be supplied by separate cables direct from the
main switchboard or from two independent subdistribution panels.
3.
3.1
The emergency switchboard is to be supplied
in normal operation from the main switchboard by an
inter-connector feeder which is to be protected at the
main switchboard against overload and short circuit.
The arrangement at the emergency switchboard shall
be such that the inter-connector feeder is disconnected
automatically at the emergency switchboard upon
failure of the main power supply and is to provide for
automatic connection of the emergency supply in the
event of such failure.
3.2
When the system is arranged for feedback
operation, the inter-connector feeder shall also be
protected at the emergency switchboard at least
against short circuit.
4.
4.1
Main lighting installations are to be supplied
from the main switchboard, emergency lighting from
the emergency switchboard.
4.2
Final sub-circuits for lighting shall not be
fitted with fuses rated higher than 16 A. The number
of lighting points (lamps) connected to one sub-circuit
shall not exceed:
Chapter 8
Page 11d4
Section 11d I
4.3
In the important rooms listed below, the
lighting has to be supplied by at least two different
circuits:
4.4
Sockets outside the accommodation area shall
be connected to separate circuits. When calculating
the permissible connected load, one socket is equivalent to two lighting points.
5.
5.1
Navigation and signal lights panels shall be
supplied from the main- and emergency electrical
power source.
5.2
The masthead, the side and stern lights are
each to be supplied by separate lines, each line being
protected by a fuse or automatic circuit breaker.
5.3
The navigation lights panel is to be provided
with a device for each masthead, side and stern light
which indicates or gives a warning if the corresponding light fails.
6.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
6.2
A common distribution network with back-up
batteries may be used to supply systems which are
required to remain operative even if the main source
of electrical power fails. Such a network shall have
one of two supply units comprising either:
6.2.1
a power supply unit with a capacity sufficient
for all the connected consumers together with a
charger which, acting in buffer operation with the
back-up battery, is capable of supplying continuously
all the connected consumers and maintain the battery
in the charged condition, or
6.2.2
two chargers, which meet the conditions
stated in 6.2.1.
6.3
With regard to residual ripple, the supply
facilities specified in 6.2.1 and 6.2.2 shall be designed
to ensure trouble-free operation of the connected systems even when the battery is temporarily disconnected.
6.4
One of the power supply units or chargers
shall be supplied directly from the main switchboard.
6.5
Failure of the power supply units and chargers shall be signalled visually and audibly.
6.6
Battery chargers with a charging capacity of
P 2 kW shall be tested at the maker's works in the
presence of a GL Surveyor.
7.
Oil burner equipment, fuel pumps, boiler fans, separators, machinery space ventilators shall be provided
with an individual emergency switch located at a central position outside the machinery space unless other
means are available for rapidly interrupting the fuel
and air supply outside the room in which the equipment is installed. The consumers may be arranged in
groups, provided that redundant consumers are allocated to at least two electrically independent groups.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 11e
Switchgear Assemblies
Chapter 8
Page 11e1
Section 11e
Switchgear Assemblies
A.
General
1.
These Rules apply to low-voltage switchgear
with operating voltages up to 1000V AC or 1500V DC.
2.
Electrical installations are to be protected
against damage due to overload and short circuit.
3.
The thermal- and electro-dynamic stresses
due to overcurrents shall not cause damage to parts of
the installation during the response time of protective
devices or during the total operating time of switches.
4.
Overcurrent protective devices are to be selected on the basis of following criteria:
overload current
short circuit
reclosing capability
5.
Regarding design, construction and testing of
low-voltage switchgear assemblies attention is drawn
to IEC Publication 60092-302.
6.
B.
Construction
1.
General
1.1
All devices, instruments and operating devices shall be permanently identified by name plates.
Wherever possible, clear text shall be used. Fuse current ratings are to be stated. The setpoints of adjustable protective devices are to be marked. The rated
operating parameters of all measuring instruments
shall be marked in red either on the scales or on plates
fixed nearby.
1.5
All components including their connections
have to be accessible for the purposes of maintenance,
repair and replacement.
1.6
Large doors in switchboards shall be fitted
with arresting devices.
1.7
Electrical components mounted in the doors of
switchboards, e.g. switchgear, measuring devices and
fuses for voltages over 50 V, shall be safeguarded
against accidental contact. Such doors are to be
earthed.
1.8
Where fuses are fitted above switchgear or
bare connecting wires or leads, measures are to be
taken to ensure that falling parts (e.g. fuse cartridges)
cannot come into contact with live components.
1.9
Operating devices and fuses shall be safely
accessible.
1.10
For circuit breakers and load-switches, the
minimum distances above the arc chutes specified by
the manufacturers are to be maintained.
1.11
Knife-type fuses for supply-circuits are only
permitted if they can be safely withdrawn and inserted.
2.
Main switchboards
2.1
Observation of the measuring and indicating
devices and operation of the switchgear shall be possible from the front side of the switchboard with the
doors closed.
2.2
Main switchboards are to be designed with
regard to the connection of generators and outgoing
circuits in such a way that, as far as possible, important equipment remains operative in the event of damage to one section of the switchboard.
1.2
All screwed joints and connections shall be
secured against self-acting loosening.
2.3
1.3
All conductors shall be secured jig-proof and
are to be kept away from sharp edges. Conductors
leading to equipment mounted in doors are to be laid
tension-free.
2.3.1
Where circuit breakers are used, the following is required:
1.4
Main and emergency switchboards shall be
fitted with insulation hand rails or handles.
Chapter 8
Page 11e2
Section 11e D
Switchgear Assemblies
2.3.2
The following is required for each threephase alternator:
2.3.3
The following is required for each direct
current generator:
1 voltmeter
1 ammeter
2.4
2.4.1
Each supply line run from the main switchboard shall be provided with a circuit breaker with
overcurrent and short-circuit protection, or with a fuse
for each non-earthed conductor and an all-pole switch,
or with a contactor with control switch. Where fuses
and switches are used, the sequence bus-bar-fuseswitch is to be used.
2.4.2
2.5
Measuring instruments
Emergency switchboard
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Circuit breakers
Load switches
3.1
The current rating of load switches shall be at
least equal to that of the fuse protecting the circuit and
they shall have a making/breaking capacity in accordance with AC-22 A or DC-22 A (IEC publication
60947-3).
3.2
Where fuses and switches are employed, the
sequence bus bar-fuse-switch is to be used generally.
4.
Fuses
4.1
Fuse links shall have an enclosed fusion
space. They shall be made of ceramic or other material
recognized by GL as equivalent.
4.2
Fuses may be used for overload protection
only up to a rating of 315 A. Exceptions to this Rule
are subject to approval by GL.
Distribution panels
Distribution panels are to be equipped with the necessary devices for the protection of the connected circuits
and for the supply of consumers (see Section 11d).
5.
Motor starters
C.
Selection of Switchgear
1.
General
1.1
All electrical equipment has to be protected
against damage due to overloads and short circuits.
D.
1.
General
2.1
The rated short-circuit breaking capacity Icn
of a switching device shall not be less than the maximum current to be broken in the event of a short circuit at the place where the protective device is fitted.
2.2
The rated short-circuit making capacity Icm of
a circuit breaker shall not be less than the maximum
instantaneous asymmetric short-circuit current at the
place where it is fitted.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 11e
Switchgear Assemblies
2.3
The peak short circuit strength of a switching
unit and its components shall correspond to the maximum short-circuit current which can arise at the place
where it is fitted.
2.4
Circuit breakers whose making/breaking
capacities are less than the anticipated maximum
short-circuit currents are to be protected by back-up
fuses of sufficient breaking capacity.
3.
Selective arrangement
Chapter 8
Page 11e3
6.
6.1
Motors with a power rating of more than
1 kW shall be individually protected against overloads
and short-circuit. For steering gear motors see Section
11g, A.
The protective devices shall be compatible with the
mode of operation of the motors and have to provide
reliable protection against thermal overload.
6.2
The switchgear of motors, whose simultaneous restarting on restoration of the supply voltage
might endanger operation, shall be provided with
undervoltage protection which causes disconnection of
the circuit if the voltage drops or fails and which prevents automatic reconnection.
The undervoltage protection shall operate reliably in
the event of the voltage dropping to between 70 % and
35 % of the rated voltage.
6.3
Where necessary, the start-up of motors
which are required to restart automatically following
restoration of the voltage is to be staggered in such a
way that the starting currents do not overload the
vessel's mains.
7.
4.
The current-time characteristics of overcurrent protection devices shall be compatible with the system components to be protected, and with the requirements of
selectivity.
5.
5.1
Short circuit protection is required for every
non-earthed conductor.
5.2
Overcurrent protection is required for at least
one conductor in insulated direct current and singlephase alternating current circuits.
Overcurrent protection is required for at least two
phases in insulated, load-balanced three-phase circuits.
5.3
Overcurrent protection is required for each
non-earthed conductor in earthed systems. The continuity of earthed conductors shall not be interrupted by
short-circuit or overcurrent protection devices, except
in the case of multipole disconnection devices which
simultaneously interrupt all the conductors, whether
earthed or not.
5.4
Determined for the overcurrent protection of
the entire circuit (switchgear, switchboard wiring,
supply cables and equipment) according to regulations
is the rated current In of the connected equipment or in
the case of grouped supply cables the evaluated total
rated current.
Motor protection
Each non-earthed primary or secondary system serving power, heating or lighting installations shall be
fitted with an equipment which monitors the insulation
resistance relative to the vessel's hull and gives a visual and audible alarm if the insulation resistance value
is abnormally low, see also Section 11k, D.3.10.
Insulation monitoring devices may be dispensed with
in the case of secondary systems such as control circuits. The audible alarm signal may be dispensed with
on fishing vessels with Class Notation K.
E.
1.
Bus bars
1.1
Materials
Temperature
Section 11e F
Chapter 8
Page 11e4
1.3
Switchgear Assemblies
I - Part 1
GL 2007
2.
Switchboard wiring
2.1
Instrument and control wiring is to be of the
stranded type and is to have heat resisting and flame
retarding insulation.
2.2
The nominal cross-section of the conductors
shall be sufficient for the rated current of the connected facility and are selected in accordance with
Table 11e.2.
Minimum
clearance
Minimum
creepage distance
[V] (AC/DC)
[mm]
[mm]
10
15
20
25
12
20
25
35
> 125
> 250
>
125
250
690
690
F.
1.
Measuring instruments have to be insensitive
to vibrations or mounted so as to be protected from
their effects. Instruments used for the primary machines shall not have an error greater than 1,5 % in
relation to full scale value.
Nominal cross-section
of conductor - total
cross-section in the case
of conductors connected
in parallel
[mm2]
Current
[A]
Current
[A]
Current
[A]
1
1,5
2,5
4
6
10
16
25
35
50
70
95
120
9
12
16
20
26
36
48
66
82
104
130
157
186
12
15
20
27
35
48
65
86
107
133
164
198
231
15
19
25
34
42
58
78
102
125
157
194
231
272
Note
The current ratings shown apply to conductors with a maximum permissible operating temperature T on the conductor of 70C
and an ambient temperature of 45C. For conductors with a maximum permissible operating temperature T deviating from 70C,
the current rating is to be determined by applying the correction factor F.
60 C
65 C
70 C
75 C
80 C
85 C
0,77
0,89
1,00
1,10
1,18
1,26
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 11e
Switchgear Assemblies
2.
The upper limit of the graduation of each
voltmeter shall not be less than 120 % of the normal
voltage of the circuit. The graduation must include a
red mark corresponding to the normal voltage.
3.
The upper limit of the scale of every ammeter
or wattmeter shall not be less than 130 % of the normal value in the circuit where it is inserted. The
graduation must be provided with a red mark corresponding to the normal value at full load. The ammeter for direct current generators and the wattmeters of
alternators able to work in parallel must be capable of
showing the return current or the return power respectively.
G.
1.
Type-approvals
Chapter 8
Page 11e5
2.3.3
High-voltage test
2.3.4
2.
2.1
All switchboards are to be tested in the manufacturer's works.
2.2
The following are subject to testing in the
presence of a GL Surveyor:
main switchboards
emergency switchboards
Scope of tests
2.3.1
Visual inspection
Devices and components shall be checked in compliance with the approved drawings. The components
and materials used shall conform to the Rules.
2.3.2
Function test
Test voltage
(AC)
(rms)
[V]
60
1000
60 < Ui 300
300 < Ui 690
2000
3000
3500
2500
3500
Test voltage
(AC)
(rms)
[V]
[V]
Ui 12
250
12 < Ui 60
500
Ui > 60
2 Ui + 1000,
but at least 1500
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 11f
Power Electronics
Chapter 8
Page 11f1
Section 11f
Power Electronics
B.
A.
General
Construction
1.
The rules set out in Section 11e are to be
observed, wherever applicable.
2.
Each power-electronics system shall be provided with separate means for disconnection from the
mains. In the case of consumers up to a nominal current of 315 A the combination fuse-contactor may be
used. In all other cases a circuit breaker shall be provided on the mains side.
3.
Equipment shall be readily accessible for
purposes of measurement and repair. Devices such as
simulator circuits, test sockets, indicating lights, etc.
are to be provided for functional supervision and fault
location.
4.
Control- and alarm electronics shall be galvanically separated from power circuits.
5.
External pulse cables are to be laid twisted in
pairs and screened, and kept as short as possible.
C.
1.
Mains reactions of power electronics facilities shall be taken into consideration in the planning of
the overall installation, see Section 11a, F. and J.
2.
Rectifier systems have to guarantee secure
operation even under the maximum permissible voltage and frequency fluctuations, see Section 11a, F. In
the event of unacceptably large frequency and/or voltage variations in the supply voltage, the system has to
shut-off or remain in a safe operating condition.
3.
For the supply of mains, number and rating of
electronic facilities is to be so scaled that in the event
of failure of any one power-electronics facility the
remainder of the installation is sufficient to:
4.
The semiconductor rectifiers and the associated fuses shall be so selected that their load current is
at least 10 % less than the limit current determined in
accordance with the coolant temperature, the load and
the mode of operation.
5.
The permissible periodic peak blocking voltage of the individual component shall be greater by a
factor of at least 1,8 than the peak value of the undistorted supply voltage. This value may be reduced for
static converter circuits with separate power supplies.
6.
Electrical charges in power electronic modules shall drop to a voltage of less than 50 V in a period of less than 5 s after disconnection from the
mains supply. Should longer periods be required for
discharge, a warning label is to be affixed to the appliance.
7.
If the replacement of plug-in printed circuit
boards while the unit is in operation can cause the
destruction of components or the uncontrolled behaviour of drives, a caution label shall be notifying to this
effect.
8.
The absence of external control signals, e.g.
due to a circuit break, shall not cause a dangerous
situation.
9.
Control-circuit supplies are to be safeguarded
against unintended disconnection, if this could endanger or damage the plant.
10.
It is necessary to ensure that, as far as possible, faults do not cause damage in the rest of the system, or in other static converters.
10.1
Special attention shall be paid to the following points:
Chapter 8
Page 11f2
Section 11f
Power Electronics
I - Part 1
GL 2007
F.
Protection Equipment
1.
Power electronic equipment shall be protected against exceeding of their current and voltage
limits. For protective devices, it must be ensured that
upon actuating
the selection of the ratio between the subtransient reactance of the system and the commutating reactance of the static converter
10.2
Where filter circuits and capacitors are used
for reactive current compensation, attention is to be
paid to the following:
reaction on the mean and peak value of the system voltage in case of frequency fluctuations
D.
Cooling
1.
2.
The safety in operation shall be proved for
liquid cooling and forced cooling.
3.
An impairment of cooling shall not result in
unacceptable overtemperatures, an overtemperature
alarm shall be provided.
E.
2.
In equipment with a current rating of more
than 100 A, each bridge arm or parallel-connected
valve shall have a special semiconductor fuse. Exceptions are quenching circuits in self-regulating systems
and converters operated with a load-independent current. For all other equipment, fuses on the input/output
side may also be used.
3.
Special semiconductor fuses shall be monitored. After tripping the equipment has to be switched
off, if this is necessary for the prevention of damage.
Activating of a safety device shall trigger an alarm.
4.
Equipment without fuses is permissible if a
short circuit will not lead to the destruction of the
semiconductor components.
G.
Tests
1.
General
1.
Control, adjustment and monitoring shall
ensure that the permissible operating values of the
facilities are not exceeded.
2.
The power supply to all control circuits shall
be monitored for voltage failure.
3.
For the monitoring of individual modules and
assemblies of essential equipment, components shall
be provided which, in the event of a fault, facilitate its
recognition.
4.
The control shall be so engineered that the
installation is protected from damage during the
switching-on and switching-off sequence, dedication
alterations and faulty operation.
2.
2.1
Voltage test
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 11f
Power Electronics
Chapter 8
Page 11f3
the cabinet
2.3
the mains connection side, if the power electronics device is electrically isolated from the mains
2.2
2.4
Function test
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 11g
Power Equipment
Chapter 8
Page 11g1
Section 11g
Power Equipment
A.
Steering Gear
3.
1.
General
3.1
If the steering gear is hydraulically operated,
the rated output of the steering gear motors is to be
determined at the maximum load of the pump against
the maximum pressure produced by the steering gear
(adjusting of safety valves), under consideration of the
efficiency of the pump.
1.1
Two, with regard to their construction as far
as possible independent, steering gear systems are
required as follows:
1.2
The electrical systems of the main and auxiliary steering gear shall be so arranged that as far as
reasonable and practicable a failure in one of them
will not render the other one inoperative. This also
applies when the main steering gear comprises two or
more identical power units and therefore an auxiliary
steering gear need not be fitted.
1.3
For increased vibration loads in the steering
gear compartment see Section 11a, E.2.
2.
Power supply
2.1
The power supply to steering gears is also
required to comply with the provisions of Section 11d,
I.
2.2
For every steering gear power unit a separate
power supply circuit from the main switchboard is to
be incorporated. However, one of these circuits may be
supplied through the emergency switchboard, if provided and if the emergency generator capacity is adequate to supply the steering gear in addition to the
emergency consumers for a period of at least 10 minutes.
3.2
The following requirements apply to the
modes of operation:
3.2.1
mand:
4.
Protective equipment
5.1
The circuits and motors of steering gears
shall be protected against short circuit only.
2.3
After an electrical power failure, the steering
gear power units shall restart automatically when the
power is restored.
5.2
Where fuses are provided, their current ratings are to be of two steps higher than the rated current of the motor or circuit control circuit; however, in
the case of intermittent service motors, the fuse rating
is not to exceed 160 % of the rated motor current.
2.4
The motors for the power units shall be capable of being started or stopped individually or together
from the steering gear compartment and at the wheelhouse, by electrically and mechanically separate
switches.
5.3
Protection against excess current, if provided,
shall be for not less than twice the full load current of
the motor or circuit so protected and shall be arranged
to permit the passage of the appropriate starting currents.
The supply for the remote start and for the remote
control of the power units shall come from the starter
box in the steering compartment to which the remote
control belongs and shall be able to be de-energized
from there.
6.
6.1
Vessels with electrical operated steering gear
controls shall have two independent steering gear
Chapter 8
Page 11g2
Section 11g D
Power Equipment
I - Part 1
GL 2007
B.
1.
Power supply
Protective equipment
7.2
A red indicator light indicating failure of the
steering gear, e.g. in the event of failure of the main
power supply or remote steering control is to be provided.
7.3
A yellow indicator light indicating overload
of the electric motor and/or loss of anyone of the supply phases in case of a three phase system is to be
provided.
7.4
A system giving an audible warning of the
occurrence of the faults mentioned in 7.2 and 7.3 in
the wheelhouse is to be provided. The audible alarm is
to be cancellable. The stopping of an audible alarm is
not to prevent the alarming of a fault in the other steering gear drive units in operation.
8.
Tests
9.1
Electrical machinery, switchgear cabinets and
control systems for steering gears are to be tested and
certified at the manufacturers works in the presence
of a GL Surveyor.
9.2
functional testing
C.
1.
Facilities shall be provided for the system
control from the wheelhouse and from the engine
room.
2.
The failure of any control system shall be
signalled visually and audibly in the wheelhouse.
D.
1.
Fire pumps
The power supply to the fire pump motors, with regard both to the assignment of power source and to
routing of power lines, is to be so arranged that as far
as possible a fire in any fire zone does not render all
the fire pumps unserviceable.
2.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 11g
Power Equipment
E.
1.
General
1.1
Motors and switchgear located on deck shall
be protected against temporary flooding (IP 56 enclosure), see also Section 11a, J.
1.2
Levers and handwheels for the control of
winches and lifting equipment has to return automatically to the zero position when released. Exceptions
may be allowed in the case of fishing net winches and
special purpose drives. The control consoles are to be
equipped with push buttons for emergency stops.
1.3
Brakes shall apply automatically if the electrical power supply fails.
2.
2.1
Motors are to be rated for short-term operation of 30 minutes (S2 30 min) unless the type of
service for which the vessel is intended requires more
stringent demand.
In addition, the motors for anchor windlasses shall be
able to deliver twice the rated torque for 2 minutes
without dangerous overheating.
2.2
At vessels with stern fishing system, compare
Section 6, periodically overloads of the drives of the
fishnet winches are to be considered and should be
able to deliver 1,6 the rated torque for 2 minutes without overheating.
2.3
To prevent excessive overload of motors and,
as far as possible, gears, electrical overload protection
is to be provided in an appropriate manner.
Chapter 8
Page 11g3
F.
1.
Space heating
1.1
Only watertight heaters may be used in washrooms, bathrooms, other damp rooms and machinery
spaces (IP 44 class enclosure).
1.2
Where heaters are installed inside the bulkhead lining, a tray made of incombustible material is
to be fitted behind the heater to prevent the accumulation of heat behind the lining.
1.3
In the case of ceiling-mounted heaters, it is
essential to ensure that the heat is radiated downwards.
An insulation layer of incombustible material is to be
fitted above the heater. The heating elements are to be
protected against accidental touch.
2.
G.
1.
Plug and socket connections for power circuits are to be fused.
2.
The specified class of protection against
touch and water shall be ensured for the entire appliance with the plug inserted and for the socket even
when the plug is withdrawn. The socket is to be fitted
in accordance with its specified position for use.
H.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 11h
Chapter 8
Page 11h1
Section 11h
Control, Monitoring and Vessel's Safety Systems
A.
General
1.
Systems
Control, monitoring and alarm systems generally consist of electrical facilities and devices which are referred to in the following as "systems". The term includes the control, monitoring and measuring systems
necessary to the operation of the machinery and the
safety of the vessel.
2.
B.
1.
Safety devices
1.1
The design of safety devices shall be as simple as possible and has to be reliable and inevitable in
operation. Proven safety devices which are not depending on a power source are to be preferred.
1.2
The suitability and function of safety devices
shall be demonstrated in the given application.
1.3
Safety devices shall be designed so that potential faults such as, for example, loss of voltage or a
broken wire shall not create a hazard to human life,
vessel or machinery. These faults and also the tripping
of safety devices shall be signalled by an alarm.
1.4
For preference, safety devices shall be designed in conventional technology (hard wired). Alternative technical solutions shall be agreed with GL.
1.5
The adjustment facilities for safety devices
shall be designed so that the last setting can be detected.
1.6
Where auxiliary energy is needed for the
function of safety devices, this has to be monitored
and a failure has to be alarmed.
1.7
Security equipment like short circuit monitoring of generators as well as overspeed monitoring of
diesel engines shall run independently from automatic
power control system, to ensure that the equipment
can continue operating manually in case of a breakdown.
1.8
Safety devices are subject to mandatory type
approval.
2.
Safety system
2.1
A safety system is to be provided so that
serious malfunctioning machinery or boiler operations, which present an immediate danger, shall initiate the automatic shutdown of that part of the plant
and an alarm shall be given. Shutdown of the propulsion system shall not be automatically activated except
in cases which could lead to serious damage, complete
breakdowns, or explosion.
2.2
Where arrangements for overriding the shutdown of the main propelling machinery are fitted,
these shall be such as to preclude inadvertent activation. Visual means shall be provided to show whether
or not it has been activated.
2.3
Advance alarms shall be given before automatic shutdown.
2.4
The monitoring circuits of safety systems
shall be electrically isolated from those of the alarm
system (separate sensors) and have to be decoupled to
prevent reciprocal effects in the event of faults.
In exceptional cases and with special approval, safety
systems may share monitoring circuits with the alarm
system provided that indicators with a separate power
supply additional to those of the alarm system are
mounted in the wheelhouse and in the engine room to
signal the need for a shutdown (instead of automatic
shutdown) or slow down.
2.5
Safety systems are subject to mandatory type
approval.
Chapter 8
Page 11h2
3.
Section 11h C
Alarm systems
3.1
A machinery alarm system is required to give
a visual and audible warning of any unacceptable
deviations of the operating parameters requiring attention.
The alarms shall be perceptible throughout the whole
machinery space, on vessels equipped for operation
with unattended machinery space also in the wheelhouse and living quarters of the engineers or the crew
responsible for the machinery.
In vessels with the Class Notation K an alarm system
to be capable of sounding and indicating visually each
separate alarm function in the wheelhouse only, may
be permitted.
3.2
Indication is to be provided that the system is
operative.
3.3
Visual signals are to be individually displayed. The meaning of each signal has to be made
clear by inscription or symbol.
Where a fault is indicated, the visual indication is to
remain visible until the fault has been eliminated.
Means shall be provided to distinguish an alarm which
has been acknowledged to one which has not been
acknowledged, e.g. steady/flashing signal, light/dark
signal, etc.
3.4
Provision shall be made for acknowledging
audible alarms. The acknowledgement of any alarm
shall not inhibit another alarm.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
C.
1.
3.1
All instruments and indicators important to
the control of the vessel shall be legible at all times.
3.2
All indicators and illuminations for instruments shall be provided with dimmers either individually or in groups.
4.
3.5
Alarm systems shall generally be designed on
the closed-circuit principle or the monitored opencircuit principle, as appropriate.
6.
3.6
Exceptions may be admitted for small installations confined to individual auxiliary machines or on
fishing vessels with Class Notation K.
3.7
The alarm system is to be supplied by a network with battery back-up.
3.8
The amount of the alarm points is to be determined in accordance with Section 9b, J.
7.1
7.1.1
The following voice communications are
required:
a)
3.9
For machinery alarm systems for vessels with
periodically unattended machinery space reference is
made to Section 12, D.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
b)
Section 11h
Bridge-engine room
Required is a two-way voice link between the
bridge and the engine room from which the
main propulsion plant can be controlled.
7.1.2
Communication links, if electrical, provided
for in 7.1.1 a) and 7.1.1 b) are to be independent of the
vessel's mains, unless they are backed-up by battery.
7.2
A two-way intercommunication is to be provided between the bridge and the engineers' accommodation
rooms.
This system may consist of portable or permanently
installed equipment and shall be capable of operation
even if the main power supply fails.
2.2
A sufficient number of alarm facilities is to
be provided to ensure that all persons on board can be
alerted without fail. Additional flashing lights may be
used where necessary (with high ambient noise). See
also IMO Resolution A.830(19)/1995.
2.3
The general emergency alarm shall be powered from the vessel's main supply and the emergency
source of electrical power.
2.4
A loudspeaker system may be accepted as
alarm facility.
3.
1.
Engineers' alarms
General alarm
2.1
Vessels for unrestricted service are to be
provided with an alarm system enabling the crew to be
alerted or called to the boat stations in case of danger.
It shall be possible to initiate the alarm from the
wheelhouse.
Fire extinguishing
D.
Chapter 8
Page 11h3
5.1
Unattended machinery spaces shall be provided with an approved automatic fire detection and
alarm system.
5.2
with
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 11i
Chapter 8
Page 11i1
Section 11i
Lighting and Socket-Outlets
A.
1.
There is to be a lighting system supplied by
the main source of electrical power and illuminating
all parts of the vessel normally accessible to the crew
and an emergency lighting system supplied by the
emergency source of electrical power, if any.
2.
Lights in machinery spaces, other important
service and control stations, fish handling and processing decks, passage ways and stairways leading to the
boat deck are to be so arranged that the failure of any
one branch circuit will not leave these spaces in darkness, see Section 11d, I.4.
2.2
All lighting fixtures shall be so mounted that
combustible parts are not ignited by the generated
heat, and they themselves are not exposed to damage.
The minimum distances indicated on the lighting fixtures shall be respected.
Where no minimum distances are specified, the minimum distances in the direction of radiation indicated
in Table 11i.1 shall be applied for lighting fixtures in
accordance with IEC publication 60598-1 Luminaires,
Part 1 - General Requirements and Tests.
Table 11i.1 Minimum distances for the mounting
of lighting fixtures
Rated power
3.
Lights on open decks which are to be in use
while the vessel is under way are to be located in such
a way that they do not interfere with navigation. If
necessary, they are to be fitted with shields.
B.
Lighting Installations
1.
1.1
A sufficient number of lighting fixtures shall
be provided to achieve a good level of illumination.
1.2
The arrangement of the main- and emergency
lighting systems (sources of electrical power, associated transformer) shall be such that a fire or other
incident does not cause the failure of both systems.
1.3
Following a failure of the main power supply,
the emergency lighting system shall cut in automatically. Local switches may be provided only where the
ability to switch off the emergency lighting is required.
2.
2.1
Within arm's reach of showers and bathtubs
up to 1,2 m from the shower head and/or 0,6 m from
the tubrim vertical surface and up to a height of 2,25 m,
lighting fixtures shall only be installed if their degree of
protection is at least IP 55.
Switches shall not be installed within arm's reach.
[W]
Minimum
distance
[m]
0,5
0,8
1,0
C.
Socket-Outlets
1.
General
1.1
The supply for socket-outlets in the accommodation, day rooms and service rooms (250 V) are to
be run from lighting distribution panels. The maximum fuse rating for a circuit is 16 A.
1.2
Sockets outside the accommodation area shall
be connected to separate circuits. When calculating
the permissible connected load, one socket is equivalent to two lighting points.
1.3
For the sockets of distribution systems with
different
voltage
and/or
frequencies,
noninterchangeable plugs and socket outlets shall be used.
1.4
Plug-in connections shall not be installed
below the floor in engine rooms or boiler rooms.
1.5
Socket outlets for power circuits over 16 A
AC or 10 A DC shall be interlocked in such a way that
the plug can be neither inserted nor withdrawn when
the socket contacts are live.
Chapter 8
Page 11i2
2.
Section 11i
2.1
In locations containing a bath or shower the
electrical equipment shall be installed in accordance
with IEC publication 60364-7-701.
2.2
The minimum degree of protection against
foreign bodies and water shall be appropriate to Table
11i.2.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
0
1
IP 34
Zone
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 11j
Cable Network
Chapter 8
Page 11j1
Section 11j
Cable Network
A.
1.
General instructions
Rated voltage
Temperatures
B.
1.
General
1.1
Cables are to be rated according to the expected service load based on the connected load and
type of duty of the consumers supplied.
1.2
If all the connected consumers in a part of the
system are certain not to be in operation simultaneously, a diversity factor may be used for determining
the cross-section of the group supply lines.
1.3
For cables and wiring in switchboards and
distribution equipment see Section 11e, E.2.
4.
2.1
The conductor cross-sections indicated in
Table 11j.1 are the minimum cross-sections for external cabling respective for internal wiring, e.g. of
switchgear and consoles.
Mechanical protection
4.1
Cables installed in locations liable to damage
during normal operation of the vessel, e.g. engine
rooms, fish handling rooms, open deck are to be provided with braided metallic armour or otherwise be
suitably protected from mechanical injury.
For further requirements see D.
4.2
Except for final sub-circuits of room lighting
and space heating systems, as a rule cables of stranded
core are to be used.
4.3
For single-phase and three-phase AC systems
multi-core cables are to be used wherever possible.
5.
Mobility
5.1
Machines or equipment mounted on rubber or
spring vibration absorbers are to be connected via
2.
2.2
The maximum current-carrying capacity of
conductor cross-sections for external cabling shall be
taken from GL Rules, Chapter 3 Electrical Installations, Section 12, B.4.2.
2.3
In accommodation and day rooms, flexible
cables with a conductor cross-section of not less than
0,75 mm2 (AWG 18) may also be used for the connection of movable equipment with a current consumption of up to 6 A.
2.4
I.1.2.
2.5
J.2.4.
Chapter 8
Page 11j2
Section 11j
Cable Network
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Nominal cross-section
Type of installation
external wiring
internal wiring
international
AWG
international
AWG
1,0 mm2
17
1,0 mm2
17
1,0 mm2
17
1,0 mm2
17
0,75 mm2
18
0,5 mm2
20
0,5 mm2
20
0,1 mm2
28
0,2 mm2
24
0,1 mm2
28
0,2 mm2
24
0,1 mm2
28
3.
Voltage drop
3.1
The section of the cables shall be calculated
not only according to the admissible intensity, but also
to the voltage drop allowable.
Under normal service conditions the voltage drop
between the busbars and the most unfavourable point
in the system concerned may not generally exceed
6 %, or 10 % in battery-powered circuits of 50 V and
less. For navigation lights the voltage drop may not
exceed 5 %.
3.2
Where short-term peak loads occur due, e.g.
to the starting of machines, it is essential to ensure that
the voltage drop in the cable does not cause faults in
the system.
C.
2.
2.1
Cables shall be protected against short circuit
and overcurrent.
2.2
Rating and setting of the protection devices
shall be in compliance with the requirements in Section 11d.
2.3
Cables protected against overcurrent at the
consumers side require only short-circuit protection at
the supply side. For steering gear, see Section 11g, A.
2.4
Exciter cables for DC motors and DC generators operating in parallel shall not be fused. Exciter
cables for individually connected DC generators and
synchronous three-phase alternators shall be fused
only if there are special reasons for it, e.g. where the
cables are passing through various compartments of
the vessel.
1.
Mechanical protection
Separation of circuits
3.1
A separate cable shall normally be provided
for each circuit having its own overcurrent and short
circuit protection. Deviating from this requirement the
following may be combined in a common cable:
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 11j
Cable Network
Chapter 8
Page 11j3
3.2
Separate cables shall be provided for safety
voltage circuits.
3.3
Separate cables shall be provided for intrinsically safe circuits.
1.3
Heat sources such as boilers, hot pipes, etc.
shall be bypassed so that the cables are not subjected
to additional heating. If this is not possible, the cables
are to be shielded from thermal radiation.
4.
4.1
For single-phase and three-phase AC systems,
multi-core cables are to be used wherever possible.
4.2
Should it be necessary to lay single-core
cables for the carriage of more than 10 A in singlephase or three-phase AC circuits, the special requirements of Chapter 3 Electrical Installations, Section
12, D.7. shall be fulfilled.
4.3
In three-phase systems without hull return,
three-core cables shall be used for three-phase connections; four-core cables are required for circuits with
loaded neutral point.
4.4
In three-phase systems with hull return the
asymmetry of the currents in the three conductors of
three-core cables shall not exceed 20 A (see Section
11d, I.).
4.5
In DC systems without hull return multi-core
cables shall be provided in all cases of smaller crosssections.
Where single-core cables are used for large crosssections, the outgoing- and return-cables are to be laid
as close as possible to each other over their entire
length to avoid magnetic stray fields.
4.6
The generator cables, all cables run from the
main or emergency switchboard or an auxiliary
switchboard, and all interconnecting cables for essential equipment, shall be laid as far as possible uninterrupted in length to the distribution panels or to the
equipment.
4.7
The cables of intrinsically safe circuits shall
be laid at a distance of at least 50 mm separated from
the cables of non-intrinsically safe circuits. The laying
of intrinsically safe circuits together with non-intrinsically safe circuits in a pipe is not permitted. Cables
of intrinsically safe circuits shall be marked.
D.
Installation
1.
Routing of cables
1.1
The routes of cables shall be such that cables
are laid as straight as possible and are not exposed to
mechanical damage.
1.2
For bends, the minimum internal radius of
curvature permitted by the maker has to be observed.
1.4
Cables are to be installed in such a manner
that stresses on the cables are not transmitted to the
conductors. They are not to be fastened directly to the
shell plating.
1.5
Cables may be installed behind sheathing, but
they are not to be imbedded in structural heat insulation. They are to pass through such insulation at right
angles and are to be protected by a continuous pipe
with a stuffing tube at one end.
For deck penetrations stuffing tubes are to be at the
upper end of the pipe and for bulkhead penetrations
they are to be on the uninsulated side of the bulkhead.
1.6
Cables may be installed behind panelling,
provided all connections are accessible and the location of concealed connection boxes is indicated. Dome
fixtures are to be installed so that they are vented or
they are to be fitted with fire-resistant material in such
a manner as to protect the insulated wiring leading to
the lamps and any exposed woodwork from excessive
temperature.
1.7
Cables for supply of essential equipment and
emergency consumers, e.g. lighting and essential
communications and signalling systems shall, wherever possible, bypass galleys, laundries, Category A
engine rooms and their casings and areas with a high
fire risk and laundries, fish handling and fish processing spaces and other spaces where there is a high
moisture content.
1.8
Cables which feed the fire pumps and the
emergency switchboard shall be of a fire-resistant type
where they pass through high fire risk areas.
1.9
Where practicable, all such cables (1.7; 1.8)
should be run in such manner as to preclude their
being rendered unserviceable by heating of the bulkheads that may be caused by a fire in an adjacent
space.
1.10
Cables installed in refrigerating compartments shall be suitable for low temperatures and high
humidity.
1.11
Cables in hazardous areas zone 0 and 1 shall
be armoured or screened, or run inside a metal tube.
2.
2.1
Cables are to be supported in cable trays or
hangers. The distance between the supports in cable
Chapter 8
Page 11j4
Section 11j
Cable Network
I - Part 1
GL 2007
3.
3.2
The penetration shall not impair the mechanical strength of the bulkhead.
3.3
Additionally, each stuffing tube, transit device or pourable material is to be of a character so as
not to damage the cable physically or through chemical action or through heat build-up.
3.4
Cables passing through decks are to be protected from damage by protection pipes or casings up
to a height of at least 300 mm.
3.5
Deck and bulkhead penetration systems must
be approved by GL.
Measures to limit the propagation of fire
along cable and wire bundles
All cables shall be so installed that the original flameretardant properties of the individual cables are not
impaired.
5.
3.1
Where cables pass through watertight, firetight or gastight bulkheads or decks, the penetrations
are to be made through the use of approved stuffing
tubes, transit devices or pourable materials which will
maintain the watertight, fire-tight or gastight integrity
of the bulkheads or decks.
4.
5.1
Except where laid in metal conduits or ducts,
cables and wires with metal sheaths or metal braiding
are to be used above the uppermost metal deck and in
positions where the cables and wires are not separated
7.1
Metallic cable sheaths, armouring and shields
in power installations shall be electrically connected to
the vessel's hull at each end; single-core cables shall
be earthed at one end only. For cables and wires for
electronic equipment, the manufacturer's recommendations shall be observed, earthing at one end only is
recommended.
7.2
Electrical continuity of all metallic cable
coverings shall also be maintained inside of cable
junction and connection boxes.
7.3
Metallic cable sheaths, armouring and shields
shall be earthed, preferably by the use of standard
cable gland fittings designed for that purpose, or by
suitable equivalent clips or joints.
7.4
Metallic cable sheaths, armouring and shields
shall in no case be deemed to constitute earthing conductors for the protective earthing of the connected
electrical equipment.
8.
8.1
Cables shall be extended only with the approval of GL. The used material shall have been type
tested by GL and shall maintain the flame-retardant
and, where required, the fire-resistant properties of the
cables.
8.2
Junction and distribution boxes shall be accessible and marked for identification.
8.3
Cables for safety extra-low voltage shall not
pass a junction or distribution box together with cables
for higher voltage systems.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 11j
Cable Network
8.4
The terminals for different types of systems,
especially such of differently operating voltages, shall
be separated.
9.
9.1
All cables shall be so installed that the original flame-retardant properties of the individual cables
are not impaired. This requirement can be considered
to be fulfilled if:
the bundled cables are individually flameretardant and have been successfully passed the
bundle fire test in accordance with IEC publication 60332-3 category A/F
Chapter 8
Page 11j5
9.2
For cable bundles consisting of cables which
have not been subjected to a bundle fire test, the precautions shall be taken to limit the fire propagation in
accordance with Chapter 3 Electrical Installations,
Section 12, D.
10.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 11k
Electrical Equipment
Chapter 8
Page 11k1
Section 11k
Electrical Equipment
A.
Electrical Machinery
1.
General
1.1
Except as regards the particular points mentioned in the following, the generators and motors are
to be constructed and installed according to recommendations of IEC Publication 60034 and the requirements of Section 11a, H.
3.2
For generators and motors intended for electrical propulsion special requirements are to be observed, see
Section 11a, A.
4.1
In conjunction with the specified protective
devices, machines shall be able to withstand the dynamic and thermal stresses likely to result from a short
circuit.
1.2
The permissible limits of temperature rise,
particularly for windings, sliprings and commutators
for motors under continuous running and for generators, are given in Table 11k.1 with regard to 45 C
conventional ambient temperature
4.2
Where insulating materials are laminated, the
maximum temperature permitted for each individual
insulating material shall not be exceeded, see Table
11k.1.
1.3
The permissible temperature rise limits for
motors supplying an intermittent service will be specially considered by GL Head Office.
4.3
All windings have to be effectively protected
against the effects of oil vapours and air laden with
moisture or salt.
2.
5.
2.1
Draught ventilation
The class of enclosure of terminal boxes shall correspond to that of the machine, but shall in any case not
be less than IP 44, see Section 11a, J.
Surface cooling
3.1
Plain bearings
Provision shall be made for checking the bearing lubrication. Even in the case of the inclined positions
specified in Section 11a, E. no oil shall flow out and
penetrate into the machine.
In the case of bearings with force lubrication, failure
of the oil supply and the occurrence of excessive bearing temperatures shall trigger an alarm.
Antifriction bearings
6.
Windings
Terminal boxes
7.1
Machines supplying an essential service
together with their gear are to be submitted to tests to
verify that the requirements defined herein are complied with. For this purpose and without prejudice to
tests and inspections deemed necessary during construction and after completion, a Certificate of the
builder has to give the machine specifications and the
results of the required tests.
7.2
The machines listed in the following are
subject to testing in the manufacturer's works in the
presence of a GL Surveyor:
Chapter 8
Page 11k2
Section 11k A
Electrical Equipment
all other drive motors for essential auxiliary machines rated at 100 kW or over.
7.3
Heat test
7.3.1
Heat run until the final temperature corresponding to the required mode of operation is reached,
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Table 11k.1 Permitted temperature-rises of air cooled machines at an ambient temperature of 45C
(difference values in K)
No.
Machinery component
Insulation class
Method of
measurement 3
F1
H1
55
70
75
100
120
AC windings of machines
Commutator windings
55
70
75
100
120
Field windings of AC and DC machines with DC excitation, other than those specified under 4
55
70
75
100
120
a)
Field windings of synchronous machines with cylindrical rotors having DC excitation winding, embedded in slots except synchronous induction motors
85
105
125
b)
55
70
75
100
120
c)
R
Th
55
70
75
95
115
d)
R
Th
60
75
85
105
125
Th
55
70
75
95
115
Th
55
70
75
95
115
Th
55
65
75
85
105
10
Plain bearings
45
11
Roller bearings
45
Surface temperature
75
Reference 35 2
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 11k
Electrical Equipment
Chapter 8
Page 11k3
7.5
7.4
Load characteristic
Overload test
7.6
Proof is required that windlass motors are capable of delivering twice the rated torque for two
minutes and motors for travel winches 1,6 the
rated torque for two minutes. Earlier overload
test on motors of identical construction can be
recognized.
7.8.1
The following requirements have to be considered:
a)
Short-circuit test
7.6.1
On all synchronous generators, the steady
short circuit current shall be determined with the exciter unit in operation.
7.6.2
A short-circuit withstand test may be demanded:
7.7
Overspeed test
for shaft generators arranged in the main shafting and whose construction makes testing impracticable, proof by computation of mechanical
strength is required
7.8.2
In the case of machines supplied by inverters
or operated in series with other machines, the maximum anticipated no-voltage is to be used as reference
in determining the test voltage.
7.9
As proof of mechanical strength, a two-minute overspeed test shall be carried out as follows:
Steering gear motors are to be tested in accordance with the provisions of Section 11g, A.3.
Winding test
Chapter 8
Page 11k4
Section 11k A
Electrical Equipment
I - Part 1
GL 2007
2 U + 500 V
2 U + 1000 V
1000 V + twice the maximum excitation voltage but
not less than 1500 V
a)
b)
over 500 V
1000 V + twice the maximum value of the rms voltage, which can occur under the specified starting
conditions, between the terminals of the field winding, or in the case of a sectionalized field winding
between the terminals of any section, with a minimum
of 1500 V
b)
1000 V + four times the open-circuit secondary voltage as defined in item 6a)
Exception 1:
Exciters of synchronous motors (including synchronous
induction motors) if connected to earth or disconnected
from the field windings during starting
Exception 2:
Separately excited field windings of exciters
No.
as under item 4
A repetition of the tests in items 1 to 7 above should
be avoided if possible, but if a test on an assembled
group of several pieces of new machines, each one of
which has previously passed its high-voltage test, is
made, the test voltage to be applied to such assembled
group shall be 80 % of the lowest test voltage appropriate for any part of the group. 1
Where a number of windings belonging to one or more machines are connected together, the test voltage is dictated by the maximum
voltage to earth which can occur.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 11k
Electrical Equipment
B.
1.
General
The tests mentioned under 3.2 till 3.5 shall be performed at approximately operating temperature. The
scope of the tests is defined in 3.2 to 3.6:
Coolant
Windings
Rating
2.1
Chapter 8
Page 11k5
3.2
The test shall be performed to determine the temperature rise, which shall not exceed the maximum permissible values shown in Table 11k.3.
Temperature-rise tests on transformers of identical
construction and carried out not more than 3 years
previously may be recognized. The referenced temperature rise shall be 10 % below the values shown in
Table 11k.3.
3.3
55
70
75
95
120
2.3
120 s
3.4
3.1
General
3.5
Winding test
Alternating withstand
voltage
[V]
50
250
600
1000
1000
1500
2500
3000
3.6
Transformers shall be tested in the manufacturer's
works. Transformers rated with 100 kVA and above
shall be tested in the presence of a GL Surveyor. A
works test report covering the tests carried out shall be
prepared.
Short-circuit test
On request, the short-circuit proof property in accordance with 2.3 shall be verified.
test frequency
rated frequency
Short-circuit resistance
3.
2.2
Heat test
Chapter 8
Page 11k6
Section 11k D
Electrical Equipment
I - Part 1
GL 2007
C.
D.
1.
General
1.
General
Rating of batteries
Storage batteries
Chargers
3.1
Chargers are to be so rated that discharged
storage batteries can be charged to 80 % of their rated
capacity within at least 15 hours without exceeding
the maximum permissible charging currents.
Low-Voltage switchgear
2.1
Circuit breakers
2.1.1
Drives
The making and breaking capacity is to be in accordance with IEC Publication 60947-2. Other standards
may be recognized.
3.
Protection devices
3.1
General
Short-circuit protection
Overcurrent protection
The operation of overcurrent relays shall not be effected by the ambient temperature.
Bimetal devices are to be compensated and, for motor
protection, are to be fitted with a re-closing inhibitor.
Overcurrent relays for motor protection shall be adjustable.
3.4
Undervoltage protection
Electrical Equipment
Chapter 8
Page 11k7
3.4.2
Short-circuit trips shall be delayed where the
selective disconnection of short circuits is necessary.
The reset ratio is also to be determined by reference to
the conditions after disconnection of a short circuit
and should be as far as possible approximate to unity.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
3.5
Section 11k
Shunt trips
2.
Shunt trips shall ensure the disconnection of the circuit- breakers even if the voltage drops to 85 % of the
rated voltage.
3.6
2.2
If the insulation consists of natural or synthetic rubber vulcanized with sulphur, the individual
conductor wires shall be tinned.
2.3
The conductors of movable wires shall be
finely stranded.
3.8
Check synchronizers
Insulation monitoring devices shall continuously display the insulation resistance for the distribution system and have to trigger an alarm should the insulation
resistance of the system fall below 50 Ohms per Volt
of mains voltage.
The measuring current may not exceed 30 mA in the
event of a dead short circuit to earth.
E.
3.
The materials used for insulation shall be of standardized types for which the maximum permissible temperatures at the conductors during undisturbed operation are specified.
4.
4.5
Outer metallic wire braids shall have a coating of protective paint, which have to be lead-free and
flame-retardant. The paint shall be of sufficiently low
viscosity when applied to enable it to penetrate readily
into the wire braid. When dry, it shall not flake off
when the cable is bent around a mandrel with a diameter of 15 times that of the cable.
Chapter 8
Page 11k8
5.
Section 11k G
Electrical Equipment
Identification
shall
have
Approvals
Tests
Temperature:
(25 2) C
Duration:
24 h
I - Part 1
GL 2007
7.3
Individual tests on non-type-tested cables and
wires shall be performed in the manufacturer's works
in the presence of a GL Surveyor.
conductor resistance
dielectric strength
insulation resistance
F.
Installation Material
1.
General
1.1
The installation material shall conform to IEC
publications. Other standards may be recognized by
GL.
1.2
It is necessary to ensure that terminals are
suitable for the connection of stranded conductors.
Exceptions are permitted for systems with solid conductors (e.g. lighting, socket-outlets and heating appliances in the accommodation area).
2.
Plug-and-socket connections
2.1
Depending on their application, the design of
plug-and-socket connections shall conform to the
following regulations:
a)
in the accommodation area, day rooms and service rooms (up to 16 A, 250 V AC) IEC publication 60083 or 60320
b)
c)
G.
Lighting Fittings
1.
General
I - Part 1
GL 2007
2.
Section 11k
Electrical Equipment
Design
H.
1.
General
Chapter 8
Page 11k9
Design
2.1
Space heaters
Continuous-flow electric calorifiers and water accumulators are to be equipped with two mutually independent temperature protection devices, one of which
shall be a permanently set safety temperature limiter
while the other may take the form of a thermostatic
controller.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 11l
Tests
Chapter 8
Page 11l1
Section 11l
Tests
A.
General
1.
The following Rules apply to the testing of
electrical and electronic installations, equipment and
components.
2.
Within the framework of their general quality
assurance programme, manufacturers shall ensure that
the products they manufacture conform to the specified requirements. Records shall be made, containing
quality assurance measures and tests and shall be
handed over to GL on request.
3.
For certain installations, equipment and components, testing is required in the presence of a GL
Surveyor according to these Rules, see C., D. and E.
C.
1.
1.1
The tests shall be carried out on the basis of
the Rules for Construction and the approved documents. They shall be performed in accordance with a
recognized standard.
1.2
Machines, appliances and installations subject to testing in accordance with 2. are to be tested in
the presence of a GL Surveyor unless the preconditions for one's own responsibility tests by the manufacturer are fulfilled, see 3.
The tests and items for testing specified below constitute minimum requirements.
2.
GL reserve the right to demand that tests also be performed on other items, either on board or in the manufacturer's works.
2.1
Electrical machines
4.
For appliances of a new type or for equipment which is being used for the first time on vessels
with GL Class, additional tests and trials are to be
agreed between the manufacturer and GL, if the circumstances this require.
5.
It is the aim of the tests to verify conformity
with the requirements covered by the Rules for Construction, and to prove the suitability of equipment for
its particular application.
6.
B.
Transformers
Power electronics
Switchboards
Main switchboards
Emergency switchboards
2.5
1.
The list of documents subject to approval is
specified in Section 11a, C.
2.
The documents which have been examined
and approved by GL Head Office shall be presented to
the GL Surveyor on request.
2.6
Computer System
Chapter 8
Page 11l2
3.
Section 11l
Tests
3.1
A part of the products under 2.1, 2.3 and 2.4
may be tested on the manufacturer's own responsibility if the following preconditions are fulfilled:
3.2
Reference is made to the GL Rules VI Additional Rules and Guidelines, Part 3 Machinery Installations, Chapter 8 Guidelines for the Inspection
of Mechanical and Electrotechnical Products.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
3.
3.1
General
D.
Tests on Board
1.
General
2.
2.1
During the period of construction of the vessel, the installations shall be checked for conformity
with the documents approved by GL and with the
Rules for Construction.
Generators
Storage batteries
3.4
Switchgear
2.2
Test Certificates for tests which have already
been performed shall be presented to the Surveyor on
request.
2.3
protection against electric shock, such as protective earthing, protective separation or other
measures as listed in Section 11a.
2.4
I - Part 1
GL 2007
3.5
Section 11l
Tests
Power electronics
Chapter 8
Page 11l3
E.
Type Approvals
3.6
Power plants
3.7
2.
Type tests shall be carried out in the presence
of a staff member of the Head Office either in the
manufacturer's works or, by agreement, in suitable
institutions.
3.
Type tests are carried out according to GL
Rules VI Additional Rules and Guidelines, Part 7
Guidelines for the Performance of Type Approvals
and standards defined therein.
- fuel pumps
4.
Type tested installations, apparatuses and
assemblies shall be used within the scope of valid
Construction Rules only. The suitability for the subject application shall be ensured.
5.
1.
The installations, equipment and assemblies
mentioned in 5. are subject to mandatory type approval.
5.1
Generator protection devices, see Section
11d, A. and Section 11e, G.
3.8
5.2
4.1
5.3
Steering gear and lateral thrust propeller
system, see Section 11g, A. and B.
5.4
4.2
4.2.1
Tests shall be carried out to determine
whether all the machines, equipment, etc. constituting
the electrical installation operate satisfactorily at all
revolutions of the main engine, particularly during
engine and steering gear manoeuvres.
4.2.2
Tests shall be carried out on the restoration of
the main and emergency electrical power supplies
following a black-out during navigation.
safety devices
safety system
5.5
Vessels control and safety system, see Section 11h, C. and D.
5.6
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 12
Chapter 8
Page 121
Section 12
Special Requirements for Automation
A.
General
1.
Full automation
B.
The following documents are to be submitted for approval in German or English language, in triplicate
and in good time so that they can be approved and
made available to the GL Surveyor at the start of
manufacture respectively at the installation of the
systems.
1.
Newbuildings
1.1
For each of the systems described in the following:
C.
1.
Extent of automation
The extent of automation of the propulsion plant together with the auxiliary equipment necessary for
operation and the safety of the vessel is to be sufficient for an unattended engine room operation during
normal sea service and normal manoeuvring.
The supervision of the machinery plant is done from
the navigating bridge.
2.
Automatic restart or manual start possibility
from the bridge after a blackout is to be arranged for
all components which are necessary for restoring of
propulsion.
Exemptions may be granted for multi unit installations
where stop of one unit does not cause loss of propulsion.
general plan
wiring diagrams
3.
general arrangement
functional description
1.2
The list of measuring points is to be submitted for the monitoring system.
1.3
List of indications located on the navigating
bridge for the supervision of the machinery.
1.4
Safety programmes giving details of limit
values which result in shutdown or reduction are to be
Manual operation
Pneumatic and hydraulic systems for supplying nonredundant units or more than one consumer have to be
redundant in design.
Chapter 8
Page 122
Section 12
D.
Monitoring Equipment
1.
1.1
The machinery alarm system shall provide an
optical and an audible signal of unacceptable deviations from operating figures.
1.2
The alarms shall be presented on the navigating bridge.
1.3
Collective alarms are allowed for stand-alone
systems except main propulsion machinery.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
1.14
Alarm systems shall be designed on the
closed-circuit or the monitored open-circuit principle.
Equivalent monitoring principles are permitted.
1.15
The alarm system is to be supplied from the
main power source with battery backup for at least 15
minutes.
The failure of the supply from the main power source
is to be alarmed.
1.16
The automatic suppression of alarm signals is
to be monitored for correct function or shall be of
redundant type.
1.17
The failure of the machinery alarm system
shall be alarmed.
1.4
Alarm delays shall be kept within time limits
to prevent any risk to the monitored system in the
event of exceeding the limit value.
1.18
Machinery alarm systems are subject to mandatory type approval.
2.
1.5
Optical signals shall be individually indicated
at a central position. The meaning of the individual
indications has to be clearly identifiable by text or
symbols.
1.6
If a fault is indicated, the optical signal shall
remain visible until the fault has been eliminated.
1.7
It shall be possible to distinguish between an
optical signal which has been acknowledged and one
that has not been acknowledged.
2.1
An automatic fire detection and alarm system
with means of testing is to be provided which indicates the initial stage of fire in machinery spaces.
The fire detection system has to be based on a selfmonitoring principle. Only ionisation or smoke detectors are permitted.
2.2
The fire alarm shall be given visually and
audibly on the navigation bridge, in the machinery
spaces, and in the accommodation.
1.8
It shall be possible to acknowledge audible
signals.
1.9
The acknowledgement of an alarm shall not
inhibit an alarm which has been generated by new
causes.
2.3
Location and number of the detectors shall be
such as to provide ample cover for all the endangered
areas.
1.10
Acknowledgement of optical alarms shall
only be possible where the fault has been indicated as
an individual signal and a sufficient overview of the
concerned process is been given.
2.4
The fire detection system is to be fed automatically from an emergency source of power if the
main source of power fails.
1.11
Alarms have to be discernible under all operating conditions. Where this cannot be guaranteed, for
example due to the noise level, additional optical signals, e.g. flashing lights must be installed.
1.12
Transient faults which are self-correcting
without intervention shall be memorized and indicated
by optical signals which shall only disappear when the
alarm has been acknowledged.
1.13
Where an alarm has not been acknowledged
within a preset time, an alarm shall be released in the
accommodation and mess areas of the engineer officers.
2.5
Fire detection and alarm systems are subject
to mandatory type approval.
3.
Safety system
3.1
A safety system which is for all important
parameters independent of the alarm system, is to be
provided.
3.2
When abnormal operating conditions are
reached or serious malfunction occur which cannot be
dealt with in time by the crew members responsible
for the machinery, the safety system has to safeguard
machinery against critical conditions (automatic shutdown).
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 12
Chapter 8
Page 123
3.3
Where safety systems are provided with overriding arrangements, these shall be safeguarded
against accidental operation. The actuation of overriding arrangements is to be indicated.
3.4
The monitored open-circuit principle is to be
applied to safety systems. Alternatively, the closed
circuit principle may be applied where it is demanded
by the provisions of national regulations (e.g. boiler
and oil-fired systems).
2.
E.
1.
Single lever control is to be preferred for remote control systems. Lever movement shall be in accordance
Control positions
Transfer of command from one control station to another shall only be possible when the respective control levers are in the same position and when a signal
to accept the transfer is given from the selected control
station. A display at each control station shall indicate
which control station is in operation.
Change-over of control within the bridge area is not
required where the control levers at the control stations are mechanically or electrically connected together and with the control unit of the remote control
system so that they automatically adopt the same position.
4.
Emergency shut-down:
An indicator showing the rotation speed of the propeller shaft and the pitch of the blades.
4.5
gears:
Chapter 8
Page 124
Section 12
4.6
For installations equipped with clutch couplings:
An arrangement is to be provided for remote-controlled engagement/disengagement of the couplings.
The engaged/disengaged position is to be indicated.
4.7
Additional necessary indications for the supervision of the machinery plant may be decided case
by case.
5.
1.
Valves in the vessel's shell plating which are
open during operation of the engines have to be accessible and capable of operation from a safe height
above the floor plates.
2.
Engine room bilges and drain wells are to be
large enough to accommodate normal drainage without tripping a level alarm during the unattended period.
Shaft-driven generators
F.
1.
Fire protection
1.1
Fuel injection high pressure lines of diesel
engines are to be shielded or installed in such a way
that, should leakage occur, the leaking fuel can be
safely collected in a suitable drain tank.
1.2
Where tanks with flammable liquids are replenished automatically or remote-controlled, means
are to be provided to prevent overflow spillage.
2.
G.
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Fire extinguishing
3.
In each machinery space bilge at least 2 high
level sensors are to be provided. In vessels with the
Class Notation K (Coastal Service) one level sensor
may be accepted.
H.
Miscellaneous
1.
Tests
I.
2.1
A fixed fire extinguishing system according
to Section 8 is to be provided in the machinery spaces.
The following Tables 12.1 12.3 summarize the monitored parameters and define the limits for an alarm.
2.2
One main fire pump is to be provided with a
remote start arrangement from the navigating bridge.
Section 12
Table 12.1
Monitored parameters:
L = low limit
H = high limit
Limit
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Chapter 8
Page 125
Comments
Main engine
Engine overspeed
L+H
Gear
Shafting
Temperature of stern tube bearing aft
For shaft diameter < 400 mm sensor may be located in the vicinity of the aft bearing.
Couplings
Control power of couplings
Table 12.2
Section 12
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Alarms for propulsion machinery Auxiliary machinery, tanks and miscellaneous items
Monitored parameters:
L = low limit
H = high limit
Diesel generators
Engine overspeed
Lubricating oil pressure at engine inlet
Lubricating oil temperature at engine inlet
Fuel oil pressure at engine inlet
Fuel oil leakage from high pressure pipes
Cylinder cooling water pressure or flow at engine
inlet
Cylinder cooling water temperature at cylinder
outlet
Oil mist concentration in crankcase
Voltage
Frequency
Tripping of non-essential consumers
Limit
Chapter 8
Page 126
H
L
H
L
Comments
L
H
H
L+H
L
Applies only to propulsion plants with nonelectrically driven essential auxiliaries.
Steering gear
Failure of steering gear
Phase failure/overload
Failure of control system
Tank levels
Fuel service tanks
Expansion tanks
Sludge, leak oil and fuel oil overflow tanks
Gravity oil tanks for stern tube
Main engine lubricating oil sump trunks/tanks
Steering gear hydraulic oil tank
L
L
H
L
L
L
Section 12
Table 12.3
Alarms for propulsion machinery of 750 kW and above Auxiliary steam boilers and thermal
oil plants
Monitored parameters:
L = low limit
H = high limit
Limit
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Comments
Steam boilers
Tripping of safety system
Steam pressure
L+H
Water level
L+H
Salinity of condensate
L
H
L+H
Chapter 8
Page 127
At heater outlet
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 13
Spare Parts
Chapter 8
Page 131
Section 13
Spare Parts
A.
General
1.
1.
In order to be able to restore engine operation
and manoeuvring capacity to the vessel in the event of
damage at sea, spare parts for the main drive and the
essential equipment as defined herein and in the basic
Rules are to be carried on board every fishing vessel,
together with the necessary tools.
These requirements are considered to be complied
with if the range of spare parts corresponds to the
following Tables allowing for the extent of the installed systems and components in question at the time
of commissioning.
2.
Depending on the design and arrangement of
the engine plant, the intended service and operation of
the fishing vessel, and also the manufacturers recommendations, a different volume of spare parts may
be agreed between the owner/operator and GL.
5.
3.
In case of propulsion systems and operationally essential machinery which are not included in the
following Tables, the requisite range of spare parts is
to be established in each individual case between
shipyard, vessel owner and GL.
4.
Spare parts shall be properly stored and protected against vibration, humidity and damages.
Heavy spare parts should be kept near the point of
installation and means to remove them have to be
provided.
B.
For hydraulic systems see especially Section 5 (windlass, mooring winches, etc.), Section 6 (winches,
power blocks, stern gallows, etc.),. The volume of
spare parts is defined in Table 13.6.
7.
Chapter 8
Page 132
Table 13.1
Section 13
Spare Parts
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Main bearings
Connecting
rod bearings
Main bearings or shells for one bearing of each size and type fitted,
complete with shims, bolts and nuts
Bottom end bearings or shells of each size and type fitted, complete
with shims, bolts and nuts, for one cylinder
1 set
1 set
Cylinder liner
Cylinder cover
Cylinder cover with full equipment and ready for installation, including gaskets
set
Exhaust valves, with full equipment and ready for installation, for one
cylinder
1 set
1 set
Inlet valves, with full equipment and ready for installation, for one
cylinder
1 set
1 set
Starting air valve, with full equipment and ready for installation
1 set
set
Valves
Fuel injection valves of each type, ready for installation, for one engine 2
Hydraulic valve drive
Piston:
Trunk piston type
Piston of each type, ready for fitting, with piston rings, gudgeon pin,
connecting rod, bolts and nuts
Piston rings
1 set
Cylinder lubricator
High pressure fuel pipe of each size and shape fitted, complete with
couplings
1 set
1 set
Special gaskets and packings of each type for cylinder covers and
cylinder liners, for one cylinder
1 set
In the case of multi-engine installations, the minimum required spares are only necessary for one engine.
a) Engines with one or two fuel-injection valve per cylinder: one set of fuel valves, complete
b) Engines with more than two fuel injection valves per cylinder: two valves complete per cylinder plus a corresponding number of
valve parts (excluding the valve bodies) which make it possible to form a complete spare set by re-using the operational parts of the
dismantled valves.
Spare parts for exhaust-gas turbocharger and auxiliary blower may be omitted if emergency operation of the main engine after failure is
demonstrably possible.
The requisite blanking and blocking arrangements for the emergency operation of the main engine are to be available on board.
The necessary tools and equipment for fitting the required spare parts have to be available on board.
Spare parts are to be replaced immediately as soon as they are "used up"
I - Part 1
GL 2007
Section 13
Table 13.2
Spare parts for auxiliary internal combustion engines driving electric generators for essential
equipment
Spare Parts
Chapter 8
Page 133
Valves
Bearings or shells for one bearing of each size and type fitted, complete with
shims, bolts and nuts
Exhaust valves, complete with casings, seats, springs and other fittings for one
cylinder
2 sets
Inlet valves, complete with casings, seats, springs and other fittings for one cylinder
1 set
Starting air valve, complete with casing, seat, springs and other fittings
Fuel valves of each size and type fitted, complete, with all fittings, for one engine
Bottom end bearings or shells of each type, complete with all fittings
set
1
Connecting rod
bearings
Piston rings
Fuel injection pump complete or, when replacement of individual components at sea
is practicable, complete pump element with associated valves, seals, springs, etc.
High pressure fuel pipe of each size and shape fitted, complete with couplings
Special gaskets and packings of each size and type fitted, for cylinder covers and
cylinder liners for one cylinder
1
1 set
1 set
Notes
1. Where the number of generating sets (including stand-by units) is greater than required, no spares are required for the
auxiliary engines.
2. Where several internal combustion engines of the same type are installed for generator drive spare parts are required for
one engine only.
3. No spares are required for the engine driving emergency generator sets.
Table 13.3
1 set
1 set
1 set
Piston rings of each type and size fitted for one piston
1 set
1 set
Suction and delivery valves complete of each size fitted in one unit
set
set
Table 13.4
Note
Spare parts for refrigerant compressors have to be specially agreed.
Table 13.5
Piston pumps
1 set
1 set
1 set
1 set
Centrifugal pumps
Note
Where, for a system served by a pump, a stand-by pump of sufficient capacity is available, the spare parts may be dispensed.
Chapter 8
Page 134
Table 13.6
Section 13
Spare Parts
I - Part 1
GL 2007
20 %
20 %
Seals, gaskets
1 set
1 set
Note
For seals, this requirement is applicable only to the extent that these parts can be changed with the means available on board.
Where the hydraulic system comprises two mutually independent sub-systems, spare parts need to be supplied for one subsystem only.
Table 13.7
Compressor piston with piston rod and crank bearing of each type, ready for fitting
Set of suction and delivery valves of each type for one cylinder
Suction and delivery valve stem of each type, with cone and seat, for the main shutoff valves of the
compressors
Thermometers for the refrigerating machinery and the refrigerated spaces/tanks including at least two of
each type
5%
Sensors for electrical remotely-operated thermometers, including at least one of each type
5%
Note
According to the size of the refrigerating installation, a sufficient number of suitable packing, jointing and sealing materials;
a few length of the most commonly used pipes, screw couplings, flanges nuts and bolts and a device for topping up refrigerant
charge are to be carried on board.
Table 13.8
Other spare parts for main and auxiliary engines and also for essential equipment
Range of spare parts
Safety valve or one valve cone and spring of each type for pressure vessels
Hoses and compensators
Testing device for fuel injection valves
20 %
20 %